TW413779B - Touch screen type keyboard input device - Google Patents

Touch screen type keyboard input device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW413779B
TW413779B TW86101883A TW86101883A TW413779B TW 413779 B TW413779 B TW 413779B TW 86101883 A TW86101883 A TW 86101883A TW 86101883 A TW86101883 A TW 86101883A TW 413779 B TW413779 B TW 413779B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
key
input
keys
screen
factory
Prior art date
Application number
TW86101883A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Yoshinari Kato
Shunji Kato
Original Assignee
Misawa Homes Co
Yoshinari Kato
Shunji Kato
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP28862495A external-priority patent/JP3738066B2/en
Priority claimed from JP28861495A external-priority patent/JP4316687B2/en
Priority claimed from JP03093096A external-priority patent/JP3727399B2/en
Application filed by Misawa Homes Co, Yoshinari Kato, Shunji Kato filed Critical Misawa Homes Co
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW413779B publication Critical patent/TW413779B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Input From Keyboards Or The Like (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to the touch screen type keyboard input device with keys (21) to (35) displayed on the screen (3) capable of being touched by light pen (15) or mouse. The keys (21) to (35) displayed on the screen (3) set up the first and second alphanumeric codes. The keys in indication screen (3) are provided to show the key input means inside the area. Depending on the determination of the key selection operation of key input means, one of the first and second alphanumeric codes set up for the keys (21) to (35) is proceeded the selected processing means of the output processing. As each key (21) to (35) has two alphanumeric codes, in comparison with the key set up conventionally as just one alphanumeric code, the keys displayed on the screen (3) can be reduced and the operation can be enhanced.

Description

N r 3779第86101883號專利申請案 Λ曰藏方 中文說明書修正齑民國89年5月修正 王Κ Β7 五、發明說明（22) 畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1係具備有按鍵输入手段 7 1及選擇處理手段7 2，選擇處理手段7 2係由判定手 段7 3及文字產生手段7 4所構成。 本實施形態之按鍵輸入手段71係由使用如前述之筆 1 5之輕觸式輸入手段所構成，於主鍵區域2 0，檢測是 否有藉由筆1 5之輕觸輸入（步驟1 ，以下以S替代「步 驟」兩字）。 在此，若有輕觸輸入，則藉由判定手段7 3判定該輕 觸輸入係靥桿輕觸輸入，亦即筆1 5在保持輕觸的狀態下 於該鍵區域內移動了指定長度以上，或者是點輕觸输入， 亦即筆15的移動距離較指定長度爲短（S2) » 在此，如果經判定爲點輕觸的話，文字產生手段7 4 進行產生被輕觸的鍵的左部位置所設定的第1文字碼的檫 準處理（S 3 )。 在另一方面，如果經判定不是點輕觸而是桿輕觸的話 ，文字產生手段7 4進行產生被輕觸的鍵的右部位置所設 定的第2文字碼的移位處理（S4) » 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 I 閱 讀 背. Sr 之 注 意 事 項 再 壎，' 頁I w I I 1 I I I 訂 線 以此文字產生手段7 4所處理的結果，顯示於液晶畫 面3。 藉由以上所述，結束各輕觸輸入的處理，如果有下— 個輕觸輸入，則反覆進行以上的處理而依序進行輕觭輸入 。此外，在使用第2圖所示之日文排列而輸入的場合，被 輸入的英文字母係經由畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1所內藏 之「假名漢字變換程式」而被認識爲羅馬拼音輸入而以「 本紙張&度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -25 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 413779 at ____B7_五、發明説明（1 ) 技術領域 本發明係關於從文字輸入裝置至输入方法的領域所被 利用的輸入裝置，詳細而言，係關於在小型的電子手冊， 小型的文書處理機或是個人電腦等的畫面上顯示按鍵（軟 體按鍵），該按鍵以筆或是指尖直接接觸，或是利用滑鼠 或數位板等以顯示於畫面上的游標指示按鍵而將按鍵所顯 示的文字或記號等输入之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置· 背景技術 作爲資訊機器，個人電腦或是文書處理機係羼一般* 這些機器性能日益提升同時也急速小型化•亦即，由桌上 型到膝上型，由筆記型到次筆記型的移轉，踏者小型化的 步子》但是，將從前的鍵盤維持原來的排列而小型化的話 亦有其極限，單純將按鍵縮小，有損使用上的方便性· 在此，小型化至企業的營業用工具等所使用的B 5或 B 6尺寸以下的攜帶型電腦、電子手冊、攜帶資訊終端（ PDA)等*對於因爲太小而不易使用的「按鍵輸入」已 經被放棄，而轉移爲採用在畫面上以「筆」或是「指尖j ，特別是使用「筆j輕觸而進行輸入之「畫面輕觸式输入 」，朝著無鍵盤化的方向發展*另一方面，伴隨著近年來 個人電腦或操作系統、各種軟體的髙機能化，桌上型或筆 記型電腦以滑鼠選擇顯示於畫面上的圖示而输入的GU I (圖形使用者界面）變得一般化，不用鍵盤的輸入方式越 來越廣泛。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準（CNS > A4規格（210X297公釐） ~ 1 n I I n n n ^ 1* i— n n n I |冰 {請先《讀背面之注意事項再i,寫本頁) I V"· ^13779 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（29) 時必需的設定爲各種功能的5個功能鍵5 1〜5 5。 亦即於鍵51的左下位置設定爲實施平假名漢字變化 機能的「變換」鍵’鍵5 1的右下位置設定爲输入空每)之 「空格j鍵，鍵5 1的上部位置設定爲設定主鍵區域2 0 的各鍵2 1〜3 5的各種擴充功能的「擴張機能」鍵，又 ，擴張機能鍵所擴充的各種功能包括例如移動游標至文章 頭、文章尾、行頭、行末等位置之移動功能’或是插入、 邊線、移動、剪貼，印刷等文書處理機經常利用到的各種 機能* 此外*鍵5 2的下部位置係實行不要變換平假名爲漢 字的機能之「無變」鍵’上部位置設定爲「取消」鍵。此 外，鍵5 3的下部位置係使游標後退（回到前面）之「後 退」鍵，上部位置設定爲平假名漢字變換時顯示同音異義 字的前候補之「前候」鍵。 進而，鍵5 4的下部位置設定爲「削除」鍵*上部位 置設定爲進行單漢字變換的「單漢」鍵。此外’鍵5 5的 下部位置設定爲「改行j鍵’上部位置係顯示將鍵排列以 後述的英語用排列等切換用的選單之「選單j鍵* 此外，功能鍵5 1較其他的鍵5 2〜5 5在寬度的規 格上爲大。 這些模式鍵41〜43，功能鍵51〜55與主鍵 2 1〜3 5的場合相同，藉由點觸输入及桿觸輸入之選擇 而選擇設定於各鍵4 1〜4 3，5 1〜5 5的上部或是下 部所設定的模式或是功能》 本紙張又度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐)~— ：~ -32 - i n ·1 1· t n ϋ It f ϋ n ϋ 1^—OJ» 1· I I <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再瑱寫本頁) 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（2 ) 但是，現在的滑鼠輸入或是筆輸入，因爲可以在顯示 畫面上直接操作·適於選單或者是命令等的選擇輸入，但 是對於文書處理或是電子郵件等最重要的文字輸入則有不 適用的問題。 例如，使用筆输入型的手寫文字輸入其方便性在於可 使不習慣使用鍵盤的人也能應用，但是在手寫輸入的認識 率不一定很高，進而認識之後還必須變換爲漢字、片假名 、平假名等，總之必須經過「手寫输入」_>「認識」一 >「變換」等工程，具有：輸入操作需要花時間跟繁複手 續，操作性不佳•不能迅速輸入等缺點。 在此，於畫面上設置與鍵盤類似的「文字輸入板」亦 即以畫面上顯示的小鍵「軟體鍵」取代一般鍵盤的鍵「硬 體鍵J ，採用以筆或是滑鼠等輕觸此鍵而輸入文字的方法 〇 然而，以往的「文字輸入板J係繼承從前的鍵盤的形 狀•軟體鍵相當細小而且密集，具有不易輕觸選擇的缺點N r 3779 Patent Application No. 86101883 Λ Revision of Tibetan Chinese Specification Revision May 1989 Revision of King K Β7 V. Description of Invention (22) On-screen keyboard input device 1 is equipped with key input means 71 and options The processing means 72 and the selection processing means 72 are composed of a determination means 73 and a character generation means 74. The key input means 71 of this embodiment is formed by using the touch input means of the pen 15 as described above, and in the main key area 20, it is detected whether there is a touch input by the pen 15 (step 1, the following is as follows) S instead of "step"). Here, if there is a touch input, it is determined by the determination means 7 3 that the touch input is a stick touch input, that is, the pen 15 has moved more than a specified length in the key area while keeping the touch. , Or touch input, that is, the moving distance of the pen 15 is shorter than the specified length (S2) »Here, if it is determined that the touch is a touch, the text generating means 7 4 generates the left of the touched key Alignment processing of the first character code set at the position (S 3). On the other hand, if it is determined that the tap is not a tap but a tap, the character generating means 74 performs shift processing for generating a second character code set at the right position of the tapped key (S4) » Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. I read the back. Sr's note again, 'Page I w II 1 III The result of the processing using the text generating means 7 4 is displayed on the LCD screen 3. With the above, the processing of each tap input is ended. If there is the next one tap input, the above processing is repeatedly performed and the tap input is performed sequentially. In addition, when using the Japanese arrangement shown in FIG. 2 for input, the entered English letters are recognized as Roman pinyin input through the "Kana Kanji conversion program" built into the on-screen keyboard input device 1. "This paper & degree is subject to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -25-Printed by Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 at ____B7_ V. Description of Invention (1) Technical Field The invention relates to input devices used in fields ranging from text input devices to input methods. More specifically, it relates to displaying keys (software keys) on the screen of a small electronic manual, a small word processor, or a personal computer. The screen display keyboard input device, which directly touches the key with a pen or a fingertip, or uses a cursor or a tablet to display a cursor on the screen to input text or symbols displayed on the key. Background Technology as an information machine, personal computer or word processor system is generally * These machines are increasingly improving in performance and are rapidly miniaturizing. Steps from desktop to laptop, from notebook to sub-notebook, miniaturization of the stepper "However, if the previous keyboard is maintained in the original arrangement and the miniaturization has its limits, it will simply shrink the keys It is detrimental to the convenience of use. Here, portable computers, electronic manuals, portable information terminals (PDAs), etc. that are smaller than B 5 or B 6 size used by business tools, etc. of enterprises are reduced. The small and difficult-to-use "key input" has been abandoned, and has been transferred to "screen touch input" using "pen" or "fingertip j" on the screen, especially using "pen j to touch and input" On the other hand, as personal computers, operating systems, and various software have become more functional in recent years, desktop or notebook computers use mouse to select icons displayed on the screen. The input GUI (graphical user interface) has become generalized, and input methods without a keyboard have become more and more widespread. This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS > A4 size (210X297 mm) ~ 1 n II nnn ^ 1 * i— nnn I | ice {please read the precautions on the back, then i, write this page) I V " · ^ 13779 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (29) The five function keys 5 1 ~ 5 5 required for various functions. That is, the lower left position of the key 51 is set to the "transformation" key 'key 5 1 which implements the function of changing the hiragana character. The lower right position of the key 5 1 is set to the input blank space. The "space j key" is set to the upper position of the key 51. "Expansion function" keys of various extended functions of each key 2 1 to 3 5 in the main key area 20, and various functions extended by the expansion function keys include, for example, moving the cursor to the position of the head of the article, the end of the article, the beginning of the line, and the end of the line. "Movement function" or various functions often used by word processing machines such as insert, border, move, cut and paste, and print * In addition, the lower position of the key 5 2 is a "no change" key that does not change the function of Hiragana. The upper position is set to the "Cancel" key. In addition, the lower position of the key 5 3 is the "back" key for moving the cursor back (backward), and the upper position is set to the "forward" key of the alternate candidate for displaying homonyms when converting hiragana characters. Further, the lower position of the key 54 is set to the "cut" key * and the upper position is set to the "single-han" key for performing single-kanji conversion. In addition, the lower position of the 'key 5 5' is set to the "change line j key." The upper position is a menu "menu j key *" which displays a menu for switching the English arrangement and the like described later. In addition, the function key 5 1 is more important than the other keys 5 2 to 5 5 are large in terms of width. These mode keys 41 to 43 and function keys 51 to 55 are the same as those of the main keys 2 1 to 35, and are selected and set at the point of touch input and the lever input. Each key 4 1 ~ 4 3, 5 1 ~ 5 5 The mode or function set in the upper or lower part "This paper is also applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ~~:: ~ -32-in · 1 1 · tn ϋ It f ϋ n ϋ 1 ^ —OJ »1 · II < Please read the notes on the back before writing this page) 413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (2) However, The current mouse input or pen input can be directly operated on the display screen. It is suitable for selection input of menus or commands, but it is not applicable to the most important text input such as word processing or email. For example, the convenience of using pen-based handwritten text input is to make People who are accustomed to using the keyboard can also use it, but the recognition rate of handwriting input is not necessarily high, and then they must be converted to Chinese characters, katakana, hiragana, etc. After all, they must go through "handwriting input" _ > > Projects such as "transformation" have the disadvantages of requiring time and complicated procedures for input operations, poor operability, and inability to quickly input. Here, a "text input pad" similar to a keyboard is set on the screen, that is, a small key "software key" displayed on the screen is used instead of the key "hardware key J" of a general keyboard, and is touched with a pen or a mouse, etc. How to enter text with this key. However, the conventional "text input panel J series inherits the shape of the previous keyboard. The software keys are very small and dense, and they have the disadvantage of being difficult to touch and select.

D 經濟部中央橾準局員工消费合作杜印褽 ---------裝-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再&gt;%本頁〕 線_ 亦即，從前的「文字輸入板J係在畫面上採用如第 5 5圓所示的QWERTY排列，或是如第5 6圖所示輸入平假 名文字用的「5 0音排列j *兩種方法橫向上都有1 0列 ，在移動筆或滑鼠時移動幅度很大•此外因爲各個軟體鍵 都很小，所以有低操作性的問題 本發明之目的在於提供將顯示於畫面上的g以筆或是 滑鼠輕觸而輸入之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置之中，在畫面 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） -5 - vr A7 B7 五、發明說明（59) 其次參照第3 1及第3 2圖說明實現如前述般的鍵盤 排列的本發明相關之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 0 1之內 -------裝 i I (請先閱讀背面之注^^項再 内本頁) 部構成。 第3 1圖係實現畫面顧示式鍵盤輸入裝置1 0 .1之內 部構成之方塊圖，第3 2圄係顯示處理步驟之流程圖· 畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 0 1 ，係具備有：输入控 制部170、移位輸入手段171、處理控制部172、 输出控制部1 7 6 * 輸入控制部1 7 0係於選擇選單11 、主鍵S域2 0. 、切換鍵區域4 0、功能鍵區域5 0等處檢測是否有藉由 筆1 5之輕觸輸入（步驟1 ，以下以S替代「步騄」兩字 在此*若有輕觸输入，則移位输入手段1 7 1判斷該 輕觸輸入是否爲移位輸入（S2)· --線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 在此，如果經判定爲移位輸入的話·移位輸入手段 171進行產生被輕觭的鍵的移位位置之鍵碼之移位處理 (S3)，而將該碼送至處理控制部172*另一方面， 如果判斷並非移位输入的話移位输入手段1 7 1產生該被 觸之鍵之非移位位置的鍵碼而送至處理控制部1 7 2 » 於處理控制部1 7 2設有排列切換手段1 7 3、鍵處 理手段174、功能處理手段175的各處理手段，因應 輸入之鍵而選擇各處理手段進行输入處理（S 4 )。例如 ，輸入的鍵若係選擇選單1 1的各選單鍵1 6〜1 9 ’或 是切換鍵區域4 0的各切換鍵4 1〜4 3的話，藉由該排 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） -62 - 413779 經濟部中央標準扃員工消費合作社印裝 A7 ____B7五、發明説明（3 ) 上顯示的k數很少且操作性佳可以快速輸入的畫面顯示式 • ________〆..-·〆 鍵盤输入裝置* 發明之開示 本發明係選擇顯示於畫面之鍵之畫面顯示式输入裝置 ，其中，前述畫面上所顯示的鍵盤，其特徴爲係具備有以 下之構成：在設定顯示至少文字、數字、記號等之第1及 第2的兩個文字碼的同時，具有：指示前述鍵盤的顯示領 域內之鍵盤输入手段，及判定此按鎗输入手段之按鍵選擇 操作的分別而選擇設定於各鍵之第1及第2文字碼的一方 並加以輸出處理之選擇處理手段。 根據本發明如此之構成，因爲1個按鍵可以設定爲2 個文字碼，例如文字、數字、記號等，所以，例如英文2 6個字母可以用1 3個鍵來設定，與從前相比畫面所顯示 的鍵數可以減半。因此，選擇按鍵時筆或滑鼠的移動量也 可以縮小，此外每個按鍵也可以作成較大的鍵，操作性可 以提高。 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之輕觸式输入手段所構 成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判斷前述輕觸式輸入手 段在前述按鍵領域內保持輕觸的狀態所移動的距離是否較 指定距離爲長之判定手段，及藉由此判定手段在判定前述 輕觸式輸入手段在輕觸按鍵的狀態下移動的距離較指定的 距離爲短的場合，選擇输出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼， 本紙張尺度適用肀國國家標準（CNS &gt; A4规格（210X297公釐） ---------^------ΤΓ------&lt; (請先閱讀背面之注意事續再瑣寫本頁} -6 ~ Α7 Β7 413779 五、發明說明（60) 列切換手段1 7 3所指定的排列而將該鎗所指示的排列切 換爲主鍵區域20、切換鍵區域40，功能鍵面域50進 &lt;請先閱讀背面之注意事項再 4本頁) 行切換處理。 此外，輸入之鍵如果爲主鍵區域2 0的各鍵的話，藉 由鍵處理手段1 7 4而將該鍵顯示於輸入行6 0 .進行输 出處理（S 4 )»此時標準排列等的羅馬拼音式输入的場 合•鍵處理手段1 7 4將输入的英文字母自動的進行變換 成平假名的處理（S4)。 進而，被输入的鍵如果是功能鍵區域5 0的各鍵的話 .，藉由功能處理手段175而實行該鍵所設定的功能（ S4)·例如輕觸變換鍵51的話，顯示於輸入行60的 文字列變換爲漢字而告確定。此外，如果實行鍵5 4被輕 觸，進行將確定之文字列顯示於顯示區域1 0之處理· 於輸出控制部1 7 6，進行將處理控制部所處理的結 果，顯示於液晶畫面3之處理（S5)。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 藉由如上之動作，結束對於各鍵之輕觸輪入，如果有 下一個輕觸输入的話，反覆進行以上的處理而依序進行輕 觸輸入· 此外作爲移位输入手段171，如第33圖所示*按 鍵式移位輸入手段1 8 1、單按式移位輸入手段1 8 2、 預移位式移位輸入手段1 8 3，區域區分式移位輸入手段 1 8 4等4個移位輸入手段來選擇適當的手段來應用。 以下，個別說明各移位输入手段1 7 1 » 按鍵式移位輸入手段1 8 1係如第2 2圖所示，其構 本紙張尽度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 * 63 - 經濟部中央棲準局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ___B7 五、發明説明（4 ) 輕觸式輸入手段的移動距離被判定爲在指定長度以上的場 合，選擇輸出該按鍵所被設定的第2文字碼之文字產生手 段* 作成如此之構成，輕觸式輸入手段可以藉由改變輕觸 按鍵的長度而改變按鍵的選擇操作，输入的操作性可以提 高。 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之輕觸式輸入手段所構 成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判斷前述輕觸式輸入手 段在前述按鍵領域內保持輕觸的狀態之持績時間是否較指 定時間爲長之判定手段，及藉由此判定手段在判定前述輕 觸式输入手段在輕觸按鍵的狀態下之持續時間較指定的時 間爲短的場合，選擇轎出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，輕 觸式輸入手段的持續時間被判定爲在指定時間以上的場合 ，選擇輸出該按鍵所被設定的第2文字碼之文字產生手段 〇 作成如此之構成，輕觸式輸入手段可以藉由改變輕觸 按鍵的持續時間而改變按鍵的選擇操作，輸入的操作性可 以提高。 .此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之輕觸式输入手段所構 成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判斷前述輕觸式輸入手 段在前述按鍵領域內輕觸的壓力是否在指定壓力以上之判 定手段，及藉由此判定手段在判定前述輕觸式输入手段在 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS &gt; A4规格（210X297公羞） I--------&lt;------1T (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -7 - Α7 Β7 41#7# 五、發明說明（61 ) (請先W讀背面之注意事項再&gt;寫本I&gt; 成爲：按鍵4在押下的同時以筆15在鍵上輕觸的場合， 產生該鍵的移位狀態所設定的記號的碼（第2文字碼）· 在按鍵4沒有被應下的狀態輕觸鍵的場合，產生該鍵的非 移位狀態所設定的記號碼（第1文字碼） 單按式移位输入手段1 8 2，其構成爲：在以筆1 5 於指定時間內輕觸2次的場合，產生該鍵在移位狀態所設 定的記號碼（第2文字碼），而在指定時間內僅輕觸一次 的場合，產生該鍵的非移位狀態所設定的記號碼（第1文 字碼）。 亦即，如第3 4圖所示•以筆1 5在畫面上由最初輕 觸到第2次輕觸而離開爲止在所設定的時間範圍內的場合 ((1) 、 （2))，判斷其爲移位狀態，以筆輕觸的動 作如果在指定時間以內只有一次的場合（（3) ' (4) 或是第2次的輕觸操作超過了設定的時間的場合（（5 ))，判斷其爲非移位狀態。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 預移位式移位输入手段1 8 3，在如第2 2圖所示之 移位鍵5被壓下而設定爲移位狀態的場合*產生以筆1 5 輕觸之鍵設定爲移位狀態之記號碼（第2文字碼），而在 再度壓下移位鍵5而設定输入模式在非移位狀態的場合， 產生以筆1 5輕觸之鍵設定爲非移位狀態之記號碼（第1 文字碼）* 區域區分式移位输入手段1 8 4係如第3 5圖所示， 各鍵的上側半部爲移位區域1 8 4 A，下側半部匾分爲非 移位區域1 8 4 B時，具備有判斷以筆1 5輕觸了區域1 冢紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210^ 297公f 一 64 一 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準扃貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明（5 ) 輕觸壓力大於指定壓力的場合，選擇输出該鍵所被設定之 第1文字碼，輕觸式輸入手段的輕觸壓力較指定壓力爲小 的場合，選擇输出該按鍵所被設定的第2文字碼之文字產 生手段。 作成如此之構成，輕觸式輸入手段可以藉由改變輕觸 按鍵的壓力大小而改變按鍵的選擇操作*输入的操作性可 以提高。 此外，本發明之構成係真有：前述鍵盤输入手段係以 輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而输入之輕觸式輸入手段及設 於畫面外之按鍵所構成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：在 沒有按下按鍵的狀態下藉由前述輕觸式输入手段在前述按 鍵領域內輕觸的場合，選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字 碼，在按下按鍵的同時藉由前述輕觸式输入手段在前述按 鍵領域內輕觸的場合，選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字 碼之文字產生手段· 在此場合，除了用筆或手指等的輕觸操作之外，因爲 不得不壓按鍵•所以有使用兩隻手的必要•但使用兩隻手 的話可以簡單進行移位操作。 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之輕觸式輸入手段所構 成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：在各鍵領域內被區分之 第1及第2的各領域之中判定何者被輕觸之判定手段，及 藉此判定手段在判斷係第1領域被輕觸時選擇输出該鍵所 被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段在判斷係第2領域被輕觸 ---------^-- (請先S讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) 訂 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標车{ CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） -8 -D Consumption Cooperation of Employees of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du Yin 褽 ------------ Install-(Please read the precautions on the back then>% of this page] Line _ That is, the previous "text input The board J series uses QWERTY arrangement as shown in circle 55, or "50-tone arrangement j for inputting hiragana characters as shown in figure 56. * Both methods have 10 columns in the horizontal direction. , The movement range is very large when moving the pen or mouse. In addition, because each software key is small, there is a problem of low operability. The object of the present invention is to provide the g displayed on the screen to be touched with a pen or a mouse. In the input screen display keyboard input device, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) is applied to the paper size of the screen. -5-vr A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (59) Secondly refer to Section 3 1 And Fig. 3 and 2 illustrate the on-screen keyboard input device 1 101 which is related to the present invention that realizes the keyboard arrangement as described above. ----- Install i I (please read the note ^^ on the back first) (Inner page). Figure 31 is a block diagram of the internal structure of the on-screen keyboard input device 10.1. The 32nd part is a flowchart of the display processing steps. The on-screen keyboard input device 1 0 1 includes: an input control section 170, a shift input means 171, a processing control section 172, and an output control section 1 7 6 * Input The control unit 1 0 0 detects whether there is a tap input by the pen 15 (step 1, the following is S). The selection menu 11, the main key S field 2 0., the switch key area 4 0, the function key area 50, etc. Replace the word "step" here * If there is a touch input, the shift input means 1 7 1 to determine whether the touch input is a shift input (S2) · --- Line-Consumer Cooperation of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs If Du is printed here, the shift input means 171 performs shift processing (S3) of the key code that generates the shift position of the tapped key if it is determined to be shift input, and sends the code to the process control. 172 * On the other hand, if it is judged that it is not shift input, the shift input means 1 7 1 generates a key code of the non-shift position of the touched key and sends it to the processing control section 1 7 2 »to the processing control section 1 7 2 Arrange switching means 1 7 3. Each of key processing means 174 and function processing means 175 The processing means selects each processing means for input processing according to the input key (S 4). For example, if the input key is to select each of the menu keys 16 to 19 of the menu 1 1 or to switch each of the key regions 40 0 If you switch the keys 4 1 to 4 3, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) applies to the size of the paper. -62-413779 Central standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 扃 Printed by employee consumer cooperatives A7 ____B7 Description of the invention (3) A screen display type with a small number of k displayed on the screen and good operability and quick input • ________ 〆 ..- 〆〆Keyboard input device * Invention of the invention The present invention is a screen for selecting keys displayed on the screen The display-type input device is characterized in that the keyboard displayed on the screen has the following structure: at the same time, it is set to display the first and second two character codes such as at least characters, numbers, symbols, etc. : Indicates the keyboard input means in the display area of the aforementioned keyboard, and determines the key selection operation of the gun input means, selects one of the first and second text codes set for each key, and outputs the process Selection process means. According to the structure of the present invention, one key can be set to two text codes, such as characters, numbers, and symbols. Therefore, for example, two or six letters in English can be set using one or three keys. Compared with the previous screen, The number of keys displayed can be halved. Therefore, the amount of movement of the pen or mouse can be reduced when a key is selected, and each key can also be made a larger key, which improves the operability. In addition, the structure of the present invention includes: the keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means that is inputted by touching each key area displayed on the screen, and the selection processing means is provided by: judging the touch input means A determination means for determining whether the distance moved by keeping the tapped state longer than a specified distance in the aforementioned key field is longer than the specified distance, and the determination means is used to determine that the touch input means has moved a longer distance than the specified distance when the button is tapped When the distance is short, choose to output the first text code set by this key. This paper size applies the national standard (CNS &gt; A4 specification (210X297 mm) --------- ^- ----- ΤΓ ------ &lt; (Please read the cautions on the reverse side and write this page again) -6 ~ Α7 Β7 413779 V. Description of the invention (60) Designated by column switching means 1 7 3 And switch the arrangement indicated by the gun to the main key area 20, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50 (<Please read the precautions on the back and then 4 pages) to switch the processing. In addition, enter the key If each key in the main key area 2 0, The key processing means 1 7 4 displays the key in the input line 6 0. Output processing (S 4) »In this case, the Roman alphabet type input such as the standard arrangement at this time • The key processing means 1 7 4 will input the English alphabet The process of converting to Hiragana is automatically performed (S4). Furthermore, if the inputted keys are the keys of the function key area 50, the function set by the key is executed by the function processing means 175 (S4). For example When the conversion key 51 is tapped, the character string displayed on the input line 60 is converted into Chinese characters and confirmed. In addition, if the execution key 5 4 is tapped, processing to display the determined character string in the display area 10 is performed. The control unit 176 performs the process of displaying the result processed by the processing control unit on the LCD screen 3 (S5). Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the touch of each key is ended by the above operation. In turn, if there is the next touch input, the above process is repeated and the touch input is performed sequentially. In addition, as the shift input means 171, as shown in FIG. 33 * Key shift input means 1 8 1, single 4 shift input means such as pre-shift type shift input means 1 8 3, pre-shift type shift input means 1 8 3, area-specific shift input means 1 8 4 are used to select appropriate means to apply. Hereinafter, individual explanations will be given below. Each shift input means 1 7 1 »Push-button shift input means 1 8 1 is shown in Figure 2 and its structure paper is to the fullest extent applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm>) * 63-Printed by the Consumers Cooperative of the Central Habitat Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (4) When the touch distance of the touch input means is judged to be longer than the specified length, the second output set by this key is selected and output The text generating means of the text code * is structured so that the touch input means can change the selection operation of the keys by changing the length of the touch keys, and the input operability can be improved. In addition, the structure of the present invention includes: the keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means that is inputted by touching each key area displayed on the screen, and the selection processing means is provided by: judging the touch input means A determination means for determining whether the holding time of the touch state in the aforementioned key field is longer than a specified time, and by means of this determination means, it is determined that the duration of the touch input means in the state of a touch key is longer than a specified time When the time is short, select the car to output the first character code set by the key, and when the duration of the touch input means is judged to be longer than the specified time, select to output the second character set by the key The code character generating means 0 is constructed so that the touch input means can change the selection operation of the key by changing the duration of the touch key, and the input operability can be improved. In addition, the configuration of the present invention includes: the keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means that is inputted by touching each key area displayed on the screen, and the selection processing means is provided by: judging the touch input Judging means for determining whether the pressure of tapping in the aforementioned key field is above a specified pressure, and using this judging method to determine whether the aforementioned tapping input method is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 specification (210X297) Shame) I -------- &lt; ----- 1T (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -7-Α7 Β7 41 # 7 # V. Description of the invention (61) ( Please read the precautions on the back first and then> Writing Book I> becomes: When button 4 is touched with pen 15 while touching the key, the code of the mark set in the shift state of the key is generated (second text Code) · When the key is touched in the state where the key 4 is not pressed, a note number (first character code) set in the non-shift state of the key is generated. The single-touch shift input means 1 8 2 has a structure To: When the pen 1 5 is tapped twice within a specified time, When the key is set in the shifted state (the second text code), and when it is touched only once within a specified time, the key set in the non-shifted state of the key (the first text code) is generated. That is, as shown in Fig. 34, when the pen 15 is on the screen from the first touch to the second touch and exits within the set time range ((1), (2)), It is judged that it is in a shifted state. If the touch operation with the pen is performed only once within the specified time ((3) '(4) or the second touch operation exceeds the set time ((5) ), It is judged that it is in a non-shifting state. The pre-shifting shift input means 1 8 3 is printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, and is set when the shift key 5 shown in FIG. 2 is depressed. In the case of shifting state * Generate a note number (second text code) set by the key touched by pen 1 5 to the shifting state, and press the shift key 5 again to set the input mode to the non-shifting state. Occasionally, generate a note number (the first text code) that is set to the non-shifting state by touching the key with the pen 1 5 The input means 1 8 4 is as shown in FIG. 35. The upper half of each key is a shifted area 1 8 4 A, and the lower half of the plaque is divided into a non-shifted area 1 8 4 B. Pen 1 5 touches the area 1. The paper size of the mound is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 ^ 297 male f-64-413779 A7 B7. Printed by the Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Bayer Consumer Cooperative. 5. Description of the invention (5) When the touch pressure is greater than the specified pressure, select to output the first text code set by the key. When the touch pressure of the touch input means is smaller than the specified pressure, select to output the second text set by the key. Code text generation means. With such a structure, the touch input means can change the selection operation of the keys by changing the pressure of the touch keys. The input operability can be improved. In addition, the structure of the present invention is as follows: the aforementioned keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means which is inputted by touching each key area displayed on the screen and a key provided outside the screen, and the aforementioned selection processing means includes: When the key is touched in the key area by the touch input means without pressing the key, the first text code set by the key is selected and output, and the key is pressed by the touch while the key is pressed. When the input method is tapped in the aforementioned key area, a character generation method for outputting the second character code set by the key is selected. In this case, in addition to the touch operation with a pen or finger, it is necessary to Pressing the keys • So it is necessary to use two hands • But with two hands, the shift operation can be easily performed. In addition, the configuration of the present invention includes: the keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means that is inputted by touching each key field displayed on the screen, and the selection processing means is distinguished in each key field Judgment means for judging which one is touched in each of the first and second fields, and by this judging means, when the judging system is touched in the first field, it selects and outputs the first text code set by the key and the judging means. It was touched in the second area of the Judgment Department --------- ^-(please read the note f on the back side before filling in this page) The paper size of the book is applicable to the Chinese national standard car {CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -8-

A7B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（72) 亦即，如第3 7圖所示，本實施形態之畫面顯示式鍵 盤输入裝置19 5的本體1 0 2的液晶畫面1 0 3上，顯 示有啓動各種軟體的圖示1 1 1〜1 16 *又，圖示的數 目及以圖示啓動軟體的種類只要適當設定即可，於本實施 形態，設定有啓動表計算、資料庫、通訊、日程表、逋訊 錄、文書處理等各種應用軟體的6個豳示111〜116 〇 而各圖示111〜116藉由啓動操作，而各軟體開 始啓動。例如，將文書處理用的圖示1 1 6啓動的話，如 第3 8圖所示畫面1 0 3上顯示文字输入畫面1 20 ·此 時，輕觸畫面1 0 3的指定部份的話，如前述第1實施形 態，按鍵輸入區域1 2成立刻顯示式顯示文字等，以可以 輕觸輸入者爲佳。 此畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 9 5，係如第3 9圖顯 示的內部構成的方塊圖和第4 0圖顯示處理步驟的流程圖 ，具備有畫面輕觸输入手段7 1與資訊選擇處理手段7 2 ，資訊選擇處理手段7 2係由判定手段7 3、圖示選擇處 理手段7 7及應用軟體啓動手段7 8所構成。 畫面輕觸輸入手段7 1，係檢査於畫面1 〇 3是否藉 由筆15輕觸输入（步驟11 ，以下用S取代步驟）。 在此，若有輕觸输入的話，藉由判定手段7 3判斷該 輕觸輸入是否係桿觸输入亦即筆15在圖示111〜 1 1 6內是否保持輕觸而移動了指定長度以上（s 1 2 ) »判定手段7 3於前述第1實施形態同樣，藉由前述第7 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） —---— — — — — — — — — -----111 ^ — I------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項專.:%本頁) -75 - 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印策 413779 A7 _____B7_五、發明説明（6 ) 時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 在此場合，各鍵之第1及第2領域，事先讓其顯示其 所對應之各文字碼，如果輕觸第1領域側即可輸入第1文 字碼|如果輕觸第2領域即可输入第2文字碼。此時因爲 可以憑直覺的操作而輕觸所欲输入的文字、記號部份以输 入，所以操作上簡明易懂，而且操作性也髙》 在此，作爲按鍵輕觸手段的利用方式，可以是使用輕 觸筆的筆式輸入手段，或者是使用手指輕觸畫面的輕觸螢 幕式輸入手段。 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤输入手段係以 顯示於畫面之游標輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之游 標式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：在前 述游標位於各鍵領域內的狀態判定游標式输入手段所設之 第1及第2按鍵之中之何按鍵被壓下之判定手段，及藉此 判定手段在判斷係第1按鍵被壓下時選擇输出該鍵所被設 定之第1文字碼，判定手段在判斷係第2按鍵被壓下時選 擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 藉由如此之構成·藉著游標式輸入手段的指示，僅靠 適當選擇單按按鈕就可以改變按鍵選擇操作，可以提高操 作性· 在此，作爲游檫式输入手段的利用方式，除了滑鼠、 滑球、數位板、搖桿之外，還可以使用以手指接觸小數位 板之方式，或者是使用於遊戲専用機之控制板等，具有按 鍵或是相當於按鍵之機能而且可以移動顯示於畫面上之游 ----------^------1T------^ (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再％寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準（CMS ) Α4说格（210X297公嫠） -9 ~ 4137 猢Γ A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明.(75) 左側，設有如後述在押下選單鍵時以立刻顯現的方式顯示 選擇選單的選單區域211· 此外，選單區域2 1 1及按鍵输入區域2 1 2可以是 保持顯示的，通常前述顯示區域2 1 0係佔掉幾乎整個液 晶畫面2 0 3，而輕觸顯示於畫面的選擇選單顯示鍵或是 按鍵輸入開始鍵等之後*顯示區域2 1 0上的一部分以立 即顯示式應需要而顯示，顯示區域2 1 0可以擴大，資訊 量可以更多之優點· 此畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置2 0 1，係具有如第4 4 圖所示之內部構成。亦即，盡面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置 2 0 1係具備：備有鍵盤2 1 4A的鍵盤輸入手段2 1 4 ’及備有筆2 1 5A的輕觸輸入手段2 1 5，及處理控制 部2 1 6，及控制畫面2 0 3的顯示输出之输出控制部 2 1 7，以及記億著按鍵排列資料的排列表2 1 8。 鍵盤2 1 4A，係如第4 3圈所示，係薄型小型的卡 片尺寸之物，未使用時可以收容於本體2 0 2內，而且使 用時可以與本體2 0 2分離而利用· 而，鍵盤輸入手段214，在鍵盤214A的各鍵被 输入的場合，藉由電波或是紅外線等無線手段2 1 9而將 按鍵輸入的資訊送至本體2 0 2的處理控制部2 1 6 · 此外，於本體202，設有保持筆215A的保持器 *以能夠防止筆215A的遺失者爲佳* 而，以畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置2 0 1使用筆2 1 5 A的場合，以左手手持本體2 0 2，或者是放在桌上•而 本紙張疋度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） — llllL]llllll — &gt; - I - t I I I »11 — — — — — — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再γ·.^本頁) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消#合作社印製 413779 :77五、發明説明（7 ) 檩之各種输入手段》 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 顯示於畫面之游標輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之游 標式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：在前 述游標位於各鍵領域內的狀態判定游標式輸入手段所設之 按鍵是否在曾被壓下或者是正被壓下的狀態下進行移動游 標式輸入手段之拖動操作（drag)之判定手段*及藉 此判定手段在判斷游標式輸入手段之按鍵被壓下過的場合 ，選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段在判斷 輸入手段曾被拖動的場合，選擇输出該鍵所被設定之第2 文字碼之文字產生手段。 藉由如此之構成*即使只有一個按鍵的游檫式輸入手 段，亦可適用本發明* 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 顯示於畫面之游標輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而输入之游 標式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判定 使用前述游標式輸入手段在指定時間內鍵被輕觸多少次之 判定手段*及藉此判定手段在判斷該鍵在指定時間內被輕 觸1次時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段 在判斷該鍵在指定時間內被輕觸2次時選擇輸出該鍵所被 設定之第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 在此場合，與滑鼠之雙按等同樣可以藉由在指定的時 間內輕觸2次按鍵，或者只輕觸1次而區分输入內容。此 輕觸按鍵的判斷時間如果可以使输入裝置的使用者自行設 -------------裝------訂------Λ (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) Α4規格（210Χ297公釐） -10 - 4哪r ：.A7 B7 五、發明說明（76) 能以右手拿筆2 1 5 A操作即可· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再丨&quot;本頁) 以筆2 15 A輕觸液晶奎面2 0 3的按鍵输入面域 2 1 2的各鍵時，輕觸输入手段2 1 5將輕觸的鍵的輸入 資訊送至處理控制部。 於處理控制部2 1 6，設有鍵盤21 4A或是按鍵输 入區域212將所顯示的各鍵的移位位置資料输入之移位 輸入手段2 6 0，及切換於按鍵输入區域2 1 2所顯示的 各鍵排列的排列切換手段2 6 3，及將輸入的各鍵資料進 行處理的資料處理手段2 6 4，及各鍵的通常位置或是移 位位置的2個資料在設定時選擇输入其一方資料的選擇输 入手段2 6 2，及顯示供切換前述鍵排列用的選擇選單之 選擇選單顯示手段2 6 1。 於鍵盤214A，如第45圖所示，與盡面203的 按鍵输入區域2 1 2成同樣排列狀，設有主鍵區域2 2 0 ，及切換鍵面域2 4 0，及功能鍵區域2 5 0 0 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 亦即，於主鍵區域2 2 0，配置著上下3段左右5列 的1 5個主鍵221〜2 35。此外，於切換鍵區域 240，配置有3個切替鍵241〜243。進而，於功 能鍵區域250，配置有5個功能鍵251〜255 *亦 即，鍵盤2 1 4A，含有切替鍵24 1〜243及功能鍵 2 5 1〜2 5 5共4段計2 3個鍵被配置。 而這些鍵的表面，如第2 3圖顯示前述實施形態之標 準排列所對應之各鍵》 如此構成之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置2 0 1之處理程 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） -79 - 413VV9 經濟部中央橾準局員工消費合作杜印製 A7 _______B7五、發明説明（8 ) 定的話，即使是各使用者在2次輕觸的時間間隔不同的場 合，也可以正確的判斷輕觸1次與輕觸2次。 此外，本發明之構成係具有：前述鍵盤輸入手段係以 顯示於畫面之游檩輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而输入之游 標式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判斷 在各鍵領域內所被區分的第1及第2的各領域之中是何領 域被輕觸之判定手段，及藉此判定手段在判斷係第1領域 被輕觸時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段 在判斷係第2領域被輕觸時選擇输出該鍵所被設定之第2 文字碼之文字產生手段》 在此場合，於各鍵之第1及第2領域預先顯示對應於 第1及第2領域之文字碼之文字或記號，如果輕觸第1領 « 域側則可輸入第文字碼，如果輕觸第2領域側則可输入 第2文字碼。此時，因爲可以憑直覺的操作而輕觸所欲输 入的文字、記號部份以輸入，所以操作上簡明易懂，而且 操作性也高。 此外，本發明於前述畫面，顯示上下3段左右5列之 1 5個主鍵，各主鍵至少顯示對應第1及第2文字碼之記 號。 於此場合，即使只有設置1 5個主鍵，各鍵至少可以 設定2鍵（記號）亦即全體至少可以設置3 0鍵。亦即， 曰語在以羅馬拼音法輸入時所使用的字母，亦即母音「A j 、「I」、「11」、「E」、「Oj等以及與母音鍵組 合而產生日文「私」行至「朽」行爲止的清音等文字用之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐)~~ 一 11 - ---------装-------ir------^ (请先閲讀背面之注意事項存ΐ寫本其) A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 __；__B7 ____ 五、發明說明（77) 序使用第4 6圈之流程圓來說明* 首先，關於按鍵输入手段2 1 4或輕觸输入手段 2 1 5，檢測是否有利用鍵盤2 1 4A或是筆2 1 5A之 輸入（步驟1，以下以S代替步驟）。 在此，若有輸入*則判定該輸入是否係移位輸入（第 2文字碼輸入）。（S2)此判定可以由各鍵輸入手段 2 1 4或是輕觸輸入手段2 1 5來進行亦可，也可已於處 理控制部2 1 6側進行》 此外，按鍵输入的場合·移位鍵2 51於其他的鍵同 時壓著的狀態下，判定爲移位輸入β此外，於輕觸輸入的 場合，如前述各實施形態，以筆1 5的移動量或是接觸的 時間長短而判斷其爲移位输入。 而，若是判斷爲移位輸入時，移位输入手段2 6 0進 行將輸入的鍵的移位位置的鍵作爲輸入之資料而進行移位 處理（S 3 )。 其次，判斷輸入鍵是否爲選單鍵（鍵盤2 1 4Α的場 合爲鍵241，液晶畫面203的場合爲對應鍵241的 移位位置）（S4)，如果選單鍵被输入的話’藉由選擇 選單顯示手段2 6 1而進行於選單區域2 1 1顯示各選擇 選單271〜276的選單顯示處理（S5) ° 另一方面•若非選單鍵，則判斷是否爲排列切換输入 ，亦即切換鍵區域2 4 0的各鍵2 4 1〜2 4 3被輸入’ 選擇選單271〜276是否被輕觸（S6)。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----llllilill 1 t i 1 I l I - — — — —111 — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項戽 两本I) -80 - 413779 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 A7 £7_五、發明説明（9 ) Γ K J、「s」、「Tj、「N」、「Η」、ΓΜ」、「 Y」、「R」、「W」，進而與母音組合而输入日文之濁 音、半濁音之「G」、「Z」、「ϋ」、ΓΡ」、「B」 等1 9個文字之外再加上逗黏「、J 、句點「*」等爲止 各鍵都可以設定於主鍵’如果設定爲日語輸入用之鍵排列 ，則無須切換至其他的鍵排列就可以充分對應日文的輸入 〇 同樣，英文字母26個文字之外再加上逗點^，」、 句點「.」等爲止各鍵都可以設定於主鍵’如果設定爲英 語輸入用之鍵排列，則無須切換至其他的鍵排列就可以充 分對應英文的輸入。 此外1 5個鍵數，較從前QWERTY排列或是日文5 0音 排列相比大幅減少，所以與從前QWERTY排列或是日文5 0 音排列的鍵相同的大小顯示各主鍵的話，全體鍵顯示領域 也可以縮小，可以較畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置更進一步小 型化，同時輕觸按鍵之筆或是手指，進而滑鼠等的游標移 動量也可以減少，提升了操作性· 另一方面*如果主鍵的配置領域與從前QWERTY排列或 是日文5 0音排列領域相同的話，各主鍵的大小可以較從 前爲大•以筆或是指尖可以更容易輕觸*在此場合也提升 了操作性· 本發明之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置，前述1 5個主鍵 之中，上段的5個鍵之各鍵領域內的左部由左側開始依序 顯示「Q」，「E」，「T」、「II」、Γ〇」’中段的 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再丨舄本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) Α4^格（210X297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（78) 在此*若爲排列切換输入，則排列切換手段2 6 3進 行切換將指定排列表218之排列用而切換之排列切換處 理（S 7 ) · 此外，若非排列切換输入，則判斷是否爲選擇輸入（ S 8 )。在此，如果被判斷爲選擇输入的話，進行選擇被 設定的鍵的一方之選擇處理（S 9 )。 而，輸入的鍵經過確認之後|藉由資料處理手段 2 6 4產生該鍵所設定的文字，進行實行各機能的資料處 理（S10)。此時，資料處理手段264,參照排列表 218而設定之鍵排列而基於输入之鍵所對應的文字或是 機能而處理資料。另外，鍵排列的初期值爲標準排列· 而，資料處理的結果，藉由輸出控制部2 1 7而對液 晶畫面203輸出處理（S11)。 藉由以上過程•結束各輸入所相對的處理，如果有下 一個輸入則反覆進行以上的處理而依序進行。 於如此之本實施形態，可以得到與前述各實施形態同 樣的效果，而且在使用筆2 1 5 A輸入輕觸輸入手段 2 1 5之外，因爲還設有鍵盤2 1 4A，所以使用者可以 選用適合的輸入方式•可以提升操作性。 前述鍵盤2 1 4A，係設置成可以由本體2 0 2分離 ，而且每個鍵所输入的鍵資訊經由無線而可以送訊至前述 處理控制部2 1 6，可以將鍵盤2 1 4帶離本體2 0 2而 操作，特別是複數人同時看同樣的畫面2 0 3的場合，操 作者可以不被打擾而輕鬆觀看畫面2 0 3。 {靖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I -i-r&lt;&gt;4I I I I. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（2】0 X 297公釐） 81 413779 五、發明説明（10 ) A7 B7 5 個 鍵 之 各鍵 領域 內 的 左 部 由 左 側開 始 依 序顯 示 Γ A J 厂 D j 、 r G J % 厂 J J % 厂 L j · 下 段 的 4 個 鍵 之 各 鍵 領 域 內 的 左部 由 左 側 開 始 依 序 顯 示Γ Ζ j Γ C J 厂 B j Γ Μ j * 前 述 顯 示 厂 Q J 「Ε j Γ Τ J % 厂 U j 厂 0 j .Γ A j 、 Γ D J \ 厂 G」 % 厂 J j 、 Γ Z J % 厂 C j 「Β j 之 各 鍵 的 領域 內 右側 • 分 別 顯 示 Γ W J Γ R j 、 「Υ j Γ I j Γ P j ' Γ S J % Γ F J 、 Γ Η j 、 Γ K j 厂 X j 、 厂 V J. , 厂 Ν J 0 於 如 此之本 發 明 9 各 英 文 字 母因 爲 係 左 右 分 別 兩 兩 配 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作杜印聚 置於各鍵而且係配合QWERTY的排列而配置，所以 與一般的鍵盤排列相同操作性提髙· 在此|前述顯示「L」、「M」之各鍵的領域內右側 分別顯示長音符號「一」，及逗點「、」·下段右端之鍵 的領域內左部顯示句點「·」，右邊顯示記號「.」亦可 •如此之鍵排列，在日文输入時使用頻繁的逗點「、 j 、 句點「。」、長音「一」等可以直接選擇各鍵而輸入所以 日文輸入時輸入操作性可以提高》 此外，於前述顯示「Lj 、 「M」之各鍵之領域內右 側分別顯示分號「；」、逗點「，」，下段右端的鍵領域 內的左部顯示英文句點「.j ，右邊顯示冒號「：j亦可 ，如此之鍵排列，在英文输入時使用頻率較高的逗點「， 」'句點「.」等可以直接選擇各鍵而輸入，所以英語輸 入時的輸入操作性可以提高^ 此外•本發明前述15個主鍵所構成之主鍵區域之中 I I «^1 n n .^111 n ^11 T I D n I» ΛΛ. 鉑 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再电寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用t國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（2IOX297公釐} -13 - 4 m λ： A7 B7 圖 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（87) 第4 7圚係畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置以外的實施形態 之斜視圖。 第4 8圖係畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置以外的其他實施 形態之斜視圖。 第4 9圖係供輕觭输入用之顯示日文输入排列之平面 第5 0圖係供輕觸输入用之顯示日文高速排列之平面 圓* 第51圖係供輕觸输入用之顯示英文输入排列之平面 圖。 第5 2圖係供輕觸輸入用之顯示數字輸入排列之平面 圖· 第5 3圖係供輕觸輸入用之顯示記號輸入排列之平面 圖 第5 4圖係供輕觸輸入用之顯示電話功能排列之平面 第5 5園係供說明從前的QWERTY排列之平面圖· 第5 6圖係供說明從前的日文5 0音排列之平面圈· 主要元件對照表 1 畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置 2 本體 3 液晶畫面 10 資料顯示區域 {請先閱讀背面之注意事項4Ϊ爲本頁) 泰紙張尺度適用_國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -90 - 鲤濟部中央標準局眉工消費合作社印製 413779 A7 _______B7__五、發明説明（11 ) ，左右任一方之基準側配置爲2列之6個主鍵分別設定爲 输入代表日語之母音的英文字母「A」、「I」、「U」 、「E」、「〇」等母音鍵以及输入撥苷「1」之撥音鍵 ，前述主鍵區域剩下來的三列配置之9個主鍵設定爲输入 之「Κ」、「8」、「Τ」、「Ν」'「Η」'「Μ」 、「Yj 、 「R」，「W」子音鍵，同時其中「Κ」、「 S j ，「T」、「N」、「Η」等各鍵的位移狀態下設定 爲输入「Gj 、 「Ζ」、「D」、「Ρ」、「Β」等之鍵 〇 在此場合，母音部份之鍵與子音部份之鍵因爲係分開 配置*所以在子音與母音交互配置之羅馬拼音輸入時，特 別因爲使用頻率較高的母音其位置容易把握住操作性提高 0 此外，子音中使用頻率也很髙的清音用的子音之各鍵 因爲係設定於非移位狀態•所以输入使用頻率較高之清音 時因爲不必用到移位，所以此點之操作性也有提高•進而 前述子音蓝域之中「K」、「S」、「Τ」、「N」' 「 Hj之各移位之狀態與母音「A」、「I」、「υ」、「 E j 、「 0」組合，配列了输入日語濁音與半濁音之「 G」、「Z」1 「D」、「P」、「：Bj等之鍵，所以對 應於輸入「扣」、「3」、「亡」的位置分別成爲輸入「 识」、「¥」、「纪」，而對應於輸入「旮」、「这」的 位置分別成爲输入「iij 、「比」，濁音、半濁音的鍵的 位置容易記住，操作性更進一層。 本紙浪尺度適ϋ國國家標準{ CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐) (請先Η讀背面之注項再瑣寫本頁) -14 - 1/ 'Λ： A7. B7 五、發明說明（8δ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 2 按 鍵 输 入 區 域 1 5 筆 2 0 主 鍵 區 域 2 1 ^ -35 主 鍵 4 1、 4 2 、 4 3 模 式鍵 5 0 功 能 &gt;rft- 鍵 區 域 7 1 按 鍵 輸 入 手 段 7 2 選 擇 處 理 手 段 7 3 判 定 手 段 7 4 文 字 產 生 手 段 7 6 畫 素 &lt;請先閱讀背面之注意事項4· _ 4本頁) 本紙張尺度適用尹國圉家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -91 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7__ 五、發明説明（12 ) 進而* 、「Y」、「R」、「W」子音鍵之非 移位.狀態設定在日語中使用頻率很高的促音「^J 、逗點 「，」、句點「。」、長音「一」等，即使是少數的鍵也 可以1次的輕觸而输入撥音「九j 、促音「^j 、逗點「 ，」、句點「·」、長音「一」等，操作性得以提升。特 別是撥音「」可以一母音區域的鍵在非移位的狀態下設 定，所以日語输入時特別是在音讀漢字等使用頻率很高的 場合也可以容易输入撥音「九」·A7B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (72) That is, as shown in FIG. 37, the screen display keyboard input device 19 of this embodiment 1 5 is the LCD screen 1 of the body 2 On 0 3, icons for starting various software are displayed. 1 1 1 to 1 16 * Also, the number of icons and the type of software to be started with the icons need only be appropriately set. In this embodiment, a startup table calculation, 6 indications 111 ~ 116 of various application software such as database, communication, schedule, message list, word processing, etc. Each icon 111 ~ 116 is started by operating, and each software is started. For example, if the word processing icon 1 1 6 is activated, the text input screen 1 20 is displayed on the screen 1 0 3 as shown in Fig. 38. At this time, if a designated part of the screen 1 0 3 is touched, such as In the aforementioned first embodiment, it is preferable that the key input area 12 is a display-type display text, etc., and it is preferable that the user can tap the input. This on-screen keyboard input device 195 is a block diagram of the internal structure as shown in FIG. 39 and a flowchart showing the processing steps in FIG. 40. It has a screen touch input means 71 and an information selection processing means. 7 2, the information selection processing means 7 2 is composed of the determination means 7 3, the icon selection processing means 7 7 and the application software activation means 7 8. The screen touch input means 71 is to check whether the screen 103 is input by touch with the pen 15 (step 11; the step is replaced by S in the following). Here, if there is a touch input, it is determined by the determination means 7 3 whether the touch input is a lever touch input, that is, whether the pen 15 keeps tapping within the icons 111 to 1 1 6 and moves more than a specified length ( s 1 2) »Judging means 7 3 is the same as the first embodiment described above. With the aforementioned seventh paper size, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied. — — — — ----- 111 ^ — I ------ (Please read the special note on the back.:% page) -75-Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, India Policy 413779 A7 _____B7_ 5. In the description of the invention (6), the character generation means for outputting the second character code set by the key is selected. In this case, let the first and second fields of each key display the corresponding text code in advance. If you touch the first field side, you can enter the first text code | If you touch the second field, you can enter The second text code. At this time, because you can touch the text and symbols you want to enter by intuitive operation, the operation is concise and easy to understand, and the operability is also 髙》 Here, as a method of using the key touch method, it can be A pen-based input method using a touch pen, or a touch-screen input method using a finger to touch the screen. In addition, the structure of the present invention includes: the keyboard input means is constituted by a cursor-type input means inputted by touching a cursor displayed on the screen with each key field displayed on the screen, and the selection processing means comprises: the cursor Among the first and second keys set by the state judgment cursor type input means in each key area, a determination means of which key is depressed, and the determination means selects an output when the determination is that the first key is depressed. For the first character code set by the key, the determination means selects and outputs the character generation means of the second character code set by the key when the second key is pressed down. With such a structure, the cursor input method can be used to change the key selection operation by simply selecting a single button, and the operability can be improved. Here, the use of a cruise input method is not limited to a mouse In addition to slides, tablets, and joysticks, you can also use the method of touching the tablet with your fingers, or the control panel used in gaming machines. It has buttons or functions equivalent to buttons and can be displayed on the screen. Journey on the screen ---------- ^ ------ 1T ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back first and then write this page%) This paper size applies to China CMS (A4) (210X297) -9 ~ 4137 猢 Γ A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention. (75) On the left side, there is a button for pressing the button as shown below. The menu area 211 of the selection menu is displayed immediately. In addition, the menu area 2 1 1 and the key input area 2 1 2 can be kept displayed. Usually, the aforementioned display area 2 1 0 occupies almost the entire LCD screen 2 0 3, And tap the selection displayed on the screen After the single display key or the key input start key, etc. * A part of the display area 2 1 0 is displayed as needed immediately. The display area 2 1 0 can be expanded and the amount of information can be more. This screen display keyboard The input device 2 0 1 has an internal structure as shown in FIG. 4 4. That is, the full-face type keyboard input device 2 01 is provided with a keyboard input means 2 1 4 ′ provided with a keyboard 2 1 4A and a touch input means 2 1 5 provided with a pen 2 1 5A, and a processing control unit. 2 1 6 and the output control section 2 1 7 of the display output of the control screen 2 0 3, and a row list 2 1 8 in which the key arrangement data is recorded. The keyboard 2 1 4A is a thin and small card-sized object, as shown in circle 43. It can be stored in the body 202 when not in use, and can be used separately from the body 202 when in use. The keyboard input means 214, when each key of the keyboard 214A is input, transmits the information input by the keys to the processing control unit 2 1 2 of the body 2 2 by wireless means 2 1 9 such as radio waves or infrared rays. The body 202 is provided with a holder for holding the pen 215A * so as to prevent the loss of the pen 215A *. On the screen display keyboard input device 2 0 1 When using the pen 2 1 5 A, hold the body 2 with the left hand 0 2, or placed on a table • And this paper is compliant with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) — llllL] llllll — &gt;-I-t III »11 — — — — — — (Please read the notes on the back before γ ·. ^ This page) The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Bei Gong Xiao #Cooperative Press 413779: 77 V. Invention Inputs (7) Various Input Means of 檩 In addition, the invention The structure is as follows: the keyboard input means is displayed on the screen; The cursor-type input means is input by touching the key fields displayed on the screen. The selection processing means includes: judging whether the keys set by the cursor-type input means are in the state where the cursor is located in each key field. Judging means for drag operation (drag) of moving cursor type input means under the state of being depressed or being depressed, and selecting the output when judging that the keys of the cursor type input means have been depressed In the case where the first character code set by the key is determined by the determining means, when the input means is dragged, the character generating means of the second character code set by the key is selected and output. With such a structure * The present invention can be applied even with a cruise-type input means having only one key * In addition, the present invention has a structure in which the keyboard input means described above is touched by a cursor displayed on the screen and displayed on the screen. The cursor type input means is used to input in the key field. The selection processing means includes: a determination means for determining how many times a key is tapped within a specified time using the cursor input means; and the determination means is used to determine the key. When the key is tapped once within a specified time, the first character code set by the key is selected to be output, and the judgment means is selected to output the second character set by the key when it is judged that the key is tapped twice within the specified time. Code text generation means. In this case, like double-clicking with a mouse, etc., you can distinguish the input content by tapping the button twice within a specified time or by tapping it only once. If the judgment time of this touch button can be set by the user of the input device ------------- installation ------ order ------ Λ (please read first Note on the back page, please fill in this page again) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 mm) -10-4 which r: .A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (76) Can hold the pen with the right hand 2 1 5 A operation can be done (please read the precautions on the back before you &quot; this page) With the pen 2 15 A, touch the keys on the LCD surface 2 0 3 to input the keys of the area 2 1 2 and touch the input Means 2 1 5 sends the input information of the touched key to the processing control section. In the processing control section 2 1 6, a keyboard 21 4A or a key input area 212 is provided for a shift input means 2 6 0 for inputting shift position data of each displayed key, and a switch is made in the key input area 2 1 2 The arrangement switching means 2 6 3 of the displayed key arrangement, and the data processing means 2 6 4 which processes the input key data, and the two data of the normal position or shift position of each key are selected for input when setting. One of them is a selection input means 2 6 2 and a selection menu display means 2 6 1 that displays a selection menu for switching the key arrangement described above. On the keyboard 214A, as shown in FIG. 45, it is arranged in the same arrangement as the key input area 2 1 2 of the bottom surface 203, and is provided with a main key area 2 2 0, a switch key area 2 4 0, and a function key area 2 5 0 0 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. That is, in the main key area 2 2 0, 15 primary keys 221 to 235 are arranged in 3 columns of 5 columns. In addition, in the switching key area 240, three switching keys 241 to 243 are arranged. Further, in the function key area 250, five function keys 251 to 255 are arranged. That is, the keyboard 2 1 4A includes a switch key 24 1 to 243 and function keys 2 5 1 to 2 5 5 in total. The keys are configured. The surface of these keys, as shown in Fig. 23, shows the keys corresponding to the standard arrangement of the aforementioned embodiment. "The process of the screen display keyboard input device 2 0 1 structured in this way. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4. Specifications (210 x 297 mm) -79-413VV9 Consumption cooperation by the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by A7 _______B7 V. Description of the invention (8) Even if the time interval between two taps is different for each user, In the case of a touch, you can also correctly judge one touch and two touches. In addition, the structure of the present invention includes: the keyboard input means is constituted by a cursor-type input means inputted by touching a keypad displayed on the screen with a cursor displayed on the screen, and the selection processing means includes: Among the first and second areas that are distinguished in each key area, the determination method of which area is touched, and the determination means that when the first area is touched is selected, the output of the key is set. For the first character code, the judgment means selects and outputs the character generation means for the second character code set by the key when the judgment is made in the second area. In this case, in the first and second fields of each key, Display the characters or symbols corresponding to the text codes in the first and second fields. If you touch the first field «field side, you can enter the text code, if you touch the second field side, you can enter the second text code. At this time, because you can tap the text and symbols you want to enter by intuitive operation, the operation is simple and easy to understand, and the operability is high. In addition, the present invention displays 15 primary keys of 3 columns of about 5 columns on the above screen, and each primary key displays at least symbols corresponding to the first and second character codes. In this case, even if only 15 main keys are set, each key can be set with at least 2 keys (symbols), that is, at least 30 keys can be set as a whole. That is to say, the letters used in Japanese when inputting in Roman pinyin, that is, the vowels "Aj", "I", "11", "E", "Oj", etc., and the combination with the vowel keys to produce Japanese "private" The paper size used for unvoiced characters such as "dead" is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ~~ 11---------- installation ----- --ir ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back for the first copy) A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs __; __B7 ____ V. Description of Invention (77) 4 6 circles of circles to explain * First, regarding the key input means 2 1 4 or the touch input means 2 1 5, check whether there is an input using the keyboard 2 1 4A or the pen 2 1 5A (step 1, the following is S Instead of steps). Here, if there is an input *, it is determined whether the input is a shift input (second character code input). (S2) This determination may be made by each of the key input means 2 1 4 or by tapping the input means 2 1 5 or may be performed on the processing control unit 2 1 6 side. In addition, in the case of key input, shift The key 2 51 is judged as a shift input β when other keys are simultaneously pressed. In addition, in the case of a touch input, as in the foregoing embodiments, it is judged by the amount of movement of the pen 15 or the length of contact. It is a shift input. When it is determined that the input is shift input, the shift input means 260 performs shift processing using the key at the shift position of the input key as input data (S 3). Next, it is judged whether the input key is a menu key (key 241 in the case of the keyboard 2 1 4A, or the shift position of the corresponding key 241 in the case of the LCD screen 203) (S4). If the menu key is inputted, 'is displayed by the selection menu Means 2 6 1 and is performed in the menu area 2 1 1 The menu display processing for displaying each of the selection menus 271 to 276 (S5) ° On the other hand • If it is not a menu key, it is judged whether it is an arrangement switching input, that is, the switching key area 2 4 Each key of 0 2 4 1 to 2 4 3 is entered 'Select whether or not the menus 271 to 276 are tapped (S6). This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---- llllilill 1 ti 1 I l I-— — — — 111 — (Please read the precautions on the back first (two I)) -80-413779 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 £ 7_V. Invention Description (9) Γ KJ, "s", "Tj," N "," Η ", ΓΜ", "Y" , "R", "W", and then combined with the vowel to input Japanese voiced, semi-voiced "G", "Z", "ϋ", ΓΡ "," B ", etc. All keys such as "J", period "*", etc. can be set as the primary key. 'If it is set to the Japanese input key arrangement, you can fully correspond to Japanese input without switching to other key arrangements. Similarly, the English alphabet 26 characters plus comma ^, ", period". "And so on can be set as the primary key 'If you set the key arrangement for English input, you can fully correspond without switching to other key arrangements English input. In addition, the number of 15 keys is greatly reduced compared to the previous QWERTY arrangement or the Japanese 50-tone arrangement. Therefore, if the main keys are displayed in the same size as the previous QWERTY arrangement or the Japanese 50-tone arrangement, the entire key display area is also Can be reduced, can be further miniaturized than the on-screen keyboard input device, and at the same time touch the pen or finger of the button, and the cursor movement of the mouse can also be reduced, improving operability. On the other hand * If the main key If the arrangement area is the same as the previous QWERTY arrangement or the Japanese 50-tone arrangement area, the size of each main key can be larger than before. • It can be easier to touch with a pen or a fingertip. * In this case, the operability is also improved. · The present invention In the on-screen keyboard input device, among the 15 main keys mentioned above, the left part of each of the 5 keys in the upper section displays "Q", "E", "T", and "II" in order from the left. ， Γ〇 ″ '(Please read the precautions on the back first, and then this page) This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 ^ grid (210X297 mm). Printed by the cooperative V. Description of the invention (78) Here * If it is an arrangement switching input, the arrangement switching means 2 6 3 switches the arrangement switching processing for switching the designated arrangement list 218 (S 7). The arrangement switching input determines whether it is a selection input (S 8). Here, if it is judged that the input is selected, a selection process of selecting one of the set keys is performed (S 9). After the input key is confirmed, the data set by the key is generated by the data processing means 2 6 4 to perform data processing of each function (S10). At this time, the data processing means 264 processes the data based on the character or function corresponding to the input key set by referring to the key list set by the rank list 218. The initial value of the key arrangement is a standard arrangement. As a result of the data processing, the output control unit 2 1 7 outputs the processing to the liquid crystal screen 203 (S11). Through the above process, the processing of each input is ended, and if there is the next input, the above processing is repeated and performed sequentially. In this embodiment, the same effects as those of the previous embodiments can be obtained. In addition to using the pen 2 1 5 A to input the touch input means 2 1 5, since a keyboard 2 1 4A is also provided, the user can Selecting a suitable input method can improve operability. The aforementioned keyboard 2 1 4A is provided so that it can be separated from the main body 202, and the key information input by each key can be sent to the aforementioned processing control unit 2 1 through wireless, and the keypad 2 1 4 can be taken away from the main body. 2 0 2 operation, especially when multiple people watch the same screen 2 3 at the same time, the operator can easily watch the screen 2 3 without being disturbed. {Jing first read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) I -i-r &lt; &4; 4I II I. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2) 0 X 297 mm 81 413779 V. Description of the invention (10) A7 B7 The left part of each key area of the 5 keys is displayed from the left in order from the left Γ AJ plant D j, r GJ% plant JJ% plant L j The left part of the display starts from the left and sequentially displays Γ j j Γ CJ Factory B j Γ Μ j * The aforementioned display factory QJ "E j Γ Τ J% Factory U j Factory 0 j .Γ A j, Γ DJ \ Factory G"% Factory J j, Γ ZJ% Factory C j "The right side of each key in the field of β j" Γ WJ Γ R j, "Υ j Γ I j Γ P j 'Γ SJ% Γ FJ, Γ Η j, Γ K j factory X j, factory V J., factory N J 0 In this invention 9 Each English letter is paired left and right, respectively, and it is paired with each other. QWERTY arrangement, so it is similar to the general keyboard arrangement Operational Note: Here, in the area where the keys "L" and "M" are displayed, the long letter "one" is displayed on the right side, and the dot "," is displayed on the left side. "·", The symbol "." Is displayed on the right. • This key is arranged. Frequent commas ", j, period". ", Long" one ", etc. are used in Japanese input. You can directly select each key and input it in Japanese. The input operability can be improved when inputting. In addition, in the areas where the keys "Lj and" M "are displayed, the semicolon"; "and the comma", "are displayed on the right side, and the left side of the key area on the lower right side is displayed. The English period ".j, the colon is displayed on the right:" j is also possible, so the keys are arranged, and the comma "," 'period ".", Etc., which is used more frequently in English input can be directly selected by each key, so English Input operability during input can be improved ^ In addition, in the main key area composed of the 15 primary keys of the present invention, II «^ 1 nn. ^ 111 n ^ 11 TID n I» ΛΛ. Platinum (please read the note on the back first) Matters reprinted on this page) The scale is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (2IOX297 mm) -13-4 m λ: A7 B7 Figure 5. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (87) The 4th 7th screen display A perspective view of an embodiment other than a keyboard input device. Figures 4 and 8 are perspective views of embodiments other than the on-screen keyboard input device. Figure 4 9 is a plane for displaying Japanese input arrangement for tap input Figure 50 is a plane circle for displaying Japanese high-speed arrangement for tap input * Picture 51 is for displaying English input arrangement for tap input Floor plan. Figure 5 2 is a plan view showing the arrangement of digital input for touch input. Figure 5 3 is a plan view showing the arrangement of display mark input for touch input. Figure 5 4 is a display arrangement of display phone functions for touch input. The 5th and 5th plane of the plane are used to explain the previous QWERTY arrangement. The 5th and 6th diagrams are used to explain the previous Japanese 50-tone arrangement. · The main component comparison table 1 On-screen keyboard input device 2 Body 3 LCD screen 10 Data display area {Please read the note on the back 4ΪThis page) Thai paper size applicable _ National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) -90-Ligong Consumer Cooperatives, Central Standards Bureau, Liji Ministry Printed 413779 A7 _______B7__ 5. Description of the Invention (11), the 6 primary keys with 2 columns arranged on the left and right sides of the reference side are set to input the English alphabet "A", "I", "U" representing the vowel of Japanese The vowel keys such as "E", "〇", and the dial key for inputting the dialin "1". The 9 primary keys in the three columns arranged in the aforementioned primary key area are set to the input "K", "8", "T" , "Ν" '"Η "" M "," Yj, "R", "W" consonant keys, and "K", "Sj," T "," N "," Η "and other keys are set to enter" The keys of Gj, "Z", "D", "P", "Β", etc. In this case, the keys of the vowel part and the keys of the consonant part are arranged separately. When inputting pinyin, it is easier to grasp the operability because the vowels with high frequency are used. In addition, the keys of the unvoiced consonants that are used frequently are also used in the consonants because they are set to the non-shifting state. The higher frequencies of unvoiced sounds do not need to be shifted, so the operability at this point is also improved. • Furthermore, the “K”, “S”, “Τ”, “N”, and “Hj” shifts in the above-mentioned consonant blue domain. The state of the bit is combined with the vowels "A", "I", "υ", "E j," 0 ", and the input" G "," Z "," D "," P "of Japanese voiced and semi-voiced sounds are arranged. , ": Bj, etc., so the positions corresponding to the input" button "," 3 ", and" dead "are respectively Enter "Knowledge", "¥", and "Ki", and the positions corresponding to "旮" and "This" will become "iij" and "ratio" respectively. The positions of the voiced and semi-voiced keys are easy to remember. One step further. The standard of this paper is in accordance with the national standard of the country {CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (please read the note on the back and write this page) -14-1 / 'Λ: A7. B7 V. Description of the invention (8δ ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 2 Key input area 1 5 Pen 2 0 Main key area 2 1 ^ -35 Main key 4 1, 4 2, 4 3 Mode key 5 0 Function &gt; rft- key area 7 1 Key input means 7 2 Selection processing means 7 3 Judgment means 7 4 Text generation means 7 6 Pixels &lt; Please read the precautions on the back 4 · _ 4 page) This paper size is in accordance with Yin Guomin's Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) -91-Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, A7 B7__ 5. Description of the invention (12) Further *, "Y", "R", "W" non-shifting of the consonant keys. The state setting uses the frequently used accent "^ J", comma ",", period ".", Long "one", etc. Even a few keys can be touched once to input the dialing "九 j , Accent "^ j, comma ",", Period "·", long sound "one", etc., improve the operability. In particular, the dial "" can be set in a non-shifted state in the key of the vowel area. Therefore, it is also easy to input the dial "nine" when inputting Japanese, especially when the frequency of reading Chinese characters is high.

此外，本發明前述1 5個主鍵所構成之主鍵區域之中 •左右任一方之基準側之配置爲2列的6個主鍵之中的5 個鍵設定爲输入「A」、「I」、「U」、rEj 、 「〇 」之鍵，前述主鍵區域剩下來的配置爲3列之9個主鍵分 別設定爲輸入「K」、「S」、「T」、「N」、rHj 、「Μ」、「Yj ' 「Rj 、 「W」之鍵，同時前述「A 」、「I」、「Uj 、 「E」、「0」之鍵之各位移狀態 下 設 定 爲 厂 Q j 厂 J J 逗 點 厂 • J 、句 點「 〇 j ' Γ X j 前 述 厂 K J 厂 S j 、 厂 T j η 厂Ν J ' 厂 Η」、 Γ Μ J * 厂 Y J 厂 R j &gt; 厂 W j 各 鍵的移位狀 態 下設定 爲 輸 入 厂 G j 厂 Z j 厂 D J 厂 Ρ 1 ' 「Β j 、「C j Γ F j 、 厂 V J 、 厂 L j 之 鍵 〇 在 此 場 合 t 英 文 字 母 2 6 文字 之 外 ，英 文輸 入 時常用 的 逗 點 厂 * j 句 點 Γ - j 上 栖 懷 厂 1 1 ' 連字 號 r ~ j 之 各 記 號 也 可 以 由 直 接 輕 觸 而 輸 入 所以英 文輸 入 時的操 作性提高。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（2】〇X297公釐） 一 15 - 丨 I— in 裝 In 訂 i H ^ (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 五、發明説明（l3 ) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印聚 A7 B7 進 而 &lt; 刖 述 曰 文 排 列 可 與 多 數 的 Arh- 鍵 排 列 一 致 所 以 在 切 換 標 準 排 列 興 英 語 排 列 而 併 用 的 場 合 » 容 易 記 住 鍵 之 位 置 &gt; 操 作 性 提高 〇 此 外 $ 於 本 發 明 前 述 1 5 個 主 鍵 設 定 數 字 厂 0 J - 數 字 Γ 1 J ·% 數 字 Γ 2 J &gt; 數字 厂 3 J &gt; 數 字 厂 4 J 數 字 厂 5 J 數 字 厂 6 J 數 字 厂 7 J 數 字 Γ 8 J 、 數 字 厂 9 J 記 號 厂 + J &gt; 記 號 Γ 一 J « 記 號 厂 X J 或 者 Γ * J % 記 號 厂 + J 或 者 厂 / J 記 號 Γ J 等 輸 入 AEfa. 鍵 〇 在 此 場 合 i 可 以 作 成 如 與 從 前 的 鍵 盤 上 的 數 字 鍵 相 同 的 排 列 » 進 而 可 以 輸 入 使 用 於計 算 之 各 種 記 號 9 所 以 數字 的 輸 入 與計 算 的 操 作 可 以 簡 單 的 進行 0 此 外 » 於 本 發 明 ^ ·-刖 述 1 5 個 主 鍵 其第 1 及 第 2 文 字 碼 分 別 設 定 爲 输 入括 弧 Γ Γ J 、 Γ J J % Γ ( J % Γ ) J 厂 &lt; J 厂 &gt; J % 厂 £ J 、 Γ j J Γ { J 、 厂 } J &gt; 厂 * J % 厂 » J 、 厂 U J 、 厂 J \ 冒 號 广 : J 分 號 厂 ， J 星 號 厂 本 J 井 字 號 Γ # J a η d 鍵 厂 &amp; J 問 號 厂 ? J 修飾記 號 Γ ! J % 記 號 Γ / j 記 號 Γ J &gt; 修 飾 記 號 厂 @ J 美 元 記 號 Γ $ J 、 曰 圓 記 號 厂 ¥ J &gt; 連 字 號 Γ — J X 記 號 厂 = J 等 输 入 鍵 在 此 場合 &gt; 在從 前 使 用 頻率 很 高 但 是 不 容 易 輸 入 的 各 種 記 號 因 爲 可 以 經 由 顯 示 於 主 鍵 而 以 輕 觸 輸 入 * 所 以 可 以 簡 單 的 输 入 各 種 記 號 ❶ 此 外 各 括 弧 記 號 因 爲 是 在 基 準 側 成 2 列 配 置 之 6 個 主 鍵 以 移位狀態 及 非 移位狀態 統 合 設 定 t 所 以 容 易 判 斷 括 弧 記 號 興 其 他 的 記 號 位 置 之 不 同 * 輸 入 操 本紙張尺度適用中囡國家標準（CNS &gt; A4規格（2丨0X297公釐） 1111 —I— 11 — — ml I n ^ H ϋ I n 線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項苒.¾本頁) -16 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（l4 ) 經濟部中央揉準局貝工消費合作社印製 作性也可提高。 此 外 * 本 發明 前 述 1 5 個 主 鍵 所構成 之 主 鍵 區 域 之 中 左右任 一 方 之基 準側配 置 爲 2 列 之 6 個 主 鍵 分 別 設定 爲 爾 入代 表 B 語 之母 音 的 英 文 字 母 厂 A J 、 厂 I J Γ U J % 「E J 厂 〇 J 等 母 音鍵 以 及 輸 入 撥音 Γ J 之 撥音 鍵 前述 主 鍵 區 域剩 下 來 的 二 列 配 置 之 9 個 主 鍵 設 定 爲輸 入 之 「K J 厂 s」 厂 Τ J Γ N j % Γ Η J 、 厂 Μ J 厂 Y J 厂 R j ' 厂 W J 子 音 鍵 » 同 時 厂 A J 厂 I J 、 Γ u J Γ Ε j ' Γ 0 J 等 母 音 鍵 以 及 撥 音鍵 Γ J 在 移 位 的狀 態 設定 爲輸 入 Γ A I j 、 Γ U I J % Γ U U J % Γ E I J 、 厂 0 U」 % 厂 Y U U j 之 鍵 * 而 厂 K J 厂 S J 「T J &gt; 厂 N」 、 厂 Η J Γ Μ J 厂 Y J % Γ R J 、 厂 W」 等 各 鍵 的位 移狀 態 下 設 定 爲 輸 入 厂 G J 、 厂 Ζ J 、 厂 D j 厂 P j 、 厂 Β j \ 促 音 厂 〇 J 逗 點 Γ j % 句 點 厂〇 J 長 音Γ — j 等 等 之 鍵 9 在 此 場 合 ，特 別 是 因 爲 厂 A I J 厂 U I J 、 厂 U U J 、厂 E :] [J ,1 Γ 0 U J ,1 「Y U U」 可以] .次的輕觸 而輸入 所 以 像是 曰 語 中 的 會 計 ( K A I K E I ) % 推 定 (S U I T E ] [) 、 空港&lt; ( Κ U U K 0 U ) 、 抽 象 ( T Y U U S Υ 0 U ) 等 曰 語 特 有 的 音 讀 漢字 Φ 使 用 頻 率很髙 的 含 有 2重 母 音或 是 拗 音 的 文 字 可 以 簡 單 的 輸 入 * 提高输 入 的 效 率* 此 外 ί 本 發明 前 述 1 5 個 主 鍵 所 構 成 之 主 鍵 區 域 之 中 » 左右 任 一 方 之基 準 側 配 置 爲 2 列 之 6 個 主 鍵 分 別設 定 爲 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再：^寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS Μ4規格（210Χ297公釐） —17 - 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（15 ) 輸 入 代 表 曰 語 之 母 音 的 英 文 字 母 厂 A J \ Γ I j 厂 U J 厂 E j 、 Γ 0 j 等 母 音 鍵 以 及 输 入 撥音 Γ九 j 之 撥 音 Attl· 鍵 前 述 主 鍵 區 域 2 0 剩 下 來 的 三 列 配 置 之 9個 主 鍵 設 定 爲 輸 入 之 r K J 、 厂 S j 厂 T J Γ N J ,Γ Η J Γ Μ J Γ Y J 厂 R j Γ W J 子 音鍵 Y 同 時r A J &gt; Γ I J Γ U J 厂 E j Γ 0 J 等 母 音 鍵 以 及撥 音鍵 厂 b j 在 移 位 的 狀 態 設 定 爲 输 入 厂 y a j 厂 y U U J Γ y u J % 厂 y 0 U J 厂 y 0 J 促 音 Γ 〇 j 之鍵 * 而 Γ κ j Γ S j 、 厂 T J Γ N J Η Γ Η S 厂 M j 厂 Y j % ----------裝— (请先閲讀背面之注意事項再4寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印11 「R」、「W」等各鍵的位移狀態下設定爲輸入、 「Z」、「D」* 「Ρ」、ΓΒ」、點「·」、逗點「、 」、句點「β」、長音「一」等等之鍵。 在此場合、因爲拗音之「ya」、「yuj 、「y〇 」，或者是長勘音「yuu」、「you」、可以1次的 桿觸而輸入，所以提高輸入的效率。 此外|本發明包括在前述1 5個主鍵之中至少有1個 鍵在前述2個文字碼之外設定了第3個文字碼，而前述選 擇處理手段係具有：判斷藉由前述按鍵輸入手段所輸入之 選擇第1〜第3文字碼之按鍵選擇操作之判定手段，及基 於此判定手段所判定的按鍵選擇操作而選擇設定於各鍵之 第1〜第3文字碼之一而進行輸出處理之文字發生手段》 根據如此之發明，第1及第2文字碼係設定爲英文字 母，第3文字碼可以設定爲文字以外的數字或記號，而這 些數字或記號與文字輸入相同只要改變按鍵選擇操作就可In addition, in the primary key area composed of the aforementioned 15 primary keys of the present invention, 5 of the 6 primary keys arranged in two rows on the reference side of the left and right are set to input "A", "I", " U ", rEj, and" 〇 ". The remaining configuration of the aforementioned primary key area is 3 rows. The 9 primary keys are set to input" K "," S "," T "," N ", rHj, and" M ". , "Yj '," Rj, "W", and at the same time, the above-mentioned keys "A", "I", "Uj," E ", and" 0 "are set to factory Q j factory JJ comma factory • J, period "〇j 'Γ X j said factory KJ factory S j, factory T j η factory N J' factory Η", Γ Μ J * factory YJ factory R j &gt; factory W j shift state of each key Set the keys for inputting factory G j, factory Z j, factory DJ, factory P 1 ',' Bj, 'Cj Γ Fj, factory VJ, factory Lj. On this occasion, t English letters 2 6 text, English input Commonly used comma plant * j period Γ-j Shangqi Huaichang 1 1 'Hyphens r ~ j Improved operability when inputting in English by tapping directly. This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2) × 297 mm. 15-丨 I—in Binding In H i ^ (Please First read the notes on the back and then fill out this page.) 5. Description of the invention (l3) The Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed A7 B7, and then the description of the text can be consistent with most Arh-key arrangements, so Switch between the standard arrangement and the English arrangement and use it together »It is easy to remember the position of the keys &gt; operability is improved. In addition, the 15 primary keys set in the present invention are set to the number factory 0 J-number Γ 1 J ·% number Γ 2 J & gt Digital Factory 3 J &gt; Digital Factory 4 J Digital Factory 5 J Digital Factory 6 J Digital Factory 7 J Digital Γ 8 J, Digital Factory 9 J Sign Factory + J &gt; Sign Γ One J «Sign Factory XJ or Γ * J % Symbol Factory + J or Factory / J Symbol Γ J, etc. Enter AEfa. Key 〇 In this case i The same arrangement as the number keys on the previous keyboard can be made »Furthermore, various symbols for calculation 9 can be inputted, so the operation of inputting numbers and calculations can be easily performed 0 In addition» In the present invention ^ ·-刖 述 1 5 The first and second text codes of each primary key are set as input brackets Γ Γ J, Γ JJ% Γ (J% Γ) J Factory &lt; J Factory &gt; J% Factory £ J, Γ j J Γ {J, Factory } J &gt; Factory * J% Factory »J, Factory UJ, Factory J \ Colon: Cannon Factory, J Asterisk Factory Ben J Tic Tac Toe Γ # J a η d Key Factory & J Question Factory? J Modification Mark Γ! J% symbol Γ / j symbol Γ J &gt; Modified symbol factory @ JUS dollar symbol Γ $ J, Yueyuan Symbol Factory ¥ J &gt; hyphen Γ — JX symbol factory = J, etc. Input keys in this case &gt; in Various symbols that have been used frequently but were not easy to input because they can be displayed on the primary key. Input by tapping * so you can easily input various symbols ❶ In addition, each parenthesis symbol is integrated in the shifted state and non-shifted state because 6 main keys are arranged in two columns on the reference side, so it is easy to judge the parenthesis symbol and other Differences in Marking Positions * The size of the paper used for input operation is in accordance with the Chinese standard (CNS &gt; A4 (2 丨 0X297 mm) 1111 —I— 11 — — ml I n ^ H ϋ I n line (please read the back Note 苒. ¾ This page) -16 413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (l4) The printability of the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs can also be improved. In addition, in the present invention, the primary side of the primary key area formed by the 15 primary keys of the present invention is arranged on the left and right sides of the reference side in two rows. The six primary keys are set to enter the English alphabet factory AJ and factory IJ Γ UJ representing the vowel of the B language. % "EJ factory 0J and other vowel keys and input dial Γ J dial key. The 9 main keys in the remaining two columns of the aforementioned main key area are set as the input" KJ factory s "factory T J Γ N j% Γ Η J, Factory M J Factory YJ Factory R j 'Factory WJ Consonant keys »At the same time Factory AJ Factory IJ, Γ u J Γ Ε j' Γ 0 J and other vowel keys and dial keys Γ J are set to input Γ AI j, Γ UIJ% Γ UUJ% Γ EIJ, factory 0 U ”% factory YUU j key * and factory KJ factory SJ“ TJ &gt; factory N ”, factory Η J Γ Μ J factory YJ% Γ RJ, factory W, etc. Under the state of the key's displacement, it is set to input factory GJ, factory Z J, factory D j, factory P j, factory B j \ factory accent factory 0J comma Γ j% Point factory 0J long tone Γ — j etc. Key 9 In this case, especially because of factory AIJ factory UIJ, factory UUJ, factory E:] [J, 1 Γ 0 UJ, 1 "YUU" can]. Touch input so it is like the accounting (KAIKEI)% presumption (SUITE) [) in the Japanese language, airport &lt; (Κ UUK 0 U), abstract (TYUUS Υ 0 U), and other unique pronunciation pronunciation Chinese characters Φ is used very often髙 Characters that contain double vowels or 拗 sounds can be easily entered * Improve the efficiency of input * In addition, among the primary key areas composed of the aforementioned 15 primary keys of the present invention »The left and right reference sides are arranged in 6 of 2 rows The main keys are set to (please read the precautions on the back before: ^ write this page) The paper size applies to the Chinese national standard (CNS M4 specification (210 × 297 mm) — 17-413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (15) Input representative The English alphabet of the vowel of the factory AJ \ Γ I j Factory UJ The vowel keys such as E j, Γ 0 j, and the dial tone of the input dial Γ nine j. Attl key of the aforementioned primary key area 2 0 The nine primary keys in the remaining three columns are set as the input r KJ, factory S j factory TJ Γ NJ, Γ Η J Γ Μ J Γ YJ factory R j Γ WJ consonant key Y at the same time r AJ &gt; Γ IJ Γ UJ factory E j Γ 0 J and other vowel keys and dial key factory bj are shifted to the input factory yaj factory y UUJ Γ yu J% factory y 0 UJ factory y 0 J accent Γ 〇j key * and Γ κ j Γ S j, factory TJ Γ NJ Η Γ Η S factory M j factory Y j% ------ ---- Equipment— (Please read the precautions on the back before writing this page again.) The Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has printed 11 “R”, “W” and other keys in the state of displacement. "," D "*" P ", ΓΒ", point "·", comma ",", period "β", long sound "one" and so on. In this case, "ya", "yuj," y0 "of the cymbal sound, or" yuu "," you "of the long recitation sound can be input by one-touch, so the input efficiency is improved. In addition, the present invention includes at least one key among the 15 primary keys set a third character code in addition to the two character codes, and the selection processing means includes: judging by the key input means The input means determines the key selection operation of the first to third character codes, and based on the key selection operation determined by the determination means, one of the first to third character codes set to each key is selected for output processing. Means for generating characters "According to such an invention, the first and second character codes are set to English letters, and the third character code can be set to numbers or symbols other than characters, and these numbers or symbols are the same as text input. Just change the key selection operation OK

•1T 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） -18 - 經濟部中央梯準局貝工消费合作社印策 413779 A7 B7五、發明説明（1β ) 以輸入，所以在有必要輸入數字或記號的場合也很容易输 入，特別是在含有數字或記號的文章的输入其輸入操作性 可以提升。 此外，本發明包括在前述1 5個主鍵所構成之主鍵之 中至少有1個健在前述2個文字碼之外了設定第3個文字 碼及第4文字碼*而前述選擇處理手段判斷係具有：判定 前述按鍵输入手段之4種類按鍵選擇操作之判定手段，及 基於此判定手段所判定的按鍵選擇操作而選擇設定於各鍵 之第1〜第4文字碼之一而進行输出處理之文字發生手段 e 根據如此之發明，第1及第2文字碼係設定爲英文字 母*第3文字碼可以設定爲數字，第4文字碼可以設定爲 記號等•而這些數字或記號與文字輸入相同只要改變按鍵 選擇操作就可以输入，所以在有必要輸入數字或記號的場 合也很容易输入，特別是在含有數字或記號的文章的輸入 其輸入操作性可以提升。 此外，本發明係具備有切換在前述畫面上顯示之記號 及該鍵被輕觸時所產生的文字碼的排列之排列切換手段。 根據如此之本發明，主鍵所設定的文字碼的排列可以 在日語羅馬拼音用、英語排列，數字排列、記號排列等各 種排列之間切換，所以即使主鍵只有1 5個，但是可以設 定15個*2(第1及第2個記號）*排列數的鍵，亦即 3 0個*排列數的鍵，只要切換排列即可直接输入各種記 號（文字、數字、記號等），可以簡單的進行輸入。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） &lt;請先閲讀背面之注$項再續寫本頁) -19 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 _ 五、發明説明（17 ) 此外，本發明於前述畫面，由上下3段左右5列的 1 5個鍵所構成之主鍵區域之外，設有與主鍵區域相鄰而 設定各種功能之複數的支援鍵所構成之支援鍵區域。 支援鍵區域，例如在主鍵區域的下側或是左右兩側之 一方配置即可，至少以設有5個支援鍵爲佳•於如此之支 援鍵，可以設定爲切換顯示於畫面之鍵排列至各種排列的 模式切換機能，或是漢字變換、空格輸入、回行鍵、退後 鍵、消除鍵等文字输入操作i必要之各種機能，輸入操作 性更向上提升* 另外•亦可僅將模式切換機能單獨分離而與支援鍵不 同而將模式切換鍵設於主鍵區域旁邊》在此場合，藉由輕 觸切換鍵而可以簡單的切換各主鍵的排列。 進而，亦可使模式選擇選單所顯示的選單鍵設定於支 援鍵等，可以壓下選單鍵而於畫面顯示模式選擇選單進行 模式切換》 在此場合·與模式切換機能設定於切換鍵的場合相比 可以設定更多的排列，可以對應種種的輸入操作性也可以 提高。 實施發明之最佳形態 爲更詳細說明本發明，茲參照附圚說明之。 第1圖係本發明第1實施形態之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入 裝置1。畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1，係使用於攜帶型資 訊終端機（PDA) •本體2的表面設有液晶畫面3*此 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率《CNS &gt; A4規格（210X297公釐} ---------^------1T------本 (請先《讀背面之注$項再蛾寫本頁) -20 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印裝 413779 A7 ___B7_五、發明説明（18 ) 外，雖未顯忝於第1圖，亦可以在本體2裝設自由開閉的 蓋體以保護畫面3的部份· 於液晶畫面3，設有在實行文書處理、表計算、通訊 錄、電子郵件、時間表等各種機能軟髖時，顯示輸入文字 或是顯示資料用之資料顯示區域1 0 *此顯示區域1 0的 形式可以依照所被選擇的機能經適當變更而構成。 此外，於顯示區域1 0的下側，配置有按鍵輸入區域 1 2。此外•此按鍵输入區域1 2，可以是常時保持於顯 示之狀態*通常前述顯示區域1 0佔掉了整個畫面3而顯 示，畫面上顯示按鍵输入開始鍵等·一旦輕觸此開始鍵， 顯示區域1 0上的1部份應需要而顯示立刻顯現式（ P 〇 p_u p )選單•顯示區域1 〇可以擴大，顯示之資 訊量可以增多之點爲優點。 此畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1 ，如第1圚所示，附靥 作爲按鍵輸入手段之輕觸式輸入手段所要用到的筆1 5。 因此•本體2上設有保持筆1 5用的保持架，以可以防止 筆1 5之遺失者爲佳》 而使用畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1的場合，以左手（ 右手）持有本體2或者是置於桌上，再以右手（左手）握 著筆1 5操作即可。 按鍵輸入區域1 2如第2圖所示，設有具備上下3段 左右5列計1 5個主鍵2 1〜3 5的主鍵區域2 0。 主鍵區域2 0之各主鍵2 1〜3 5，其上之顯示係在 第2圖所示之羅馬拼音輸入所用之QWERTY式日文用排列與 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） (請先閲讀背面之注^^項再填寫本頁) -21 - 經濟部中央樣準局員工消費合作社印裂 413779 A7 _B7_五、發明説明（19 ) 第3圖所示之QWERTY式英文用排列之間利用未於圓式中顯 示之模式切換鍵或是筆15的输入操作而藉由例如輕觸主 鍵區域2 0之沒有按鍵顯示的部分的方法使其動作之排列 切換手段來切換顯示* QWERTY式曰文用排列之前述主鍵2 1〜3 5所顯示的 文字（英文字母）的排列•係配合一般的鍵盤上的英文字 母排列而配合設定之一般的QWERTY式排列· 具體而言，上段的5個鍵2 1〜2 5之各鍵區域內的 左部，由左側的鍵開始依序於鍵21顯示「Q」，於鍵 22顯示「E」，於鍵23顯示「T」，於鍵24顯示「 U j ，於鍵25顯示「〇」，中段的5個鍵26〜30之 各鍵區域內的左部，由左側的鍵開始依序於鍵2 6顯示「 八」.，於鍵27.顯示「〇」，於鍵28顯示「G」，於躁 29顯示「J」，於鍵30顯示「L」，下段的5個鍵 3 1〜3 5之各鍵區域內的左部，由左側的鍵開始依序於 鍵31顯示「Z」，於鍵32顯示「C」，於鍵33顯示 「B」，於鍵34顯示「Μ」，於鍵35顯示句點「。」 〇 此外*於這些各鍵2 1〜3 5的按鍵區域內的右側， 分別於鍵21顯示「W」，於鍵22顯示「R」，於鍵 23顯示「Υ」，於鍵24顯示「I」，於鍵25顯示「 Ρ」，於鍵26顯示「S」，於鍵27顯示「F」，於鍵 28顯示「H」，於鍵29顯示「K」，於鍵30顯示長 音鍵「一」，於鍵31顯示「X」，於鍵32顯示「V」 ---------^------ΐτ------0 (請先W讀背面之注意事項再&quot;寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家櫺準（CNS ) Α4思格（210X297公釐） -22 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印装 A7 ___B7_五、發明説明（2〇 ) ’於鍵33顯示「N」，於鍵34顯示逗點「、」，於鍵 3 5顯示點記號「.」。 亦即，上段的5個鍵2 1〜2 5之各鍵由左側的鍵開 始依序顯示「QWj ， 「ER」，「TY」，「UI」， 「〇Pj ，中段的5個鍵26〜30之各鍵由左側的鍵開 始依序顯示「AS」，rDF」，「GH」，「JK」· 「L-j ，下段的5個鍵31〜35之各鍵由左側的鍵開 始依序顯示「ZX」，「CV」，「BN」，「M、」， 厂 * . j * 在此•各鍵2 1〜3 5的第1文字碼，設定爲鍵區域 內左部所顯示的文字的文字碼，第2文字碼，設定爲鍵茵 域內右部所顯示的文字的文字碼。 另一方面，第3圖所顯示的英文排列的場合，前述主 鍵2 1〜3 5所顯示的文字（英文字母）的排列與日文排 列相同地配合QWERTY排列而設定。但是在英文輸入的場合 ，因爲不使用日式的句點逗點所以設定爲在英文輸入時使 用頻率較高的英式逗點記號「，」，句點記號「.」，分 號「；」，冒號「：」。 具體而言，上段的5個鍵2 1〜2 5之各鍵區域內的 左部（第1文字碼），由左側的鍵開始依序於鍵2 1顯示 「Q」，於鍵22顯示「E」，於鍵23顯示「T」，於 鍵24顯示「U」，於鍵25顯示「0」，中段的5個鍵 2 6〜3 0之各鍵區域內的左部，由左側的鍵開始依序於 鍵26顯示「A」，於鍵27顯示「D」，於鍵28顯示 ----------^------tr------0 (诗先閲讀背面之注意事項再，4¾本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準{ CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） -23 - 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（21 ) 「G」，於鍵29顯示「J」，於鍵30顯示「L」，下 段的5個鍵3 1〜3 5之各鍵區域內的左部，由左側的鍵| 開始依序於鍵31顯示「Z」，於鍵32顯示「C」，於 鍵33顯示「B」，於鍵34顯示「Μ」，於鍵35顯示 句點「_」。 此外•於這些各鍵2 1〜3 5的按鍵區域內的右部（ 第2文字碼），分別於鍵21顯示「W」，於鍵22顯示 「R」，於鍵23顯示「Υ」，於鍵24顯示「I」，於 鍵25顯示「Ρ」，於鍵26顯示「S」，於鍵27顯示 「F」，於鍵28顯示「Η」，於鍵29顯示「Κ」，於 鍵30顯示分號「：」，於鍵31顯示「X」，於鍵32 顯示「V」，於鍵33顯示「Ν」，於鍵34顯示逗點「 ，j ，於鍵35顯示冒號「：」* 亦即，上段的5個鍵2 1〜2 5之各鍵由左側的鍵開 始依序顯示「QW」，「ERj ， 「TY」，「UIj ， 「◦Pj ，中段的5個鍵26〜30之各鍵由左側的鍵開 始依序顯示「AS」，「DF」，「GH」，「JK」’ 「L;」，下段的5個鍵31〜35之各鍵由左側的鍵開 始依序顯示「ZX」，「CV」，「BN」，「M， j ， 其次，關於實現盡面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1之內部構 成，參照第4圖及第5圖來說明。 第4圖係實現査面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1之內部構成 方塊圖|第5圖係顯示處理步驟之流程圖》 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） I n : n i . n n I n I n n n I 線 (請先M讀背面之注$項再填寫本f &gt; 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 -24 - N r 3779第86101883號專利申請案 Λ曰藏方 中文說明書修正齑民國89年5月修正 王Κ Β7 五、發明說明（22) 畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1係具備有按鍵输入手段 7 1及選擇處理手段7 2，選擇處理手段7 2係由判定手 段7 3及文字產生手段7 4所構成。 本實施形態之按鍵輸入手段71係由使用如前述之筆 1 5之輕觸式輸入手段所構成，於主鍵區域2 0，檢測是 否有藉由筆1 5之輕觸輸入（步驟1 ，以下以S替代「步 驟」兩字）。 在此，若有輕觸輸入，則藉由判定手段7 3判定該輕 觸輸入係靥桿輕觸輸入，亦即筆1 5在保持輕觸的狀態下 於該鍵區域內移動了指定長度以上，或者是點輕觸输入， 亦即筆15的移動距離較指定長度爲短（S2) » 在此，如果經判定爲點輕觸的話，文字產生手段7 4 進行產生被輕觸的鍵的左部位置所設定的第1文字碼的檫 準處理（S 3 )。 在另一方面，如果經判定不是點輕觸而是桿輕觸的話 ，文字產生手段7 4進行產生被輕觸的鍵的右部位置所設 定的第2文字碼的移位處理（S4) » 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 I 閱 讀 背. Sr 之 注 意 事 項 再 壎，' 頁I w I I 1 I I I 訂 線 以此文字產生手段7 4所處理的結果，顯示於液晶畫 面3。 藉由以上所述，結束各輕觸輸入的處理，如果有下— 個輕觸輸入，則反覆進行以上的處理而依序進行輕觭輸入 。此外，在使用第2圖所示之日文排列而輸入的場合，被 輸入的英文字母係經由畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1所內藏 之「假名漢字變換程式」而被認識爲羅馬拼音輸入而以「 本紙張&amp;度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -25 - 經濟部中央標準局負工消费合作社印製 413779 at _B7_五、發明説明（23 ) 平假名」顯示於畫面3，進而自動地或者是操作圖式中未 顯示之變換鍵而變換爲漢字· 在此說明判定手段7 3之輕觸輸入的判定方法。 如第6圖所示，判定手段7 3檢測出筆1 5輕觸各鍵 2 1〜3 5時的操作的差異，而判定係選擇各鍵的左部位 置（在第6圖爲A)或者是選擇各鍵的右部位置（在第6 圖爲B )。 此時作爲判斷輕觸操作乏不同的方法係採用第7圖或 是第8圖所示之方法。 第7圖所示之方法•係判斷各鍵2 1〜3 5的顯示區 域內所含有的每個畫素（pixel) 7 6的輕觸操作的不同 。亦即，如第7圖（1)所示，各鍵2 1〜3 5的顯示區 域內設定有縱10列，橫10行的共計100個畫素76 的場合*判定手段7 3判定在筆輕觸於各鍵2 1〜3 5的 顯示區域內的畫素在指定數目以內，例如輕觸的各鍵2 1 〜3 5的顯示區域內之1個S素或者是該1個畫素及其周 園的畫索7 6 (在第7圖以「+ j記號顯示的部份）所構 成的畫素7 6遭到輕觸的場合（以點狀被輕觸的場合）| 判定其爲點觸之输入*如第7圖之（2 )所示，當輕觸了 排列於同一個方向上的四個畫素7 6的場合（如同畫條橫 線般的輕觸的場合），判斷其爲桿觸之輸入。 此外，第7圖所示之範例爲橫向移動筆的場咅，筆以 上下方向或是斜向進而或是以「^」或「*-」狀移動的場 合，只要是輕觸了 4個以上的畫素7 6就判定其爲桿觸。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（2丨0X297公釐) ' -26 - ---------參------1T------^ (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再球寫本頁) 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明（24 ) 此外輕觸的起點只要是在各鍵2 1〜3 5的區域內無論是 哪個位置均可，而輕觸（桿狀）的尾巴即使超過按鍵區域 的界限，也是以在按鍵區域內所輕觸的畫素數來判斷係屬 點觸或者是桿觸· 此外，成爲判定基準的畫數7 6的數目並不限定於4 個以上或是未滿4個•特別是對應顯示區域內的畫素7 6 的數目而設定即可。例如，畜素7 6的數目設定爲縱5列 ’橫5行計2 5個的場合，也可以將輕觸2個以上的畫素 7 6判定爲桿觸· 另一方面，第8圖所示之方法•係根據筆1 5之輕觸 的起點與終點的距離而判斷輕觸操作的不同*亦即，判定 手段73之構成，係如第8圖（1)所示•在藉由筆15 輕觸的長度較設定長度爲短的場合判斷其爲點觸，如第8 圖（2 )所示，筆1 5所輕觸的長度較預先設定的長度爲 長的場合，判斷其爲桿觸》 在此場合，筆15以上下方向或是斜向進而或是以「 或狀在中途改變方向而移動的場合|只要是筆 1 5的起點與終點的距離，亦即移動距離在指定長度以上 就判定其爲桿觸。 此外，作爲判定基準的設定長度，可以預先設定好| 也可以讓使用者自行設定*其次說明本實施形態之效果》 根據本實施形態，各鍵2 1〜3 5因爲設定了第1文 字碼與第2文字碼，所以各鍵2 1〜3 5可以設定2個文 字（英文字母）或是記號。因此•與從前1個鍵只能輸入 本紙張尺度適用中國圔家標準（CNS &gt; A4規格（210X297公釐） (讀先閱讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) -27 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印袈 A7 ___B7_五、發明説明（25 ) 1個文字的場合相比，鍵的數目可以減半* 例如第2圖所示，即使只設定1 5個主鍵2 1〜3 5 ，各鍵2 1〜3 5可以設定2個文字碼亦即全體共可設定 3 0個文字碼。亦即，日文之羅馬拼音輸入或是英文輸入 所使用到的英文字母26個字之外，可以包含逗點「、 j 、句點「*」、及英文的逗點「，」、英文的句點「.j 等使用頻率較髙的記號。而將其設定於主鍵2 1〜35 * 以少數的鍵數就可以充分對應日文或是英文的輸入· 因此*與從前的QWERTY排列或是日文5 0音排列相比 ，可以使用大幅減少之1 5個主鍵2 1〜3 5而進行羅馬 字輸入或是英文输入•各鍵2 1〜3 5如果以與從前的 QWERTY排列或是日文5 0音排列的鍵的大小相同而顯示於 畫面3的話，鍵的顯示區域之主鍵區域2 0可以縮小，輕 觸鍵2 1〜3 5的筆1 5的移動量也可以減少，可以提高 操作性》 此外因爲主鍵區域2 0可以縮小，所以可以將畫面顯 示式鍵盤输入裝置1小型化，而且將資料等的顯示區域 1 0擴大，使用性或是操作性都可以更加提升* 另一方面，主鍵區域2 0如果與從前的QWERTY排列或 是日文50音排列之按鍵配置區域的大小相同的情況下， 各鍵2 1〜3 5的大小可以比從前的大小大出許多•對於 各鍵2 1〜3 5以筆操作或是以手指尖操作都可以輕易輕 觸，在此場合也可以提髙操作性。 此外，日文輸入中使用頻率較高的日文逗點「、」、 本紙‘尺度適用中國國家標準（CMS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） ---------装------ΐτ------0 C請先s讀背面之注$項再矽寫本頁) -28 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（26 ) 句點「。」、及英文输入使用頻率較高的逗點「， j 、句 點「. j等顯示於各鍵30、34、35而可以直接輕觸 輸入，所以日文輸入或是英文输入的操作性可以更加提升 進而因爲係將從前即已廣爲使用之QWERTY排列的按鍵 順序係設定於1 5個主鍵21〜35，所以對於習慣 QWERTY排列的人而言本實施形態的鍵排列容易記得，可以 簡單的立刻利用畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1。 在其上，第2圓的日文用排列與第3圖的英文用排列 除了記號部份以外，鍵的排列是一致的，所以日語用排列 與英文用排列之切換併用的場合，也容易記得鍵排列*可 以提升操作性· 此外，各鍵2 1〜3 5所顯示的2個文字或是記號在 輸入時’僅僅藉由稍微變化筆1 5的移動而選擇•靥於點 式的點輕觸輸入，或者是屬於輕觸的狀態下移動指定長度 的桿輕觸输入，而可以進行2種操作•而可以藉非常簡單 的操作而選擇各鍵2 1〜3 5之2個文字碼或記號的一方 ’亦即以非常簡單的操作而選擇第1及第2文字碼的一方 因此’即使是使用筆1 5來輕觸輸入，與從前的鍵盤 的移位操作相同1個鍵可以進行2種文字输入操作，而且 該操作非常簡單，所以可以提高操作性。 進而’被視爲是桿觸输入之筆15的移動量可以藉由 輸入裝置1的使用者依自己的喜好而調整的話，即使是各 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS &gt; M規格（2丨0&gt;&lt;297公釐… I— f I 裝 n ^ I ! 線 (請先W讀背面之注項再填寫本頁) -29 - 413779 經濟部中央標率局負工消費合作社印裝 A7 ____B7五、發明説明（27 ) 使用者在移動筆1 5時的移動量不同，也可以正確的判斷 係屬桿觸或是點觸，操作性可以更加提升。 此外，按鍵輸入區域1 2的各鍵2 1〜3 5因爲係相 互隔段距離而配置的，各鍵2 1〜3 5的區域之間明確地 區分開來，藉由筆1 5等輕觸输入時，可以防止橫跨2個 鍵而輸入的錯誤操作發生。特別是，輕觸到各鍵2 1〜 3 5間的間隙部份爲止之場合，設定成由該間隙部份之後 的輕觸輸入皆予取消的話，可以確實防止錯誤操作· 其次說明本發明之第2實施形態•此外，以下說明之 各實施形態若有與前述之實施形態有同樣的構成部份的話 ，使用相同的圖號，並省略或是簡化其說明* 本實施形態於按鍵輸入領域1 2，除了主鍵區域2 0 之外，新設了模.式鍵區域4 0與功能鍵區域5 0的特點與 第1實施形態不同》亦即前述與第1實施形態相同或者是 同一構成的部份省略或是簡化其說明。 如第9圇所示，本寅施形態之日文用排列中，主鍵區 域2 0的左側設有模式區域4 0 *主鍵區域2 0的下側設 有功能鍵區域5 0。 在此，主鍵谨域2 0的各主鍵2 1〜3 5與第2圖所 示之前述第1實施形態的日文用排列係相同的。 另一方面，模式鍵區域4 0處配置有縱1列的3個模 式鍵 4 1、4 2、4 3。 這些模式鍵41、42、43係將主鍵區域20的各 鍵2 1〜3 5配置出日文用或英文用以外的其他排列，而 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準&lt; CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） (請先閏讀背面之注意Ϋ項再填寫本頁) -30 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印裝 A7 B7 五、發明説明（28 ) 可以設定爲數字或是記號等的输入。例如如果選擇模式鍵 4 1的下部位置所顯示的記號模式鍵，主鍵區域2 0的各 鍵2 1〜3 5之顯示由英文字母變更爲各種記號•各鍵 2 1〜3 5可以用筆1 5輕觸而输入各種記號· 此外選擇模式鍵4 1的上部位置所顯示的片假名模式 鍵的話，主鍵區域2 0區分爲顯示母音的英文字母，與顯 示子音的英文字母，對於不習慣QWERTY排列方式的人而言 可以設定爲簡單的進行羅馬拼音输入，或是設定爲將被输 入羅馬拼音字變換爲片假名之片假名固定模式* 進而，模式鍵4 2的下部位置所顯示的英大（英文大 寫字母）模式鍵如果被選擇的話，被输入的英文字母都以 大寫的書體輸出*如果選擇模式鍵4 2的上部位置所顯示 的英小（英文小寫字母）模式鍵的話，被输入的英文字母 都以小寫的書體輸出。 進而如果選擇模式鍵4 3的下部位置所顯示的數字模 式鍵的話，主鍵區域20的各鍵2 1〜3 5被設定爲數字 (0〜9 )與算術記號而可以输入，鍵4 3的上部位置所 選擇的半角模式如果被選擇到的話，設定爲主鍵區域2 0 的輸入皆成爲半角輸入。 亦即，這些模式鍵41〜43，係用於輸入在日文文 章之略語或是外來語等場合所使用的英文標記或是片假名 標記的場合。此外，這些各排列的具體構成於後述之其他 實施形態中加以說明》 另一方面，功能鍵區域5 0，配置有在羅馬拼音輸入 本紙張尺度適用中國囷家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210Χ2ί&gt;7公釐） ---------^.-- (請先閲讀背面之注意Ϋ項再域寫本I) 訂 -31 - I V&quot;· ^13779 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（29) 時必需的設定爲各種功能的5個功能鍵5 1〜5 5。 亦即於鍵51的左下位置設定爲實施平假名漢字變化 機能的「變換」鍵’鍵5 1的右下位置設定爲输入空每)之 「空格j鍵，鍵5 1的上部位置設定爲設定主鍵區域2 0 的各鍵2 1〜3 5的各種擴充功能的「擴張機能」鍵，又 ，擴張機能鍵所擴充的各種功能包括例如移動游標至文章 頭、文章尾、行頭、行末等位置之移動功能’或是插入、 邊線、移動、剪貼，印刷等文書處理機經常利用到的各種 機能* 此外*鍵5 2的下部位置係實行不要變換平假名爲漢 字的機能之「無變」鍵’上部位置設定爲「取消」鍵。此 外，鍵5 3的下部位置係使游標後退（回到前面）之「後 退」鍵，上部位置設定爲平假名漢字變換時顯示同音異義 字的前候補之「前候」鍵。 進而，鍵5 4的下部位置設定爲「削除」鍵*上部位 置設定爲進行單漢字變換的「單漢」鍵。此外’鍵5 5的 下部位置設定爲「改行j鍵’上部位置係顯示將鍵排列以 後述的英語用排列等切換用的選單之「選單j鍵* 此外，功能鍵5 1較其他的鍵5 2〜5 5在寬度的規 格上爲大。 這些模式鍵41〜43，功能鍵51〜55與主鍵 2 1〜3 5的場合相同，藉由點觸输入及桿觸輸入之選擇 而選擇設定於各鍵4 1〜4 3，5 1〜5 5的上部或是下 部所設定的模式或是功能》 本紙張又度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐)~— ：~ -32 - i n ·1 1· t n ϋ It f ϋ n ϋ 1^—OJ» 1· I I &lt;請先閱讀背面之注意事項再瑱寫本頁) 413779 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（3〇) 此外，功能鍵5 1的下部設定爲「變換J及「空格」 2種機能，其設定爲：在输入的文字尙未變換爲漢字的未 確定狀態的場合，對鍵5 1點觸的話其作用爲「變換j * 而在確定狀態下點觸的話則其作用爲「空格」*無須特別 改變輸入操作即可在變換與空格之間切換。 另一方面，如第1 0圖所示，本實施形態之英文用排 列•也是在主鍵區域2 0的左側設有模式區域4 0 ·主鍵 區域20的下側設有功能鍵區域50。 此外，主鍵區域20的各主鍵2 1〜3 5與第3圖所 示之前述第1實施形態的英文用排列係相同的· 另一方面•模式鍵區域4 0處配置有可以將主鍵區域 2 0切換爲記號排列的SYM (SYMBOL)鍵4 1 * 將輸入摸式在大寫英文字输入與小寫英文字输入之間切換 之CAP鍵4 2，及將主鍵區域2 0切換爲數字排列之 N U Μ 鍵 4 3。 此外，功能鍵區域50，設定5個鍵51〜55 *其 中，鍵5 1設定爲「空格」鍵及「指令」鍵，鍵5 2設定 爲「ESC」鍵，鍵53設定爲「BS」（後退）鍵，鍵 54設定爲「DEL」（削除）鍵’鍵55設定爲「改行 ( )」鍵及「選單（MENU)」鍵。 此外設定2個功能的功能鍵5 1 、5 5係與主鍵相同 ，都是藉由判別點觸或是桿觸之輸入操作的不同而加以區 分。 根據具有如顯示於第9圖、第1 〇圖之鍵排列之第2 &lt;請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x297公釐） -33 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 413779 at _B7_五、發明説明（31 ) 實施形態，因爲具備有由設定爲各種功能或是空格鍵等之 功能鍵5 1〜5 5所成之功能鍵區域5 0 ’所以僅需輕觸 在日文或英文輸入所利用到的各種功能鍵5 1〜5 5即可 實行，可以提高输入的操作性。 此外因爲備有由切換主鍵區域2 0的排列的模式鍵 4 1〜4 3所構成之模式鍵區域，所以數字或是記號等的 輸入也可以高效率的進行· 其次說明本發明之第3實施彤態。 本實施形態，在主鍵菡域20的各主鍵2 1〜3 5的 鍵區域內，除了英文字母或句點、逗點、英文逗點等記號 以外，分別配置了數字排列用的記號及記號排列用的記號 兩種記號之複合排列。此外，本實施形態中與前述第1、 第2實施形態同一或是同樣的構成部分*省略或是簡略其 說明》 如第1 1圖所示，本實施形態之日文用複合排列中， 主鍵區域2 0的各主鍵2 1〜3 5上顯示數字排列及記號 排列用之各記號· 亦即各主鍵2 1〜3 5的左下位置上顯示數字排列用 之數字以及算術記號，作爲各鍵2 1〜3 5的第3文字碼 而設定這些數字排列用記號文字碼· 具體而言，主鍵區域2 0的中央三列顯示數字鍵，左 右各1列顯示算術記號。亦即，於各主鍵21〜35的左） 下位置’由主鍵區域2 0的上段左側開始依序於鍵2 1顯 示「―」’於鍵22顯示「7」，於鍵23顯示「8」， 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） ----------^------1T------^ (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再铲寫本頁) -34 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作杜印装 413779 A7 ___B7五、發明説明（32 ) 於鍵24顯示「9」，於鍵25顯示「+」，此外由中段 左側開始依序於鍵26顯示「+j ，於鍵27顯示「4j ，於鍵28顯示「5」，於鍵29顯示「6j ，於鍵30 顯示「X」，此外由下段左側開始依序於鍵31顯示 」，於鍵32顯示「1」，於鍵33顯示「2」，於鍵 34顯示「3j ，於鍵35顯示「=j 。 此外於各主鍵2 1〜3 5的右下位置顯示記號排列用 之記號包括括弧記號等各種記號，作爲各鍵2 1〜3 5的 第4文字碼而設定這些記號排列用記號文字碼。 具體而言，於各主鍵2 1〜3 5的右下位置，由主鍵 區域2 0的上段左側開始依序於鍵2 1顯示括弧記號「「 」，於鍵22顯示括弧記號「jj ，於鍵23顯示冒號「 ：j ，於鍵24顯示分號「；」，於鍵25顯示記號「/ 」，此外由中段左側開始依序於鍵26顯示括弧記號「（ j ，於鍵27顯示括弧記號「）」，於鍵28顯示and 記號「&amp; j ，於鍵2 9顯示百分比記號「％ j ，於鍵30 顯示星號「*」，此外由下段左側開始依序於鍵31顯示 井字記號「#」，於鍵32顯示修飾記號「@」，於鍵 33顯示英文逗點「，」，於鍵34顯示英文句點「♦」 ，於鍵35顯示記號「〜」。 此外模式鍵4 1〜4 3與功能鍵5 1〜5 5因爲與第 9圖所示之第2實施形態之日文排列相同所以省略其說明 〇 另一方面，如第1 2圖所示，本實施形態之英文用複 ---------------IT------旅， &lt;請先閲讀背面之注項再域寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家樣準（CNS ) A4C格（210X297公釐） -35 - 經濟部中央標举局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 _B7_五、發明説明（33 ) 合排列中，主鍵區域2 0的各主鍵2 1〜3 5的左下位置 上顯示數字排列用之數字以及算術記號，右下位置上顯示 記號排列用之各種記號記號，於各鍵2 1〜3 5分別設定 第3及第4文字碼· 數字排列與第1 1圖所示之日文用複合排列相同*亦 即，於鍵21顯示「一」，於鍵22顯示「7」，於鍵 23顯示「8」，於鍵24顯示「9」，於鍵25顯示「 -j ，於鍵26顯示「+」•於鍵27顯示「4」，於鍵 28顯示「5j ，於鍵29顯示「6」，於鍵30顯示「 X」，於鍵31顯示「〇j ，於鍵32顯示「1」，於鍵 33顯示「2」，於鍵34顯示「3j •於鍵35顯示「 =」。 此外記號排列係取代日文所使用的記號而配置英文所 使用之記號* 具體而言，由主鍵區域2 0的上段左側開始依序於鍵 21顯示括弧記號「 w」，於鍵22顯示括弧記號「”」 ，於鍵23顯示括弧記號「’」，於鍵24顯示美元記號 「$」，於鍵25顯示記號「/」*此外由中段左側開始 依序於鍵26顯示括弧記號「（」，於鍵27顯示括弧記 號「）」，於鍵28顯示and記號「&amp;」，於鍵29顯 示百分比記號「％」，於鍵30顯示星號「*j ，此外由 下段左側開始依序於鍵31顯示井字記號「#」，於鍵 32顯示修飾記號「@」，於鍵33顯示記號「！」，於 鍵34顯示問號「？」，於鍵35顯示記號「〜」》 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS) A4現格（210X297公釐） ----------^------1T------.^ (請先閱讀背面之注意f項再填寫本頁) -36 - 413779 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印装 A7 B7五、發明説明（34 ) 此外模式鍵4 1〜4 3與功能鍵5 1〜5 5因爲與第 10圖所示之第2實施形態之英文排列相同所以省略其說 明。 於如此之本實施形態，因爲於各主鍵2 1〜3 5上設 定了 4種類的文字、記號、數字，所以藉由筆1 5分別使 用4種類的輕觸输入操作，藉由判定手段7 3盼定期輸入 操作之不同而分別輸入各文字•記號、數字，亦即輸入第 1〜4之文字碼· 亦即，如第1 3圖所示，判定手段7 3檢測在以筆 1 5輕觸各鍵2 1〜3 5時的操作的不同，判定係選擇各 鍵21〜35的左部位置（第13圖中之Α)、右部位置 (第13圖中之Β)、左下位置（第13圖中之C)或右 下位置（第13圖中之D)之一* 此時，作爲判定輕觸操作的不同的判定方法，也以藉 由例如第14圖所示之方法進行》 第1 4圖所示之方法，係判斷各鍵2 1〜3 5的顯示 區域內所包含的每個畫素（pixel) 7 6有無被輕觸之输 入操作之不同•亦即如第1 4圖（1 )所示，各鍵的顯示 區域內設定縱1 0列、橫1 0行共計1 0 0個畫素76的 場合，判定手段7 3判定在筆輕觸於各鍵2 1〜3 5的顯 示區域內的畫素在指定數目以內，例如輕觸的各鍵2 1〜 3 5的顯示區域內之1個畫素或者是該1個畫素及其周圍 的畫素76 (在第14圖以「+」記號顯示的部份）所構 成的畫素76遭到輕觸的場合（以點狀被輕觸的場合）， — In n i n ^ I· H 1 ϋ n n ^ I—-^ {請先《讀背面之注^^項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準（CNS) A4規格（210X2?7公釐） -37 - 413779 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印褽 A7 B7五、發明説明（35 ) 判定其爲點觸之输入，如第1 4圊之（2 )所示，當輕觸 了排列於同一個方向上的四個畫素7 6的場合（如同畫條 橫線般的輕觸的場合），判斷其爲桿觸之输入。 進而，判斷手段對於如第1 4圖（3)所示，由右上 向左下方向輕觸了 4個以上的畫素7 6的場合*判斷其爲 向左下方之桿觸，如第1 4圖（4)所示，由左上向右下 方向輕觸了 4個以上的畫素7 6的場合，判斷其爲向右下 方之桿觸。而文字產生手段Ϋ 4，係在判定手段7 3判定 爲點觸的場合輸出鍵2 1〜3 5左部位置的文字（第1文 字碼），在判定手段73判定爲桿觸的場合输出鍵21〜 35右部位置的文字（第2文字碼）•在判定手段73判 定爲向左下方桿觸的場合輸出鍵2 1〜3 5左下位置的文 字（第3文字碼），在判定手段73判定爲向右下方桿觸 的場合輸出鍵2 1〜3 5右下位置的文字（第4文字碼） 而構成》 此外要區別如此般的方向相異的各種桿觸，只要檢測 以筆15輕觸各畫素76的位置與時間而後由筆15的輕 觸方向（移動方向）來判斷即可。但是於本實施例僅需區 別橫方向、左下方向、右下方向的3個方向的桿觸即可， 所以可以僅就筆15輕觸到的各畫素76的相互位置關係 而區別*具有可以簡單的進行處理的優點。 根據如此之本實施形態，於各主鍵2 1〜3 5不僅可 以設定英文字母，而且數字或記號也可以設定，而且只要 稍微改變這些數字或記號以筆输入的操作方法，就可以容 本紙張尺度適用中國闺家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） &quot; —一 38 — -----------Λ------IT------t (請先闔讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印震 413779 A7 A7 ______B7_五、發明説明（36 ) 易的選擇1個鍵2 1〜3 5所被設定的第1〜第4文字碼 而輸入。因此在輸入數字或是記號時，不需要設置移位鍵 或是摸式鍵而切換输入，可以提高操作性。 特別是，在以文字输入爲主而文章中出現頻率較低的 數字或是記號在输入時，不需要每次進行切換模式而可以 输入數字或是記號，所以輸入的操作性可以提升* 此外持績输入數字或記號等的場合，也可以輕觸左端 的模式鍵4 1〜4 3，而將主鍵區域2 0切換爲數字排列 或是記號排列。 此外，因爲可以在1個鍵上設定複數個文字或是數字 、記號等資訊，所以於除了主鍵2 1〜3 5以外另外設置 數字鍵或是記號鍵的場合相比，鍵數可以減少，在按鍵輸 入操作時筆1 5的移動距離幅度也可以減小，而且各鍵 21〜35的尺寸也可以較大，可以提升操作性。進而筆 1 5的點觸、右方向桿觸、左下方桿觸以及右下方桿觭因 爲彼此之間的输入操作差異很大，所以藉由判定手段7 3 的檢測可以容易地進行可以防止錯誤操作而卻實輸入各文 字。 進而，數字鍵在主鍵區域2 0的正中央的3列係與普 逋的電子計算機相同，由下段側開始以0〜9的順序顯示 排列，所已在進行計算操作的場合，可以與通常的計算機 相同的操作而輸入，可以提高操作性。 此外，各鍵2 1〜3 5的右下所配置的記號排列，與 第1 1圖的日文用複合排列以及第1 2圖的英文用複合排 ---1------J装—----1 訂！-----复 (請先«讀背面之注^|^項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4見格（210X297公釐） -39 - 經濟部中央揉準局貝工消費合作社印製 413179 at ___B7_五、發明説明（37 ) 列不同，因爲係依照輸入時使用頻率的高低而配置各個的 排列位置，所以記號輸入的操作性也可以提升。 其次，說明本發明第4實施形態。 本實施形態如第1 5圖所示，使用備有本體8 1即顯 示器8 2之桌上型的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置8 0，同時 按鍵输入手段係移動顯示於顯示器8 2的游檫8 3而選擇 顯示於顯示器8 2的按鍵輪入區域1 2的各鍵2 1〜3 5 之游標數輸入手段之一例爲使用滑鼠8 4之输入法•於本 實施例，前述第1〜第3實施形態的各種鍵盤排列可以適 當的應用，各文字、記號、數字等的選擇方法，係採用可 以發揮滑鼠8 4的特色的方法* 亦即，如第3實施形態一般，1個鍵設定第1〜4文 字碼，而顯示文字、數字、記號等4種類文字資訊的場合 ，如第1 6圖所示，其構成爲在游檫83配合鍵2 1〜 3 5的狀態下，單按滑鼠8 4的左鍵8 4A (壓按鈕的操 作），其單按經判定手段73檢測出來時，文字產生手段 74输出各鍵2 1〜3 5的左部位置（第1 6圖的A)的 文字（第1文字碼），而單按滑鼠的右鍵8 4 B時，輸出 各鍵2 1〜3 5的右部位置（第1 6圖的B)的文字（第 2文字碼）。 此外其構成爲在保持按下滑鼠的左鍵8 4 A或是右鍵 8 4 B而在鍵2 1〜3 5的區域內使游標8 3向左下方移 動時（向左下方拖動時）文字產生手段輸出各鍵2 1〜 3 5的左下位置（第1 6圖的C)的文字（第3文字碼） 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） ---------^------1T------1^ (請先W讀背面之注意Ϋ項再ί/為本頁) -40 - 413779 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明（38 ) ，而向右下方拖動的話，輸出各鍵2 1〜3 5的右下位置 (第16圖的D)的文字（第4文字碼）。 於如此這般的本寅施形態，藉由滑鼠的输入操作僅需 作些許的變更即可輸入4種類的文字、數字、記號等，可 以提高操作性。 尙且，使用滑鼠8 4的場合，使用頻率較高的英文字 母部份，亦即各鍵2 1〜3 5的左部位置及右部位置的輸 入，僅需單按滑鼠的各鍵84A、84B即可，所以操作 性非常髙· 又，於本實施形態採用前述第1或是第2實施形態的 鍵排列的場合•可以單按左右的各按鍵84A、84B而 切換輸入。 此外，使用_僅有一個按鍵的滑鼠的場合，單按右鍵 8 4 B而輸入右部位置文字的操作係採用雙按按鍵（以很 短的間隔按兩次按鍵）而取代之，或者是與筆的輸入相同 將游標8 3向橫方向拖動亦可。 藉由此第4實施形態及第3實施形態的筆15及滑鼠 8 4而切換4種類文字、數字、記號的输入方法經整理之 後如第1 7圓所示。 於以上之第1〜4實施形態，選擇各主鍵21〜35 的左右的文字的場合，也可以不使用以筆1 5的移動距離 來判斷的方法，而採用第1 8圓所示的以輕觸鍵2 1〜 3 5的時間長短區分選擇操作而加以判定亦可· 具體而言，判定手段7 3之構成係：如第1 8圖（1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS &gt; A4規格（2丨0X297公釐） I n I .1 n ^ ϋ — [ ^ I I n I ^ (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再媒寫本頁) -41 - 經濟部中央操準局員工消费合作社印製 413779 A7 __B7五、發明説明（39 ) )所示，以筆輕觸（壓下）鍵2 1〜3 5的持續時間如果 較設定的時間爲短的場合，判定該鍵2 1〜3 5的左部位 置被選擇，而如第18圖（2)所示，以筆輕觸鍵21〜 3 5的持續時間如果在設定時間以上的場合，判定該鍵 2 1〜3 5的右部位置被選擇•即使是在以如此的輕觸時 間來判斷的場合，也於前述實施形態相同，僅變更少許輕 觸操作即可進行2種類的操作，各鍵2 1〜3 5的左右位 置所設定的文字或記號的一方，可以非常簡單的操作而選 擇輸入，可以提高操作性* 此外，如果讓輸入裝置1的使用者可以依自己的喜好 調整輕觸的判斷時間的話，即使是各使用者所操作的持續 時間長短不同的場合•也可以正確判斷係靥何方的文字被 输入操作。 此外，將輕觸時間分爲4階段，而進行如第3實施例 之4種類的文字、數字、記號的輸入亦可。 此外與藉由筆15而輕觸按鍵操作不同的操作如第 1 9圖所示，可以藉由判定手段7 3判定輕觸壓力係於設 定壓力之下（第19圖之（1))，或是在設定的壓力以 上（第19圖（2))，而選擇文字輸入操作亦可。 此外，將鍵21〜35的各區域分割爲左右2菡域， 或是分割爲上下左右4個區域，而後判定各分割之後區域 之中何者被輕觸而選擇文字輸入操作的方式亦可。 此外作爲輕觸的手段|也可以不使用筆15之筆式输 入手段，而如第2 0圖所示，以指尖在畫面9 1的按鍵輸 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準（CNS ) A4規格（2丨0X297公釐） I- ------裝------订------A (請先尸i&gt;背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -42 - 經濟部中央樣準局員工消費合作社印製 413779 A7 ___B7_五、發明説明（40 ) 入區域輕觸而利用觸控螢幕式的輸入手段亦屬可能。 此外於輕觸式輸入手段，作爲認識筆1 5或是指尖的 輕觸的手段可以因應畫面種類而利用靜電容量型、光學塑 、電阻型等各種手段*前述輕觸式输入手段亦可因應這些 認識手段而加以適當選擇》 進而，按鍵输入手段並不限於藉由筆1 5或是觸控式 螢幕而操作的輕觸式输入手段，前述藉由滑鼠8 4的游標 式輸入手段也可以使用》 作爲此游標式轅入手段*也可以採用在如第2 1圖所 示之數位板上以筆輕觸而移動顯示於畫面9 7上的游標 9 8的數位板式输入手段。進而，與滑鼠8 4具有同樣功 能的滑球或是在數位板上以手指間輕觸而操作的數位板形 式的產品或是遊戲搖桿或是遊戲機的操縱板等，可以移動 顯示於畫面上的游標，而且具有按鍵或者是相當於按鍵的 機能的各種輸入機器也可以拿來利用。 此時，於游標式輸入手段，在設有3個以上的按鍵的 場合，也可以設定爲把原先由拖動操作而輸入文字改成藉 由按鍵操作而輸入。例如具有3個按鍵的場合，如第3實 施形態，各鍵2 1〜3 5設定爲4種類的文字、數字、記 號的話1可以設定藉由各鍵的輕觸而輸入鍵2 1〜3 5的 左部、右部、左下部的各位置的文字' 數字等，而以拖動 操作輸入右下位置的記號•進而，如遊戲機的控制器一般 具有4個以上的按鍵的場合，不採用拖動操作而以各按鍵 的壓下而輸入各鍵2 1〜3 5的左部、右部、左下、右下 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -43 - 經濟部中央揉準局員工消費合作社印裝 413779 A7 _B7_五、發明説明（41 ) 之各位置的文字、數字、記號等的設定亦可。 如此所示增加按鍵數目而僅靠單按操作即可输入的文 字等若能增加，與含有拖動操作的場合相比，可以更簡單 的操作而且可以確實區別輸入，同時藉由判定手段7 3而 進行之输入判定也更容易進行，而可以提供廉價的按鍵輸 入裝置* 進而，於前述各實施形態，各鍵2 1〜3 5顯示2種 類或是4種類的文字等，但也可以使之顯示3種類或是5 種類以上的文字等而輸入。 此外，在顯示5種類以上的文字等的場合，在採用筆 1 5等之輕觸式輸入手段中，只要判斷筆1 5等的移動方 向即可。例如，在點觸之外，加上上下左右4個方向，或 是左上、右上、左下、右下等可以判定的4個方向成爲5 種類的輸入操作，或者是在點觸之外，加上可以判定的上 下左右、左上、右上、左下、右下8個方向成9種類输入 操作亦可* 進而，使用滑鼠等游檩式輸入手段的場合，個按鍵的 單按之外，加上雙按等不同的按鍵操作，或是與筆1 5的 場合相同，將拖動方向設定爲上下左右、左上、右上、左 下、右下之最大8個方向而實現5種以上的输入操作即可 如此而可以實現5種以上的输入操作的話，各鍵2 1 〜3 5可以設定更多的文字、數字、記號等，更加可以提 高操作性。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家#隼（CNS &gt; A4規格（210X297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注^^項再填寫本頁) -44 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 413779 A7 A7 B7 五、發明説明（42 ) 此外，於主鍵®域2 0的鍵2 1〜3 5，英文字母以 外的記號或數字的配置和種類並不限於前述各實施形態的 配置與種類，例如，因應使用語言的種類而適當設定使用 頻率高的文字或記號即可。 進而，在前述第3實施形態，數字鍵係配置於正中央 的3列，但也可以配置於偏左或偏右的3列亦可。此外》 由上段開始依序顯示1〜9、0之配置而配合如電話機上 的數字排列亦可。特別是攜帶用的資訊終端機等內藏有電 話功能的場合，備有如此之電話排列其優點是可以提高電 話操作性· 此外，將電視作爲畫面而利用之電視遊樂器或是資訊 機器用的資料輸入裝置適用本發明的場合，可以於電視畫 面上所顯示的主鍵2 1〜3 5顯示電視頻道的頻道排列， 而將頻道切換操作也以本發明之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置 來實現亦可。 進而 &gt; 於前述各實施形態，作爲輕觸主鍵2 1〜3 5 之輸入操作除了前述各鍵的輸入操作之外設定其他的操作 方法，而在進行該操作時實行各種功能等的構成亦可。• 1T This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -18-The Central Government of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Industrial Standards Bureau, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, India, 413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (1β) It is also easy to enter numbers or signs when necessary, especially in articles containing numbers or signs, which improves input operability. In addition, the present invention includes setting at least one of the primary keys formed by the aforementioned 15 primary keys to be in addition to the foregoing two character codes, and setting a third character code and a fourth character code *, and the selection processing means judgment system has : Judgment means for judging the four types of key selection operations of the aforementioned key input means, and occurrence of characters that are selected to be set to one of the first to fourth character codes of each key based on the key selection operation determined by the judging means and output processing Means e According to such an invention, the first and second character codes are set to English letters * The third character code can be set to numbers, the fourth character code can be set to signs, etc. • These numbers or signs are the same as the text input, just change It can be input by key selection operation, so it is easy to input when it is necessary to input numbers or symbols, especially in the input of articles containing numbers or symbols, the input operability can be improved. In addition, the present invention is provided with an arrangement switching means for switching the symbols displayed on the screen and the arrangement of the character codes generated when the key is touched. According to the present invention, the arrangement of the character codes set by the primary key can be switched between various arrangements such as Japanese and Roman alphabet, English arrangement, number arrangement, and symbol arrangement, so even if there are only 15 primary keys, 15 can be set * 2 (1st and 2nd symbols) * Number of permutation keys, that is, 30 keys of * Permutation number, as long as the arrangement is switched, various symbols (characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) can be directly input, which can be easily input. . This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) &lt; Please read the note on the back before continuing on this page) -19-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 _ V. Description of the invention (17) In addition, the present invention is shown in the above screen. In addition to the main key area composed of 15 keys in five rows of left and right segments, a support key area composed of a plurality of support keys adjacent to the main key area and setting various functions is provided. Support key area, for example, it can be arranged below the main key area or one of the left and right sides. It is better to have at least 5 support keys. In this case, the support key can be set to switch the key displayed on the screen to Various arrangements of mode switching functions, or text input operations such as Chinese character conversion, space input, back key, back key, cancel key, etc. I have various functions necessary to improve the input operability ** In addition, you can only switch the mode The function is separated separately from the support key, and the mode switch key is set beside the main key area. In this case, the arrangement of each main key can be easily switched by touching the switch key. Furthermore, the menu key displayed in the mode selection menu can be set to the support key, etc., and the mode key can be pressed to switch the mode on the screen display mode selection menu. In this case, it is the same as when the mode switching function is set to the switching key. It can set more permutations than can be set, and can support various input operability. Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention In order to explain the present invention in more detail, it will be described with reference to the appendix. Fig. 1 is a screen display keyboard input device 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Screen display keyboard input device 1 is used in portable information terminal (PDA) • The surface of the main body 2 is equipped with a liquid crystal screen 3 * This paper size is applicable to China's national standard "CNS &gt; A4 specification (210X297 mm) --------- ^ ------ 1T ------ This book (please read the "$" on the back and then write this page) -20-Shellfisher, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by a consumer cooperative 413779 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (18) Although it is not shown in Figure 1, a cover that can be opened and closed freely can be installed on the body 2 to protect the part of the screen 3 · On the LCD screen 3 , When implementing various functions such as word processing, table calculation, address book, e-mail, timetable, etc., a data display area 1 0 for displaying input text or displaying data * The form of this display area 10 can be in accordance with The selected function is appropriately modified and configured. In addition, a key input area 12 is arranged below the display area 10. In addition, the key input area 12 can be constantly maintained in the display state. Display area 10 takes up the entire screen 3 and is displayed. The key input is displayed on the screen. Start key, etc. Once the start key is touched, a part of the display area 10 is displayed as needed (P oop_up p) menu. The display area 1 〇 can be expanded and the amount of information displayed can be increased. For the advantage, this on-screen keyboard input device 1, as shown in the first paragraph, is attached with a pen 1 5 which is used as a touch input means for key input means. Therefore, a holding pen 1 5 is provided on the body 2 When using the on-screen keyboard input device 1 to prevent the pen 15 from being lost, use the left hand (right hand) to hold the main body 2 or place it on the table, and then use the right hand (left hand) ) Hold the pen 15 to operate. The key input area 12 is shown in Figure 2. There are 15 main keys 2 1 ~ 3 5 with 5 main keys 2 1 ~ 3 5. Main key area 2 0 Each of the main keys 2 1 ~ 3 5 is displayed on the QWERTY Japanese arrangement used for the Roman pinyin input shown in Figure 2 and this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ( Please read the note ^^ on the back before filling this page) -21- Employees' cooperative of the Central Bureau of Procurement of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China printed 413779 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention (19) The QWERTY style English arrangement shown in Figure 3 uses mode switching keys or pens that are not shown in the circle style 15 The input operation is to switch the display by, for example, touching the part of the main key area 20 where there is no key display, and the operation is switched by means of an arrangement switching means. * QWERTY type text is displayed by the aforementioned main keys 2 1 to 3 5 Arrangement of (English alphabets) is a general QWERTY arrangement that matches the English alphabetical arrangement on a general keyboard. Specifically, the left part of each of the five keys 2 1 to 25 in the upper section, From the left key, “Q” is displayed in sequence on key 21, “E” is displayed on key 22, “T” is displayed on key 23, “U j” is displayed on key 24, and “〇” is displayed on key 25, and the middle 5 The left part of each key area of each key 26 ~ 30, starting from the left key, displays "eight" in order of key 2 6 and "0" in key 27. "G" in key 28 and "J" is displayed at 29, "L" is displayed at key 30, and each of the five keys 3 1 to 35 in the lower stage is in the key area. The left portion, starting from the left-hand bond sequentially to the key 31 displays "Z" to the key 32 displays "C" to the key 33 displays "B" to the key 34 displays "Μ" to the key 35 display period ". ”〇 In addition, on the right side of the key area of each of the keys 21 to 35," W "is displayed on key 21," R "is displayed on key 22," Υ "is displayed on key 23, and" Υ "is displayed on key 24. I "," P "on key 25," S "on key 26," F "on key 27," H "on key 28," K "on key 29, and long key" 30 "on key 30 "1", "X" displayed on key 31, and "V" displayed on key 32 --------- ^ ------ ΐτ ------ 0 (Please read the note on the back first Matters &quot; write this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 格格 (210X297mm) -22-Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (2 〇) 'N' is displayed on key 33, comma "," is displayed on key 34, and dot mark "." Is displayed on key 35. That is, each of the five keys 2 1 to 2 5 in the upper stage sequentially displays “QWj,“ ER ”,“ TY ”,“ UI ”,“ 〇Pj ”, and the five keys in the middle stage 26 to 26. The keys of 30 are displayed in order from the keys on the left, "AS", rDF "," GH "," JK ", and" Lj ". The keys of the lower five keys 31 to 35 are displayed in order from the keys on the left. ZX "," CV "," BN "," M, ", factory *. J * Here • The first text code of each key 2 1 to 3 5 is set to the text of the text displayed on the left side of the key area Code, the second character code, is set to the character code of the character displayed on the right side of the key field. On the other hand, in the case of the English arrangement shown in Fig. 3, the arrangement of the characters (English letters) displayed by the main keys 21 to 35 is set in accordance with the QWERTY arrangement in the same manner as the Japanese arrangement. However, in the case of English input, because Japanese period commas are not used, the English comma mark ",", period ".", Semicolon ";", colon, which are used frequently in English input, are set. ":". Specifically, the left part (the first text code) of each of the five keys 2 1 to 2 5 in the upper paragraph starts with the key on the left and displays "Q" sequentially on key 2 1 and displays "Q" on key 22 "E", "T" is displayed on key 23, "U" is displayed on key 24, "0" is displayed on key 25, and the middle part of the five keys 26 to 30 is the left part of the key area. Start with "A" on key 26, "D" on key 27, and ---------- ^ ------ tr ------ 0 (Poem Please read the precautions on the back, 4¾ page) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard {CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -23-413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (21) "G", displayed on key 29 "J", "L" is displayed on key 30, and the left part of each key area of the 5 keys 3 1 to 3 5 in the lower stage starts with the key on the left | "Z" is displayed sequentially on key 31, and on key 32 "C" is displayed, "B" is displayed on key 33, "M" is displayed on key 34, and period "_" is displayed on key 35. In addition, in the right part (second text code) of each of the keys 2 1 to 35, "W" is displayed on key 21, "R" is displayed on key 22, and "Υ" is displayed on key 23, "I" is displayed on key 24, "P" is displayed on key 25, "S" is displayed on key 26, "F" is displayed on key 27, "Η" is displayed on key 28, "K" is displayed on key 29, and 30 displays a semicolon ":", key X displays "X", key 32 displays "V", key 33 displays "N", key 34 displays a comma ", j, and key 35 displays a colon": " * That is, the five keys 2 1 to 2 5 in the upper stage are sequentially displayed as "QW", "ERj," TY "," UIj, "◦Pj, and the five keys in the middle stage. Each of the 30 keys starts with "AS", "DF", "GH", "JK", "L;" in order from the keys on the left, and each of the 5 keys 31 to 35 in the lower stage starts from the keys on the left. The sequence displays "ZX", "CV", "BN", "M, j", and secondly, the internal structure of the keyboard input device 1 for realizing the full-face type display will be described with reference to Figs. 4 and 5. Fig. 4 shows Achieve face-to-face keyboard input Block diagram of the internal structure of the input device 1 | Figure 5 is a flowchart showing the processing steps. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) I n: ni. Nn I n I nnn I line ( Please read the note $ on the back before filling in this f &gt; Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Printed by the Cooper Consumer Cooperatives-24-N r 3779 No. 86101883 Patent Application Λ Revision of the Tibetan Chinese Manual 5 Month correction king Β7 V. Description of the invention (22) The on-screen keyboard input device 1 is provided with a key input means 7 1 and a selection processing means 7 2, and the selection processing means 7 2 is determined by a judgment means 7 3 and a text generation means 7 4. The key input means 71 of this embodiment is formed by using the touch input means of the pen 15 as described above, and in the main key area 20, it is detected whether there is a touch input by the pen 15 (step 1, the following replaces the word "step" with S). Here, if there is a touch input, the touch input is determined by the judging means 7 3, that is, the pen 1 5 is holding the touch Moved the specified area in the key area More than degrees, or touch input, that is, the movement distance of the pen 15 is shorter than the specified length (S2) »Here, if it is determined that the touch is a touch, the text generating means 7 4 generates a touched key On the other hand, if it is determined that the first character code is not touched but touched by a lever, the character generation means 74 will generate a touched character. Shift processing of the second character code set at the right position of the key (S4) »Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economics I read the back. Sr notes again, 'Page I w II 1 III Thread The result processed by the character generating means 74 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 3. With the above, the processing of each tap input is ended. If there is the next one tap input, the above processing is repeatedly performed and the tap input is performed sequentially. In addition, when using the Japanese arrangement shown in FIG. 2 for input, the entered English letters are recognized as Roman pinyin input through the "Kana Kanji conversion program" built into the on-screen keyboard input device 1. "This paper &amp; degree applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -25-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 at _B7_ V. Invention Description (23) Hiragana" It is displayed on the screen 3, and is automatically or converted to a Chinese character by operating a conversion key not shown in the drawing. The determination method of the touch input of the determination means 73 is explained here. As shown in FIG. 6, the determination means 7 3 detects a difference in the operation when the pen 15 touches each key 2 1 to 35, and the determination is to select the left position of each key (A in FIG. 6) or Select the right position of each key (B in Figure 6). At this time, as a method for judging the lack of a touch operation, the method shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 is adopted. The method shown in Fig. 7 is to determine the difference in the touch operation of each pixel 76 contained in the display area of each key 21 to 35. That is, as shown in FIG. 7 (1), a display area of each key 2 1 to 3 5 is set with a total of 100 pixels 76 in 10 columns and 10 rows in the display area. The number of pixels within the display area of each key 2 1 to 35 is within the specified number, for example, one S element or the one pixel and the one pixel in the display area of each key 2 1 to 35 is touched. When Zhou Yuan's painting 7 6 (the part shown with "+ j" in Figure 7) is touched (when touched with dots) | Determine it as Touch input * As shown in (2) of Figure 7, when four pixels 7 6 arranged in the same direction are touched (when touched like a horizontal bar), judge This is the input of the lever. In addition, the example shown in Figure 7 is the field where the pen is moved laterally. The pen moves up or down in an oblique direction or moves in a "^" or "*-" shape. Touching more than 4 pixels 7 6 determines that it is a lever touch. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) '-26---------- ref ----- 1T ------ ^ (please first Μ Read the notes on the back and write this page again) 413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (24) In addition, the starting point of tapping is only within the area of each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 No matter which position it is, even if the tapped (rod-shaped) tail exceeds the limit of the button area, it is determined by the number of pixels touched in the button area that the touch is a touch or a lever. In addition, it becomes The number of the number of pictures 7 6 to be determined is not limited to four or less than four. In particular, the number of pictures 7 6 in the display area may be set. For example, if the number of animal elements 7 6 is set to be 5 columns and 5 rows and 2 rows are counted as 25, it is also possible to determine that touching 2 or more pixels 7 6 is a lever touch. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8 The method shown is to determine the difference in touch operation based on the distance between the starting point and the end point of the 15 touch of the pen *, that is, the composition of the determination means 73 is shown in Figure 8 (1). 15 If the touched length is shorter than the set length, it is judged as a touch. As shown in Figure 8 (2), if the length touched by the pen 15 is longer than the preset length, it is judged as a lever. Touch> In this case, the pen 15 moves up or down or obliquely or moves in the direction of "or shape" and changes the direction midway | As long as it is the distance between the starting point and the ending point of pen 15, that is, the moving distance is within the specified length In the above, it is judged as a lever touch. In addition, the set length of the judgment reference can be set in advance | It can also be set by the user * Next, the effect of this embodiment will be explained. According to this embodiment, each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 Because the first text code and the second text code are set, each key 2 1 ~ 35 can be set. 2 characters (English letters) or a symbol. Therefore, you can only enter the paper size with the previous 1 key (CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297 mm)) (read the f note on the back before reading) (Fill in this page) -27-Seal A7 _B7_ of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (25) The number of keys can be halved compared to the case of 1 text * For example, as shown in Figure 2, Only 15 main keys 2 1 ~ 3 5 are set, and each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 can be set with 2 text codes, that is, a total of 30 text codes can be set. That is, the Roman alphabet input in Japanese or the English input. In addition to the 26 characters used in the alphabet, commas ", j, periods" * ", and English commas", "and English periods" .j "are frequently used. Set to the main key 2 1 ~ 35 * With a small number of keys, it can fully correspond to Japanese or English input. Therefore * Compared with the previous QWERTY arrangement or Japanese 50-tone arrangement, a significant reduction of 15 primary keys can be used 2 1 to 3 5 for Roman or English input • Each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 If the keys with the same size as the previous QWERTY arrangement or Japanese 50-tone arrangement are displayed on screen 3, the main key area 2 0 of the key display area can be reduced, and touch the key 2 1 ~ 3 5 The amount of movement of the pen 15 can also be reduced, which can improve operability. In addition, since the main key area 20 can be reduced, the on-screen keyboard input device 1 can be miniaturized, and the display area 10 such as data can be enlarged and used. Can improve the operability or operability * On the other hand, if the size of the main key area 20 is the same as that of the key arrangement area of the previous QWERTY arrangement or Japanese 50-tone arrangement, the size of each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 It can be much larger than before. • You can easily touch each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 with a pen or fingertip operation. In this case, operability can be improved. In addition, the Japanese commas "," and "paper" used frequently in Japanese input are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) --------- installation ------ ΐτ ------ 0 C Please read the note on the back before writing this page) -28-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (26) Period ". ", And the comma", j, period ", which is used frequently in English input." J "is displayed on each key 30, 34, 35 and can be directly touched, so the operability of Japanese input or English input can be further improved. Furthermore, since the key sequence of the QWERTY arrangement, which has been widely used in the past, is set to 15 primary keys 21 to 35, the key arrangement of this embodiment is easy to remember for people who are used to the QWERTY arrangement, and can be used immediately and easily. Screen display keyboard input device 1. The Japanese arrangement for the second circle is the same as the English arrangement shown in Figure 3 except for the mark part. The arrangement of the keys is the same, so the Japanese arrangement and the English arrangement are switched. It ’s easy to remember the key arrangement when using it together * Can improve the operability. In addition, the 2 characters or symbols displayed on each key 2 1 to 3 5 can be selected only by slightly changing the movement of the pen 15 when inputting. Or you can move the lever of a specified length in the state of tapping, and you can perform two types of operations. • You can select one of the two text codes or symbols of each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 through a very simple operation. That is, the one with the first and second text codes is selected with a very simple operation. Therefore, even if the pen 15 is used to tap and input, it is the same as the previous keyboard shift operation. One key can perform two types of text input operations. Moreover, the operation is very simple, so the operability can be improved. Furthermore, if the amount of movement of the pen 15 regarded as a lever touch input can be adjusted by the user of the input device 1 according to his preference, even for each paper Standards apply to Chinese national standards (CNS &gt; M specifications (2 丨 0 &gt; &lt; 297 mm ... I— f I Install n ^ I! line (please read the note on the back before filling this page) -29-413779 Printed by A7 Consumers Cooperative of Central Standards Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs ____B7 Description of the Invention (27) When the user moves the pen 15 with different amounts of movement, it can also correctly determine whether it is a lever touch or a touch, and the operability can be further improved. In addition, the keys 2 1 to 3 5 of the key input area 12 are arranged at a distance from each other. The areas of the keys 2 1 to 35 are clearly distinguished, and they are input by touching with a pen 15 or the like. In this way, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation inputted across two keys. In particular, in the case where a touch is made up to a gap portion between the keys 2 1 to 35, if the touch input after the gap portion is set to be canceled, an erroneous operation can be surely prevented. Next, the present invention will be described. Second Embodiment • In addition, if each embodiment described below has the same constituent parts as the previous embodiment, the same drawing number is used, and the description is omitted or simplified. * This embodiment is in the key input field 1 2. In addition to the main key area 20, a new mode is set. The characteristics of the mode key area 40 and the function key area 50 are different from those of the first embodiment. That is, the foregoing is the same as or the same as the first embodiment. The description is omitted or simplified. As shown in Fig. 9 (b), in the Japanese arrangement of the Ben Yinshi pattern, a pattern area 40 is provided on the left side of the main key area 20 * a function key area 50 is provided below the main key area 2 0. Here, each of the primary keys 21 to 35 of the primary key field 20 is the same as the arrangement for Japanese in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2. On the other hand, in the mode key area 40, three mode keys 4 1, 4 and 4 3 in a vertical row are arranged. These mode keys 41, 42, 43 are arranged in the main key area 20 with keys 2 1 to 3 5 arranged in other than Japanese or English, and this paper size applies Chinese national standards &lt; CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -30-Printed on the A7 B7 by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (28) Can be set Enter numbers or symbols. For example, if you select the mark mode key displayed at the lower position of the mode key 41, the display of each key 2 1 to 3 5 in the main key area 20 will be changed from English letters to various signs. • Each key 2 1 to 3 5 can use the pen 1 5 Touch to enter various symbols. · In addition, if the katakana mode key displayed on the upper part of the mode key 4 1 is selected, the main key area 2 0 is divided into English letters that display vowels and English letters that display consonants. For those who are not used to QWERTY arrangement For the person of the method, it can be set to simply input the Roman pinyin, or to set the katakana fixed mode that converts the inputted Roman pinyin to katakana *. Furthermore, the English position displayed at the lower position of the mode key 4 2 ( English uppercase letters) mode key If selected, all entered English letters are output in upper case. * If the English small (English lowercase) mode key displayed on the upper position of mode key 4 2 is selected, the entered English letters are printed in lower case. Furthermore, if the numeric mode key displayed at the lower position of the mode key 4 3 is selected, each key 2 1 to 3 5 of the main key area 20 can be set as a number (0 to 9) and an arithmetic symbol and can be input. The upper part of the key 4 3 If the half-angle mode selected for the position is selected, all inputs set to the primary key area 2 0 become half-angle inputs. That is, these mode keys 41 to 43 are used for inputting an English mark or a katakana mark used in an abbreviation of Japanese text or a foreign language. In addition, the specific configuration of each of these arrangements will be described in other embodiments described later. On the other hand, the function key area 50 is provided with Roman pinyin input. The paper size applies the Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 2ί &gt;). 7 mm) --------- ^ .-- (Please read the note on the back first, and then write the domain I) Order -31-I V &quot; · ^ 13779 A7 B7 Employees ’Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumption The cooperative prints five. Description of the invention (29) The five function keys 5 1 ~ 5 5 required for various functions are set. That is, the lower left position of the key 51 is set to the "transformation" key 'key 5 1 which implements the function of changing the hiragana character. The lower right position of the key 5 1 is set to the input blank space. The "space j key" is set to the upper position of the key 51. "Expansion function" keys of various extended functions of each key 2 1 to 3 5 in the main key area 20, and various functions extended by the expansion function keys include, for example, moving the cursor to the position of the head of the article, the end of the article, the beginning of the line, and the end of the line. "Movement function" or various functions often used by word processing machines such as insert, border, move, cut and paste, and print * In addition, the lower position of the key 5 2 is a "no change" key that does not change the function of Hiragana. The upper position is set to the "Cancel" key. In addition, the lower position of the key 5 3 is the "back" key for moving the cursor back (backward), and the upper position is set to the "forward" key of the alternate candidate for displaying homonyms when converting hiragana characters. Further, the lower position of the key 54 is set to the "cut" key * and the upper position is set to the "single-han" key for performing single-kanji conversion. In addition, the lower position of the 'key 5 5' is set to the "change line j key." The upper position is a menu "menu j key *" which displays a menu for switching the English arrangement and the like described later. In addition, the function key 5 1 is more important than the other keys 5 2 to 5 5 are large in terms of width. These mode keys 41 to 43 and function keys 51 to 55 are the same as those of the main keys 2 1 to 35, and are selected and set at the point of touch input and the lever input. Each key 4 1 ~ 4 3, 5 1 ~ 5 5 The mode or function set in the upper or lower part "This paper is also applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ~~:: ~ -32-in · 1 1 · tn ϋ It f ϋ n ϋ 1 ^ —OJ »1 · II &lt; Please read the notes on the back before writing this page) 413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (30) In addition, the lower part of the function key 5 1 is set to "Transformation J and "Space" Two types of functions, which are set as follows: When the input character 尙 is not converted to the undefined state of Chinese characters, when the key 5 is touched, its function is "transform j *, and when it is touched in the determined state, it is Its function is "space" * without changing the input operation to switch between transformation and space. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10, the English-language arrangement of this embodiment is also provided with a pattern area 40 on the left side of the main key area 20. A function key area 50 is provided below the main key area 20. In addition, each of the primary keys 2 1 to 3 5 in the primary key area 20 is the same as the English-language arrangement of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 3. On the other hand, the primary key area 2 is arranged at 40 in the mode key area 40. 0 Switch to the SYM (SYMBOL) key 4 1 of the symbol arrangement. * CAP key 4 2 to switch the input mode between uppercase English character input and lowercase English character input, and switch the main key area 2 0 to the numeric arrangement of NU Μ. Key 4 3. In addition, in the function key area 50, five keys 51 to 55 are set. Among them, key 5 1 is set to the "space" key and "command" key, key 5 2 is set to the "ESC" key, and key 53 is set to "BS" ( Back) key, the key 54 is set to the "DEL" key, and the key 55 is set to the "new line ()" key and the "MENU" key. In addition, the function keys 5 1 and 5 5 for setting two functions are the same as the main keys, and they are distinguished by judging the difference between the touch input operation and the touch input operation. According to the second arrangement with keys as shown in Figure 9 and Figure 10. &lt; Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x297 mm) -33-Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 at _B7_ 五3. Description of the invention (31) In the embodiment, since there is a function key area 5 0 ′ formed by function keys 5 1 to 5 5 which are set to various functions or space keys, etc., it is only necessary to touch the input area in Japanese or English. The various function keys 5 1 to 5 5 can be implemented, which can improve the operability of input. In addition, since a mode key area composed of mode keys 4 1 to 4 3 for switching the arrangement of the main key area 20 is provided, input of numbers or symbols can be performed efficiently. Next, the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Tong state. In this embodiment, in addition to the English letters or periods, commas, and English commas in the key area of each of the primary keys 2 1 to 35 in the primary key field 20, a symbol for number arrangement and a symbol arrangement are respectively arranged. The compound arrangement of the two symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, the same or the same constituent parts as in the first and second embodiments described above * are omitted or abbreviated. As shown in FIG. 11, in the Japanese composite arrangement of this embodiment, the main key area 2 0 each main key 2 1 ~ 3 5 shows the number arrangement and symbol arrangement of each mark · That is, each main key 2 1 ~ 3 5 displays the number arrangement number and arithmetic symbol at the lower left position, as each key 2 1 These 3 ~ 3 5th character codes are used to set these numeric character codes. Specifically, the number keys are displayed in the center three columns of the main key area 20, and the arithmetic symbols are displayed in the left and right columns. That is, at the left of the main keys 21 to 35) The lower position 'starts from the left side of the upper section of the main key area 2 0 and displays "―"' in order from key 2 1 and displays "7" on key 22 and "8" on key 23 ， This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ---------- ^ ------ 1T ------ ^ (Please read the first Please note this page and write this page) -34-Consumer cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du Yinzhuang 413779 A7 ___B7 V. Invention Description (32) "9" is displayed on key 24, "+" is displayed on key 25, and The left side of the middle section starts with "+ j" on key 26, "4j" on key 27, "5" on key 28, "6j" on key 29, and "X" on key 30. "Display on key 31", "1" on key 32, "2" on key 33, "3j" on key 34, and "= j" on key 35. In addition, the lower right position of each main key 2 1 to 3 5 The symbols for displaying the symbol arrangement include various symbols such as parentheses, and the symbol character codes for the symbol arrangement are set as the fourth character codes of the keys 2 1 to 35. Specifically, for each main key 2 1 ～ 3 5 The lower right position, from the left of the upper section of the main key area 2 0, displays the bracket symbol "" in order from the key 21, displays the bracket symbol "jj" on the key 22, and displays the colon ": j" on the key 23. A semicolon ";" is displayed at 24, and a symbol "/" is displayed at key 25. In addition, parentheses "(j, bracket 27" is displayed at key 27) and "and" are displayed at key 28 from the left side of the middle section. "&Amp; j", the percentage symbol "% j" is displayed on the key 2 9 and the asterisk "*" is displayed on the key 30. In addition, the Tic-tac-toe symbol "#" is displayed in sequence from the left side of the lower paragraph, and the modifier symbol "32" is displayed on the key 32. @ ", The English comma", "is displayed on key 33, the English period" ♦ "is displayed on key 34, and the symbol" ~ "is displayed on key 35. In addition, the mode keys 4 1 to 4 3 and function keys 5 1 to 5 5 are the same as the Japanese arrangement of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 9, so descriptions are omitted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, this key Implementation of the English-language complex IT ------ brigade, &lt; Please read the note on the back before writing this page.) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4C (210X297 mm) -35-Printed by A7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs _B7_V. Description of the invention (33) In the combined arrangement, the numbers and arithmetic symbols for the number arrangement are displayed in the lower left position of the primary keys 2 1 to 3 5 in the main key area 20, and the various symbols for the symbol arrangement are displayed in the lower right position Symbol, set the 3rd and 4th character codes for each key 2 1 ~ 3 5. The number arrangement is the same as the Japanese compound arrangement shown in Figure 11 *. That is, "one" is displayed on key 21, and key 22 is displayed. "7" is displayed, "8" is displayed on key 23, "9" is displayed on key 24, "-j" is displayed on key 25, "+" is displayed on key 26, "4" is displayed on key 27, and "4" is displayed on key 28 5j, "6" on key 29, "X" on key 30, "〇j" on key 31, "1" on key 32, "2" on key 33, and "3j" on key 34 The key 35 displays "=". In addition, the symbol arrangement is to replace the symbols used in Japanese with the symbols used in English. * Specifically, starting from the left side of the upper section of the main key area 20, parentheses "w" are displayed sequentially on key 21, and parentheses "" are displayed on key 22. "", The bracket symbol "'" is displayed on the key 23, the dollar symbol "$" is displayed on the key 24, and the symbol "/" is displayed on the key 25. In addition, the bracket symbol "(", Key 27 displays the bracket symbol ")", key 28 displays the and symbol "&amp;", key 29 displays the percentage symbol "%", key 30 displays the asterisk "* j", and displays the key 31 from the left side of the lower paragraph in sequence. Tic-Tac-Toe symbol "#", the modifier symbol "@" is displayed on key 32, the symbol "!" Is displayed on key 33, the question mark "?" Is displayed on key 34, and the symbol "~" is displayed on key 35. This paper size applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 is now (210X297 mm) ---------- ^ ------ 1T ------. ^ (Please read the note f on the back before filling in this Page) -36-413779 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (34) Foreign mode key 4 ~ 4 ~ 5 5 3 and 5 of the second arrangement as shown in FIG. English 10 of the same function key aspect of embodiments thereof will be omitted described. In this embodiment, since four types of characters, symbols, and numbers are set on each of the main keys 21 to 35, four types of touch input operations are respectively used by the pen 15 and the determination means 7 3 I hope to input different characters, symbols and numbers periodically, that is, enter the character codes from 1 to 4. That is, as shown in FIG. 13, the determination means 7 3 detects that you are touching with a pen 1 5 The operation of each key 2 1 to 35 is different. The judgment is to select the left position (A in FIG. 13), right position (B in FIG. 13), and lower left position (No. One of C) in the 13th figure or the lower right position (D in the 13th figure) * At this time, as a different judgment method for judging the touch operation, the method shown in FIG. 14 is also used. The method shown in Fig. 4 is to judge whether each pixel (pixel) included in the display area of each key 2 1 to 3 5 is different from the touch input operation. That is, as shown in Fig. 14 (1) As shown in the display area of each key, a total of 100 pixels 76 in 10 columns and 10 rows are set, and the determination means 7 3 determines that the pen is light. The number of pixels in the display area of each key 2 1 ~ 35 is within the specified number, for example, one pixel in the display area of each key 2 1 ~ 35, or the one pixel and its surroundings Where the pixel 76 (the part shown with a "+" symbol in Figure 14) is touched (when touched with a dot), — In nin ^ I · H 1 ϋ nn ^ I —- ^ {Please read the “^^” on the back of the page before filling in this page) The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X2? 7mm) -37-413779 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Local shellfish consumer cooperatives seal A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (35) It is judged as a touch input, as shown in No. 14 (2), when the four pictures arranged in the same direction are tapped In the case of prime 7 6 (where it is tapped like a horizontal line), it is judged as the input of the lever touch. Furthermore, the judgment means is for the case where four or more pixels 7 6 are tapped from the upper right to the lower left direction as shown in FIG. 14 (3). * It is judged that it is a lever touch to the lower left, as shown in FIG. 14 As shown in (4), when four or more pixels 7 6 are tapped from the upper left to the lower right direction, it is determined that it is a lever touch to the lower right. The text generating means Ϋ 4 is the output key 2 (1 ~ 3 5) when the judgment means 7 3 judges that it is a touch, and the key (the first character code) is output when the judgment means 73 judges that it is a touch. Characters 21 to 35 in the right position (second character code) • If the judgment means 73 determines that the lever is touched to the lower left, the output key 2 1 to 3 5 Characters in the lower left position (third character code) are used in the judgment means 73 When it is judged that the lever is touched to the lower right, the output key 2 1 ~ 3 5 is the character (the fourth character code) at the lower right position. In addition, to distinguish such various lever touches with different directions, just detect the light with the pen 15 The position and time when each pixel 76 is touched can be determined by the tapping direction (moving direction) of the pen 15. However, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to distinguish the three directions of the horizontal, lower left, and lower right lever touches, so it can be distinguished only by the mutual positional relationship of each pixel 76 touched by the pen 15. The advantages of simple processing. According to this embodiment, not only English letters but also numbers or symbols can be set for each of the main keys 2 1 to 35, and only by slightly changing the operation method of inputting these numbers or symbols with a pen, the paper size can be accommodated. Applicable to China Girl Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) &quot; — 一 38 — ----------- Λ ------ IT ------ t (please first阖 Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page again.) Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, India 413779 A7 A7 ______B7_V. Description of the invention (36) Easy selection of 1 key 2 1 ~ 3 5 The first set Enter the fourth character code. Therefore, when inputting numbers or symbols, it is not necessary to set the shift key or touch key to switch the input, which can improve the operability. In particular, in the case of text-based numbers and symbols that appear less frequently in the article, you do not need to switch the mode each time to enter numbers or symbols, so the input operability can be improved. When entering numbers, symbols, etc., you can also touch the mode keys 4 1 to 4 3 at the left end to switch the main key area 20 to numeric or symbol arrangement. In addition, since multiple characters or numbers, symbols, and other information can be set on one key, the number of keys can be reduced compared to the case where a number key or a mark key is provided in addition to the main keys 2 1 to 35. When the key input operation is performed, the moving distance of the pen 15 can also be reduced, and the sizes of the keys 21 to 35 can also be larger, which can improve the operability. Furthermore, the pen touch 15, the right direction lever touch, the lower left lever touch, and the lower right lever 觭 have very different input operations. Therefore, the detection by the determination means 7 3 can be easily performed, and an erroneous operation can be prevented. Instead, type the text. Furthermore, the three rows of numeric keys in the center of the main key area 20 are the same as Pu'er's computer. They are displayed and arranged in the order of 0-9 from the lower side. Therefore, when performing calculation operations, it can be compared with the ordinary Input by the same operation of a computer can improve operability. In addition, the arrangement of the symbols arranged at the lower right of each key 2 1 to 3 5 is in the Japanese compound arrangement shown in FIG. 11 and the English compound arrangement shown in FIG. 12 --- 1 ------ J —---- 1 Order! ----- Reply (please «read the notes on the back ^ | ^ before filling out this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4, see the standard (210X297 mm) -39-Central Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Beige Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 413179 at ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (37) The columns are different, because the arrangement positions are arranged according to the frequency of use when inputting, so the operability of token input can also be improved. Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 15 in this embodiment, a desktop-type on-screen keyboard input device 80 equipped with a main body 81, that is, a display 8 2 is used, and the key input means is a mobile phone 8 displayed on the display 8 2 at the same time. 3, and one of the keys 2 1 to 3 5 for selecting the keys 2 1 to 3 5 displayed on the key-in area 12 of the display 8 is an input method using a mouse 84. In this embodiment, the aforementioned first to first The various keyboard arrangements of the third embodiment can be appropriately applied. The selection method of each character, symbol, number, etc. is a method that can take advantage of the characteristics of the mouse 84. That is, as in the third embodiment, one key is set. When the first to fourth character codes display four types of text information, such as characters, numbers, and symbols, as shown in Figure 16, it is structured such that the perch 83 is combined with the keys 2 1 to 3 5, and the single-press When the left button 8 4A of the mouse 8 4 is pressed (the operation of pressing a button), when the single-press detection is performed by the determination means 73, the character generating means 74 outputs the left position of each key 2 1 to 3 5 (A of FIG. 16 A ) (The first text code), and when you right-click 8 4 B, each key 2 1 is output. ~ 3 5 characters (second character code) at the right position (B in Fig. 16). In addition, when the left mouse button 8 4 A or the right mouse button 8 4 B is held down and the cursor 8 3 is moved to the lower left (drag the lower left) in the area of the keys 2 1 to 3 5 The generating means outputs the text at the lower left position of each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 (C in Fig. 16) (3rd character code). This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ---- ----- ^ ------ 1T ------ 1 ^ (please read the note on the back first, and then again for this page) -40-413779 Shellfish Consumption, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs The cooperative prints A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (38), and if it is dragged to the lower right, the characters (the fourth text code) of the lower right position of each key 2 1 to 35 (D in Fig. 16) are output. In such a Ben-Yin-Shi form, four types of characters, numbers, symbols, etc. can be input with a few changes by mouse input operation, which can improve operability.尙 Moreover, when using the mouse 8 4, the English letters that are used more frequently, that is, the input of the left and right positions of the keys 2 1 to 3 5, just press the keys of the mouse 84A and 84B are sufficient, so the operability is very poor. In addition, in the case where the key arrangement of the first or second embodiment described above is used in this embodiment, the input can be switched by simply pressing the left and right keys 84A and 84B. In addition, when using a mouse with only one button, the operation of single-clicking the right button 8 4 B and entering the text at the right position is replaced by a double-click button (press the button twice at a short interval), or As with the pen input, drag the cursor 8 3 in the horizontal direction. The pen 15 and mouse 84 of the fourth and third embodiments are used to switch the input methods of the four types of characters, numbers, and symbols, as shown in the seventeenth circle. In the first to fourth embodiments described above, when the left and right characters of each of the main keys 21 to 35 are selected, the method of judging by the moving distance of the pen 15 may not be used, and the lighter as shown in the eighteenth circle is used. Touch keys 2 1 to 3 5 can be selected by judging the length of time. · Specifically, the judging means 7 3 is structured as shown in Figure 18 (1 The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS &gt; A4) Specifications (2 丨 0X297mm) I n I .1 n ^ ϋ — [^ II n I ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before writing this page) -41-Staff Consumption Cooperative of the Central Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed 413779 A7 __B7 As shown in the description of the invention (39)), touch (press) the key 2 1 ~ 3 5 with the pen. If the duration is shorter than the set time, judge the key 2 1 ~ 3 The left position of 5 is selected, and as shown in Figure 18 (2), if you touch the key 21 ~ 35 with the pen for a duration longer than the set time, it is determined that the right part of the key 2 1 ~ 3 5 The position is selected. Even if it is judged by such a touch time, it is the same as the previous embodiment, and it is only slightly changed. Two types of operations can be performed at the touch of a button. One of the characters or symbols set at the left and right positions of each key 2 1 to 3 5 can be selected by a very simple operation, which improves the operability. * In addition, if the input device 1 If the user can adjust the touch judgment time according to their own preferences, even if the duration of the operation by each user is different, you can correctly determine which text is entered. In addition, the touch time It is divided into 4 stages, and the four types of characters, numbers, and symbols can be input as in the third embodiment. In addition, different operations from tapping the keys with the pen 15 as shown in Figure 19 can be borrowed. It is determined by the determination means 73 that the tapping pressure is lower than the set pressure ((1) in FIG. 19) or is higher than the set pressure ((19) in FIG. 19), and a text input operation may be selected. , Each area of the keys 21 to 35 can be divided into two left and right areas, or four areas up and down, and then it can be determined which of the divided areas is tapped to select a text input operation method. Outside as a means of tapping | It is also possible not to use the pen-type input means of pen 15, but as shown in Fig. 20, use the fingertip on the screen 9 1 to input the paper. The paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 Specifications (2 丨 0X297mm) I- ------ install -------- order ------ A (please note on the back of the body and fill in this page) -42-Economy Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Ministry of Standards and Technology Bureau 413779 A7 _B7_V. Description of the Invention (40) It is also possible to touch the input area and use the touch-screen input method. In addition, as the touch input means, as a means of recognizing the pen 15 or the touch of a fingertip, various methods such as electrostatic capacitance type, optical plastic, and resistive type can be used depending on the type of screen. * The aforementioned touch input means can also be adapted. These recognition means are appropriately selected. Furthermore, the key input means is not limited to the touch input means operated by the pen 15 or the touch screen, and the aforementioned cursor input means by the mouse 8 4 may also be used. Use >> As this cursor-type entry means *, a tablet-type input means for moving the cursor 98 displayed on the screen 9 7 by touching it with a pen on the tablet as shown in FIG. 21 may also be adopted. Furthermore, a tablet-like product with the same function as the mouse 84 or a tablet-type product operated by tapping between the fingers with a finger or a joystick or joystick of a game console can be moved and displayed on the tablet. Cursors on the screen and various input devices with buttons or functions equivalent to buttons can also be used. At this time, in the case of the cursor-type input means, when three or more keys are provided, it may also be set to change the characters originally input by drag operation to input by key operation. For example, when there are three keys, as in the third embodiment, each key 2 1 to 3 5 is set to 4 types of characters, numbers, and symbols. 1 You can set the keys 2 1 to 3 5 by touching each key. The left, right, and lower left characters, numbers, etc., and drag the bottom right position to enter the mark. • Furthermore, if the controller of a game machine generally has more than 4 keys, it is not used. Drag operation and press each key to input each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 Left, right, bottom left, bottom right This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) (please first (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page) -43-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 A7 _B7_ V. The settings of the characters, numbers, signs, etc. in the description of the invention (41) are also possible. As shown in the figure, if the number of keys can be increased and the text that can be input only by a single operation can be increased, compared with the case where the drag operation is included, the operation can be simpler and the input can be definitely distinguished. At the same time, the judgment means 7 3 In addition, the input determination is easier, and an inexpensive key input device can be provided. Furthermore, in the foregoing embodiments, each key 2 1 to 35 displays two or four types of characters, but it can also be made. Enter 3 types or 5 or more types of characters. In addition, when 5 or more types of characters are displayed, in the case of using a touch input means such as a pen 15 or the like, it is only necessary to determine the moving direction of the pen 15 or the like. For example, in addition to the touch, four directions of up, down, left, and right, or four directions that can be determined, such as upper left, upper right, lower left, and lower right, become five types of input operations, or outside the touch, plus 9 types of input operations are possible: up, down, left, right, top left, top right, bottom left, and bottom right *. Furthermore, when using a percussion input method such as a mouse, a single press of a button, plus a double Press different key operations, or the same as the case of the pen 15. Set the drag direction to the maximum 8 directions of up, down, left, top left, top right, bottom left, and bottom right to achieve more than 5 types of input operations. If more than five types of input operations can be realized, more characters, numbers, symbols, etc. can be set for each key 2 1 to 3 5, which can further improve the operability. This paper size applies to China's national standard # 隼 (CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297 mm) (please read the note ^^ on the back before filling out this page) -44-Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 A7 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (42) In addition, the arrangement and type of the symbols or numbers other than the English letters are not limited to the arrangements and types of the foregoing embodiments, for example, the keys 2 1 to 3 5 in the main key® field 20 Depending on the type of language used, characters or symbols with high frequency of use may be appropriately set. Furthermore, in the third embodiment described above, the number keys are arranged in the three columns in the center, but they may be arranged in the left or right three. Columns are also available. In addition, starting from the previous paragraph, the configuration of 1 ~ 9, 0 is displayed in sequence, and it can also be arranged in numbers such as on a telephone. Especially for portable information terminals, which have built-in telephone functions, this is also available. The telephone arrangement has the advantage of improving the operability of the telephone. In addition, a television game instrument or a data input device for information equipment using a television as a screen can be applied to a television screen when the present invention is applied. The displayed main keys 2 1 to 3 5 show the channel arrangement of the TV channels, and the channel switching operation can also be implemented by the screen display keyboard input device of the present invention. Furthermore, in each of the foregoing embodiments, as the touch main key The input operation of 2 1 to 3 5 sets other operation methods in addition to the input operation of the aforementioned keys, and a configuration in which various functions and the like are performed when performing this operation.

例如，於各主鍵21〜35，可以設定爲在按鍵區域 內以筆或手指輕觸「V字型」，或是以滑鼠等拖移「V字 型」時•將左部位置的英文字母以大寫文字直接輸入，而 以「逆V字型」輕觸或是拖移時，直接输入右部位置的英 文字母的大寫文字的構成亦可V 根據如此之構成，日文文章中所使用的例如「TV， 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I---------------ΤΓ------象 ί請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -45 - 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標隼局負工消费合作社印聚 五、發明説明（43 ) VAN · NTT」等省略語、固有名詞或是英文文章中行 頭或是固有名詞的開頭大寫字母等部份以英文大寫字母輸 入時，可以容易的輸入該文字。 其次，基於圖面資料說明本發明之第5實施形態* 於第2 2圓顯示本實施形態之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝 置1 0 1.。畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 0 1係作爲攜帶資 訊終端機（PDA)用之物，於本體的表面設有液晶畫面 3 ·及按鍵4，即移位鍵5。此外•雖未於第22圖顯示 ，但爲了保護畫面3的部份可以在本體2裝設可以自由開 閉的蓋體。 於液晶畫面，設有在實行文書處理、表計算、通訊錄 、電子郵件、時間表等各種功能時，输入文字，或是顯示 資料之資料顯示區域10·此顯示區域的形式可依被選擇 的功能而適當變更構成。 此外，於顯示區域1 0的下側，配置有選擇選單1 1 ，及按鍵輸入區域1 2。此外*此選擇選單1 1及按鍵输 入區域1 2可以是常時保持於顯示之狀態，通常前述顯示 區域1 0佔掉了整個畫面3而顯示，一旦輕觸畫面上顯示 之選擇選單顯示鍵或按鍵輸入開始鍵等，顯示區域1 0上 的1部份應需要而顯示立刻顯現式（P 〇 P - u ρ )選單 ，顯示區域1 0可以擴大，顯示之資訊量可以增多之點爲 優點· 此畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1 0 1 *如第2 2圖所示 ，附屬作爲按鍵輪入手段之輕觸式输入手段所要用到的筆 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4规格（210x297公釐） (請先《讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -46 - 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 413779 at ______B7__ 五、發明説明（44 ) 1 5 ·因此，本體2上設有保持筆1 5用的保持架，以可 以防止筆15之遺失者爲佳。 而使用畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置1 0 1的場合，以左 手（右手）持有本體2或者是置於桌上，再以右手握著筆 1 5操作即可》 按鍵輸入區域1 2如第2 3圖所示，設有主鍵區域 20，及切換鍵區域40，及功能鍵區域50，及顯示被 輸入的文字的輸入行6 0。 前述選擇選單1 1，具備有將按鍵输入區域1 2的主 鍵區域2 0、切換鍵區域40，功能鍵區域50的設定， 及標準排列用之標準排列選單鍵1 6、切換爲相同的髙速 排列用高速排列選單鍵1 7、QWERTY式英文專用排列用之 英文專用選單鍵1 8、QWERTY式日文專用排列用之曰文專 用選單鍵19。亦即，切換按鍵排列的選單係如第24圖 所示之階層構造所構成的。 於第2 3圚所顯示的標準排列用之排列，於主鍵區域 20配置有上下3段左右5列的1 5個主鍵2 1〜35。 此外，於切換鍵區域4 0配置有3個切換鍵4 1〜4 3 » 進而於功能鍵區域50配置有6個功能鍵5 1〜5 6。亦 即，在主鍵區域20，包含切換鍵41〜43及功能鍵 51〜56總計爲4段6列共配置24個鍵（軟體鍵）。 此標準排列用之前述主鍵區域2 0內之文字鍵的排列 ，係考慮於羅馬拼音輸入時的英文字母的母音及子音的使 用頻率，考慮鍵盤排列的容易記憶性，進而考慮以筆丄5 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) Α4規格Ul〇X297公釐） ---------^------1T------0 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再球寫本頁) -47 - 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央樣準局員工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明（45 ) 輸入的输入效率而配置的•亦即，鍵排列爲使容易記憶， 而將母音與子音的按鍵區域分開配置，進而爲使筆1 5的 移動量減少，只要將基本位置設於主鍵區域2 0的中心部 份即可，所以母音及子音分別依使用頻率的髙低順序以容 易輕觸輸入的順序之由中段、再上段、再下段的順序排列 ，成爲各鍵由中心側向外側排列的構造· 具體而言，主鍵區域2 0之中的一方（在圖示例中爲 左側）的2列的鍵群所構成的區域設定爲母音鍵之母音區 域2 0 A，主鍵區域2 0剩下的3列鍵群所構成的區域設 定爲子音鍵之子音區域2 Ο B。 而於母音區域20A之各鍵2i、22 ' 26，27 、31、32分別配置而顯示了代表母音的「A」、「1 J 、 「U」、「E」、「◦」等母音鍵以及撥音之「人」 而如以下的順序排列· 亦即母音鍵之中的中段鍵2 7、2 6分別設定爲「A 」、「I」，上段鍵22、21分別設定爲「U」、「E 」，而下段鍵32、31分別設定爲「Oj與撥音之「人 J鍵。 藉此，接近主鍵區域2 0的中心位置的中段鍵2 7配 設爲使用頻率很高的「A」鍵，而於其旁邊配置了「I」 鍵，在操作性可以提高的同時，依照中段、上段、下段的 傾序’ 「A」、「I」、「U」、「E」、「〇」各鍵依 序配置之文字更爲容易記億。 另一方面，右側3列的子音區域2 0 B，排列著顯示 (精先聞讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) .裝， 訂 泉 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） -48 - 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印裝 五、發明説明（46 ) 曰 語 子 音 的 厂 K J % 厂 S J 、 广 T j 厂 Ν j 厂 Η J &gt; 厂 Μ J 厂 Υ J 、 厂 R j 厂 W J 之 鍵 0 更 具 體 而 言 » 中 段 鍵 2 8 % 2 9、 3 0 由 左 側 開 始 依 序 由 左 側 開 始 依 序 爲 Γ Κ j 厂 S j ' 厂 T j 之 鍵 此 外 9 上 段 鍵 2 3 2 4 2 5 由 左 側 開始 依 序 爲 厂 N J 厂 Η j 、 Γ Μ j 之鍵 » 進 而 下 段 鍵 3 3、 3 4 3 5 由 左 側 開 始 依 序 爲 厂 Υ j 、 厂 R j Γ W 」之 鍵 〇 而 * 這 些 排 列 係 考 Μ 到 依 照 Γ j 行 厂 J 行 、 厂 tz J 行 厂 J 行 &gt; 厂 it J 行 厂 t j 行 厂 」行 s 厂 J 行 厂 t) J 行 的 子 音 依 力 夕 的 順 序 而 由 中 段、 上 段 下 段 進 而 由 各 段 之 左 側 向 右 側 排 列 0 此 外 ί 此 子音 的 排 列 也 興 母 音 的 排 列 相 同 9 係 考慮 依 輸 入 的 容 易 順 序_， 維 馬 拼音使 用 的 頻 率 順 序 以 及 鍵 盤 排 列 的 易 記 幸 而 設 定的 φ 以 上 各文 字， 係 作 爲 各鍵 2 1 3 5 的 第 1 文 字 碼 而 設 定 的 P 此 外 » 前述子音在移位狀態 ( 藉 由 後述 之移位 输 入 手 段 7 1 而 將 前 述主 鍵 區 域 2 0 的 各鍵 置 於移 位 操作 的 狀 態 而 設 定 第 2 文 字碼 ) » 分 別 分 配 著 逗 點 厂 ， J 句 點 厂 J t 長 音 Γ — J * 促 音 厂 Ο J 以 及 與 母 音 組合 而 構 成 半 濁 音 的 厂 P j 「Β j 、 厂 G J 、 厂 Z j 厂 D J 0 具 體 而 言 上段 之 厂 N j 、 厂 Η j 厂 Μ j 所 對 應 之 鍵 2 3 、 2 4 、 2 5 被 配 列 厂 P J ' 厂 Β J 、 厂 〇 J i 中 段 的 Γ K j Γ S」 厂 T j 所- 對應 的 鍵 2 8 2 9 3 0 本紙張尺度適用中固國家標準（CMS &gt; A4说格（2】0X297公釐） ί I i I Hi I n ^ {請先閲讀背面之注意事項再蜞寫本頁) -49 - 413779 經 濟 部 央 揉 準 局 貝 工 消 费 合 作 社 印 裝 A7 B7 五、 發明説明（f) 1 | 被 配 列 厂 G」' 厂 Z J ' 厂 D J ，而 下 段 的「 Υ J . 厂 R 1 1 J &gt; 厂 W 」所對 rrfaf 應 的 鍵3 3 « 3 4、 3 5 被配 列 著 逗點 Γ 1 1 9 J % 句 點「。 J » 長音 厂 — J 1 ί 請 1 1 另 —* 方面， 於 切換鍵 區 域 4 0的 3 個 鍵4 1 4 2 先 閲 1 I 4 3 * 設 定爲將 主 鍵 鹿域 2 0 的 各鍵 ♦ 由 第2 3 圖 所示 之 讀 背 1 f t 標举排 列 分別切換 爲 第2 5 圖 第2 7 圖 所示 之 英 文排 列 之 注 意 I 1 I 、 數 字 排列、記 號 排 列之 切 jjte, Aril· 換鍵 •亦 即 1 以筆 1 5 輕觸 英 事 項 再 1 1 文 切 換 鍵 (「英 大 J )4 2 時 * 切換 爲 如 第2 5 圖 所示 之 壎 寫 本 1 裝 英 文 大 寫 字母· 輕觸 數字 切換 鍵 (Γ 數字 j ) 4 3 時， 切 頁 1 1 換 爲 如 第 2 6圖 所 示 之數字 输 入 用之數字 排列 t 輕觸記 號 ί 1 切 換 鍵 ( 「記號 J ) 4 1 時 * 切 換爲 如 第 2 7 圖 所 示之記 1 j 號 輪 入 用 之記號 排 列 而構 成 » 亦即， 切 換 鍵排 列 之 選單 如 訂 I 第 2 4 圚 所示| 選 擇 選單 1 1 之標準 排 列 選單 之 下 ，係 酝 1 1 Ι 置 成 標 準 排列選 單 及由 標 準 排列藉 由 輕觭各切 換 鍵4 1 1 1 I 4 3 而 切換至 各 排列選單 之 階 層構 造 所構成 〇 1 1 線 1 此 外 ，於各英 文 排列 數 字 排列 、 記 號排列 輸入 的 文 字 % 數 字、記 號 基 本上 是 以 全 角（ 2 位 元字 幅 ) 顯示 t i 1 而 於 半 角 (1位 元 字 幅） 输 入 爲 基本 的 塲 合， 各 Art% 鍵 4 1 1 I 4 3 使 用 移位輸 入 手 段而 在移 位 的狀 態 ( 「半 J ) 下輕 觸 \ 1 I 即 可 此 處「半 J 角 係位 於 記 號 、英 文 \ 數字 之 各鍵4 1 1 ί t 4 3 的 移位位 置 所以 具 有 半 角输 入 的 操作 性 很 好的 優 I 1 點 e 1 1 此 外 ，於功 能 鍵 5 0 的 各 鍵 5 1 5 6， 設 定有羅 馬 1 1 拼 音 输 入 時所必 要 的 各種 功能 0 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公嫠） -50 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 413779 A7 _B7__五、發明説明（48 ) 亦即，鍵5 1被設定爲實行平假名漢字變換的機能的 「變換」鍵，而鍵5 2被設定爲在平假名漢字之間不進行 變換之「無變j鍵*此外鍵5 3設定爲輸入空格的「空格 」鍵*鍵54設定爲「改行」鍵，鍵55設定爲將输入行 6 0所被確定的文字列送至顯示區域1 0之「實行」鍵， 鍵5 6設定爲退後顯示於输入行6 0的游標（向前退回） 之「後退」鍵。 進而|於各鍵5 1〜5 6的移位狀態，分別設定於平 假名漢字變換時顯示表列之同音異義語的前候補之「前候 」鍵，進行片假名變換的「片假名」鍵，變換爲半角的「 半角」鍵，將英文字母變換微小寫字母的「小寫」鍵，將 輸入或變換操作取消之「取消」鍵及「削除j鍵。 其次說明於第2 5圖顯示英文排列之主鍵區域2 0、 切換鍵區域40、功能鍵區域50的鍵排列· 於主鍵蓝域2 0 *英文排列也與標準排列相同，左側 兩列之母音區域2 0A之中段鍵2 7、2 6分別設定爲「 八」、「1」，上段鍵22、21分別設定爲「11」、「 E」，而下段鍵32、31分別設定爲「0」、「X」鍵 作爲第1文字碼而被設定。 此外於子音區域2 0 B，在非移位狀態（作爲第1文 字碼），中段鍵28、29、30由左側開始依序由左側 開始依序爲「K」、「S」、「T」之鍵，此外，上段鍵 23、24、25由左側開始依序爲「NJ、「HJ、「 Μ」之鍵，進而下段鍵33、_ 34、35由左側開始依序 本錄;^適用中固國家標準（cNS)A4_(肅歸釐… ----------^------^------求 (請先閲讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央榇率局貝工消费合作社印裂 413779 A7 _______B7_ 五、發明説明（49 ) 爲「 Y」、「Rj 、 「Wj之鍵· 另一方面，前述主鍵區域2 0的各鍵在移位狀態（作 爲第2文字碼），上段由左側開始依序爲將鍵21設定爲For example, for each of the main keys 21 to 35, you can set to touch the "V" with a pen or finger in the key area, or drag the "V" with a mouse or the like. Input directly in uppercase text, and when you touch or drag with "Reverse V", you can also directly input the uppercase text of the English letter at the right position. V Based on this structure, for example, the Japanese text used for example "TV, this paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I --------------- ΤΓ ———— Please lt first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page) -45-413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, V. Invention Description (43) VAN · NTT, etc. When you enter capital letters such as a capital letter at the beginning of a line or a proper noun, you can easily enter the text. Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawing data. The screen display keyboard input device 1 of this embodiment is displayed on the 22nd circle. The screen display keyboard input device 101 is used as a portable information terminal (PDA). A liquid crystal screen 3 and keys 4 on the surface of the body are provided, that is, shift keys 5. In addition, although it is not shown in Figure 22, a cover that can be opened and closed freely can be installed on the main body 2 to protect the part of the screen 3. On the LCD screen, there is a data display area for entering text or displaying data when implementing various functions such as word processing, table calculation, address book, e-mail, timetable, etc. 10 · The form of this display area can be selected according to the selected The function is appropriately changed. In addition, a selection menu 1 1 and a key input area 12 are arranged below the display area 10. In addition * The selection menu 1 1 and the key input area 12 can always be displayed. Usually, the aforementioned display area 10 takes up the entire screen 3 and is displayed. Once you touch the selection menu display key or button displayed on the screen Enter the start key, etc., a part of the display area 10 is displayed as needed (P 〇P-u ρ) menu, the display area 10 can be enlarged, and the amount of information displayed can be increased. On-screen keyboard input device 1 0 1 * As shown in Figure 22, the paper size of the pen to be used as the touch input method as a key rotation method is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x297) (Mm) (Please read the “Notes on the reverse side before filling out this page”) -46-Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 at ______B7__ V. Invention Description (44) 1 5 A holder for holding the pen 15 is preferable to prevent the pen 15 from being lost. When using the on-screen keyboard input device 1 01, hold the main body 2 with the left hand (right hand) or place it on the table, and then hold the pen 1 5 with the right hand to operate. The key input area 1 2 is the second 2 3 As shown in the figure, a main key area 20, a switch key area 40, a function key area 50, and an input line 60 for displaying an inputted character are provided. The aforementioned selection menu 11 includes the setting of the main key area 20 of the key input area 12, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50, and the standard arrangement menu key 16 for standard arrangement. High-speed arranging menu key 1 for arrangement 7. English-specific menu key 1 for QWERTY-style English-specific arrangement 8. Japanese-specific menu key 19 for QWERTY-style Japanese-specific arrangement. That is, the menu for switching the key arrangement is constituted by a hierarchical structure as shown in FIG. In the standard arrangement shown in the second and third digits, 15 primary keys 2 1 to 35 are arranged in the primary key area 20 in three columns of five columns. In addition, three switch keys 4 1 to 4 3 are arranged in the switch key area 40 »and six function keys 5 1 to 56 are arranged in the function key area 50. In other words, in the main key area 20, a total of 24 keys (software keys) are arranged in 4 segments and 6 columns, including switching keys 41 to 43 and function keys 51 to 56. The arrangement of the text keys in the aforementioned main key area 20 used in this standard arrangement is based on the frequency of use of the vowels and consonants of English letters when inputting Roman pinyin, and the ease of memorization of the keyboard arrangement, and then the pen 5 Paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification Ul XX297 mm) --------- ^ ------ 1T ------ 0 (Please read the precautions on the back first Write this page again) -47-413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Consumer Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Employee Consumer Cooperatives 5. Disclosure of Inventions (45) Input efficiency is configured by the input • That is, the keys are arranged to make it easy to remember, and The vowel and consonant key areas are arranged separately. In order to reduce the amount of movement of the pen 15, the basic position can be set at the center of the main key area 20. Therefore, the vowels and consonants are divided according to the order of the use frequency. It is easy to touch the order of input from the middle section, then the upper section, and then the lower section, so that the keys are arranged from the center side to the outside. Specifically, one of the main key areas 20 (in the example shown in the figure) (Left) 2 columns of key groups Field is set to the vowel of the vowel key area 2 0 A, region of the main key area 20 remaining three key group composed of a consonant set to the consonant key area of 2 Ο B. The keys 2i, 22 '26, 27, 31, and 32 in the vowel area 20A are respectively arranged to display the vowel keys such as "A", "1 J," U "," E "," ◦ "and Dial the "people" and arrange them in the following order: That is, the middle keys 2 7 and 2 6 of the vowel keys are set to "A" and "I", and the upper keys 22 and 21 are set to "U" and " E ", and the lower keys 32 and 31 are respectively set to" Oj and dialed "person J keys." Thus, the middle key 2 7 near the center position of the main key area 20 is configured as the "A" key with high frequency of use. , And the "I" key is arranged next to it, while the operability can be improved, in accordance with the order of the middle, upper, and lower stages' "A", "I", "U", "E", "〇" It is easier to memorize billions of words with keys arranged sequentially. On the other hand, the consonant area 2 0 B on the right 3 columns is lined up (precisely read the note on the back and then fill in this page). The size of the paper is applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210X297mm) -48-413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (46) The accented factories are KJ% Factory SJ, Guangzhou T j Factory N j Factory Η J &gt; Factory M J Factory Υ J, Factory R j Factory WJ Key 0 More specifically »Middle key 2 8% 2 9, 3 0 Starting from the left in order, starting from the left in order Γ κ j Factory S j 'Factory T j Key 9 In addition, the upper key 2 3 2 4 2 5 from the left is the key of the factory NJ factory Η j, Γ Μ j »and the lower key 3 3, 3 4 3 5 is the factory Υ j and the factory from the left. R j Γ W ", and * these arrangements are from M to J according to Γ j, factory tz J, factory J, &gt; factory it J, factory tj, factory s, factory J, factory t) Consonants of line J The sequence is arranged from the middle section, the upper section to the lower section, and then from the left to the right of each section. In addition, the arrangement of this consonant is also the same as the arrangement of the vowels. 9 Consider the easy order of input, the frequency order used by Weimar Pinyin, and the keyboard arrangement. It is easy to remember that each character above φ is set as the first character code of each key 2 1 3 5 P In addition »The aforementioned consonant is in a shifted state (the aforementioned primary key is shifted by the shift input means 7 1 described later) Each key in area 2 0 is placed in the state of shift operation to set the second text code.) »A comma factory, J period factory J t long sound Γ — J * accent factory 0 J and a combination with the vowel to form a semi-voiced sound. The factory Pj, Bj, factory GJ, factory Zj, factory DJ 0 Specifically, the corresponding keys 2 3, 2 4 and 2 5 of the upper factory N j and factory Η j factory M j PJ 'Factory B J, Factory 〇J i Γ K j Γ S ”Factory T j-Corresponding key 2 8 2 9 3 0 This paper size applies to the national solid standard (CMS &gt; A4 said grid (2) 0X297 mm) ί I i I Hi I n ^ {Please read the notes on the back before writing this page) -49-413779 Printed A7 B7 printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (f ) 1 | The factory G "'Factory ZJ' Factory DJ is arranged, and the" 段 J. Factory R 1 1 J &gt; Factory W "key to the rrfaf 3 3« 3 4, 3 5 Point Γ 1 1 9 J% period ". J »Changyin Factory—J 1 ί Please 1 1 Another— * In terms of switching the 3 keys in the key area 4 0 4 1 4 2 Read 1 I 4 3 * Set the keys of the main key deer field 2 0 ♦ from The reading arrangement of the 1 ft mark shown in Figure 2 3 is switched to the English arrangement shown in Figure 2 5 and Figure 2 7. Note I 1 I, number arrangement, symbol arrangement, jjte, Aril · Change key • That is, 1 touch the English matter with a pen 1 5 and then the 1 1 text switch key ("English University J") 4 2 * switch to the copybook as shown in Figure 2 5 1 install English capital letters · touch the number switch key (Γ number j) 4 3 When the cut page 1 1 is changed to the number arrangement for digital input as shown in Figure 2 6 t Touch the mark ί 1 switch key ("Mark J" 4 1) * Switch to 2 7 The mark shown in Figure 1 is used for the arrangement of the rounds of the j. »That is, the menu of the switch key arrangement is as shown in Order I No. 2 4 | | Select the menu 1 1 under the standard arrangement menu. 1 1 Ι Sets the standard arrangement menu and the hierarchical structure composed of the standard arrangement by tapping each switch key 4 1 1 1 I 4 3 to switch to each arrangement menu. 0 1 1 Line 1 In addition, the numbers are arranged in English The text entered by the sign is arranged in%. The numbers and signs are basically displayed as ti 1 in full-width (2-byte characters) and half-width (1-byte characters) as the basic combination. Each Art% key 4 1 1 I 4 3 Use the shift input method and touch \ 1 I in the shifted state ("half J"). "The half J angle is located on the key of the sign, English \ number 4 1 1 ί t 4 3 Shift position so it has good operability with half-angle input. I 1 point e 1 1 In addition, each key 5 1 5 6 of function key 5 0 is set with various functions necessary for Pinyin input 0 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 cm) -50-Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Bureau of the Associate Bureau 413779 A7 _B7__ V. Description of the Invention (48) That is, the key 51 is set as a "transformation" key for performing the function of converting hiragana and kanji, and the key 5 2 is set in hiragana Chinese character "No change j key * Other key 5 3 is set to enter the space" space "key * key 54 is set to" new line "key, key 55 is set to enter the character determined by line 6 0 The "execute" key is sent to the display area 10, and the key 56 is set to the "back" key of the cursor (backward) displayed on the input line 60. Furthermore, in the shifted state of each of the keys 5 1 to 56, respectively, it is set to the "pre-waiting" key that displays the pre-alternatives of the homonyms of the list when the hiragana character is converted, and the "katakana" key that performs katakana conversion , "Half-width" key for half-width, "Lower-case" key for converting small letters into English letters, "Cancel" key and "Erase j" key for canceling input or conversion operation. Next, the English arrangement is shown in Figures 2-5. The key arrangement of the main key area 2 0, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50 is in the main key blue area 2 0 * The English arrangement is also the same as the standard arrangement. The vowel area 2 on the left two columns is the middle key 2 0, 2 6 Set to "eight" and "1", the upper keys 22 and 21 are set to "11" and "E", and the lower keys 32 and 31 are set to "0" and "X" as the first text code. set as. In addition, in the consonant region 2 0 B, in the non-shifted state (as the first text code), the middle keys 28, 29, 30 are sequentially from the left to "K", "S", and "T". In addition, the upper paragraph keys 23, 24, and 25 are in the order of "NJ," HJ, "M" from the left, and the lower paragraph keys 33, _ 34, and 35 are listed in this order from the left; Solid National Standard (cNS) A4_ (Su Guili ... ---------- ^ ------ ^ ------ Please ask (Please read the note f on the back before filling this page ) Printed by the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, 413779 A7 _______B7_ V. The description of the invention (49) is "Y", "Rj," "Wj key." On the other hand, the keys in the aforementioned main key area 20 are moving. Bit status (as the second text code), the upper paragraph starts from the left and sets the key 21 to

連字號「一」，鍵22設定爲「’」*鍵23設定爲「F 」，鍵24設定爲「B」，鍵25設定爲「L」，同時， 中段由左側開始依序將鍵26設定爲「·」，鍵27設定 爲「，」，鍵28設定爲「G」，鍵29設定爲「Z」， 鍵30設定爲「D」，進而，下段由左側開始依序將鍵 31設定爲「J」，鍵32設定爲「Q」，鍵33設定爲 「F」，鍵34設定爲「V」，鍵35設定爲「C」》 另一方面，切換鍵區域40的3個鍵41、42， 4 3係與標準排列相同，分別設爲記號切換鍵4 1、英文 切換鍵42、數字切換鍵43 » 此外，於功能鍵區域50，有5個鍵51、53〜 56被設定•其中鍵54、55、56係與前述標準排列 的鍵5 4〜5 6相同•另一方面，鍵5 1設定爲回到標準 排列之「解除」鍵，鍵5 3僅設定爲「空格」鍵* 其次，說明第2 6圓所示之數字排列之主鍵區域2 0 、切換鍵區域4 0、功能鍵區域5 0的鍵排列。 主鍵區域2 0左側3列係設定爲數字鍵’右側2列係 設定爲算術記號鍵。具體而言，作爲第1文字碼’前述主 鍵區域2 0的上段由左側開始依序爲將鍵2 1設定爲數字 「7」，鍵22設定爲數字「8」，鍵23設定爲數字「 9j ，鍵24設定爲記號「X」，鍵25設定爲記號「+ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS &gt; A4規格（210X297公釐&gt; _ 52 - ~ I I I —i 線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 413779 經濟部中央標率扃貝工消費合作社印製 A7 ___B7_五、發明説明（5〇 ) 」，同時*中段由左側開始依序將鍵26設定爲數字「4 j ，鍵27設定爲數字「5j ，鍵28設定爲數字「6j ，鍵29設定爲記號「+」，鍵30設定爲記號「一j · 進而•下段由左側開始依序將鍵31設定爲數字「1」， 鍵32設定爲數字「2」，鍵33設定爲數字「3」，鍵 34設定爲記號「.」，鍵35設定爲記號「=」。 進而於鍵24、25、29、30、34、35等在 移位的狀態（第2文字碼）分別設定爲記號「％」，記號 「/」，記號「：」，記號「；」，記號「，」，記號「 〜」等。 另一方面，切換鍵區域40的3個鍵41、42、 4 3係與標準排列相同，分別設爲記號切換鍵4 1、英文 切換鍵4 2、數_字切換鍵4 3 · 此外，於功能鍵區域50，有5個鍵51、53〜 56被設定。其中鍵55、56係與前述標準排列、英文 排列相同*另一方面，鍵5 1與英文排列相同設定爲回到 標準排列之「解除j鍵，鍵5 3於非移位狀態下被設定爲 數字「0」•在移位狀態下被設定爲「空格j鍵。此外， 鍵54僅被設定爲「改行」。 其次*說明第2 7圖所示之數字排列之主鍵區域2 0 、切換鍵區域4 0、功能鍵區域5 0的鍵排列。 主鍵區域2 0左側2列係設定爲括弧記號，右側3列 設定爲各種記號鍵*具體而言，作爲第1文字碼|前述主 鍵區域2 0的上段由左側開始依序爲將鍵2 1設定爲括弧 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4规格（210Χ297公釐）_ 53 I n n n I n n n f I n n I ^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明（51 ) 記號「 “」，鍵22設定爲括弧記號「” j ，鍵23設定 爲星號「*」，鍵24設定爲記號「#」，鍵25設定爲 and記號「&amp;」，此外，中段由左側開始依序將鍵26 設定爲括弧記號「「」，鍵27設定爲括弧記號「」」， 鍵28設定爲點「.j ，鍵29設定爲冒號「：」，鍵 30設定爲分號「；」，進而，下段由左側開始依序將鍵 31設定爲括弧記號「（」，鍵32設定爲括弧記號「） j ，鍵33設定爲問號「？j ，鍵34設定爲記號「！j ，鍵3 5設定爲記號「/」· 另一方面，前述主鍵區域2 0的各鍵在移位狀態（第 2文字碼）*上段由左側開始依序爲將鍵21設定爲括弧 記號「 ‘」，鍵22設定爲括弧記號」，鍵23設定 爲修飾記號「@」，鍵24設定爲右箭頭記號「―」•鍵 25設定爲左箭頭記號「—j ，此外，中段由左側開始依 序將鍵26設定爲括弧記號「&lt;」，鍵27設定爲括弧記 號「&gt; j ，鍵28設定爲點記號「__」，鍵29設定爲點 記號「…」，鍵30設定爲記號「〜j ，進而，下段由左 側開始依序將鍵3 1設定爲括弧記號「〔」*鍵3 2設定 爲括弧記號「〕」，鍵33設定爲美元記號「$」，鍵 34設定爲日元記號「¥」，鍵35設定爲修飾記號「§ j β 另一方面，切換鍵區域40的3個鍵41 、42， 4 3係與標準排列相同，分別設爲記號切換鍵4 1 、英文 切換鍵42、數字切換鍵43。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家橾率（CNS ) Ad規格（210Χ297公釐) 7&quot; -54 - ---------#------ir------β (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再¾寫本頁) 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印装 五、發明説明（52) 此外，於功能鍵區域50，有5個鍵5 1、53〜 56被設定。其中鍵51、54〜56係與前述數字排列 相同。另一方面，鍵5 3在其處於移位狀態下各主鍵2 1 〜3 5或是適當的立刻顯現式選單區域顯示各種的圖案記 號之「圚案記號」鍵，鍵5 3於非移位狀態下被設定爲顯 示被顯示的圖案記號的下個候補的「次候補」鍵· 其次·說明第2 8圖所示之以選擇選單1 7切換之髙 速排列之主鍵區域2 0、切換鍵區域4 0、功能鍵區域 5 0的鍵排列•此高速排列，與第2 3圖所示之標準排列 幾乎完全相同，一部分的鍵被設定爲高速输入用* 具體而言，母音蓝域20A之各鍵2 1、22、26 、27、3 1、32與標準排列相同作爲第1文字碼而設 定爲「A」、Γ..Ι」、「U」、「E」、「0」、「A/j 之各鍵，而在這些鍵的移位狀態（第2文字碼），設定爲 供高速輸入之二重母音「AI」、「UI」、「UU」、 「El」、「OU」、「YUUj之鍵。亦即，母音鍵之 中的中段鍵27、26在移位的狀態係設定爲「AI」， 「III」，中段鍵22、21在移位的吠態係設定爲「 UU」、「EI」，下段鍵32、31在移位的狀態係設 定爲「OU」、「YUU」· 另一方面，右側3列的子音區域2 0 B，與標準排列 相同顯示日語子音「K」、「S」、「T」、「N」，「 Η」、「Μ」、「Y」、「R」、「W」的各子音鍵作爲 第1文字碼而被排列。更具體而言，中段鍵2 8、2 9、 ^^^1 .^n {請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ,π -泉 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) Α4规格（210X297公釐） -55 - 413779 經濟部中央橾隼局員工消费合作社印製 A7 _B7_五、發明説明（53 ) 30由左側開始依序爲「K」、「S」、「T」，另外’ 上段鍵23、24、25由左側開始依序爲「Ν」、「Η 」、「Μ」，進而，下段鍵33、34、35由左側開始 依序爲「Yj ， 「R」、· 此外，前述子音鍵的移位狀態（第2文字碼）’上段 的所對應的「1^」、「11」、「]\4_)鍵23、24、25 被配列爲「Pj 、 「Bj 、 「。」，中段的所對應的「K J 、「S J 、「Tj 鍵 28、29、30 被配列爲「G」 、「Z」、「Dj ·下段的所對應的「Yj 、「R」，「 评」鍵33、34、35被配列爲逗點「、」、句點「* 」、長音Γ 一」。 進而，鍵33、34於移位的狀態，在第2移位的狀 態（第3文字碼.）分別設定爲「F」、「V」。 另一方面，切換鍵區域40的3個鍵41、42、 4 3通常係與標準排列相同，分別設爲記號切換鍵4 1、 英文切換鍵4 2、數字切換鍵4 3。但在輕觸主鍵區域 20的任一鍵時，如第28圖所示，鍵41 ，42、43 分別作爲第1文字碼而分別設定爲「〇」、「&lt;」、「〇 」，這些鍵41 、42、43的各移位狀態（第2文字碼 )分別設定爲「右」、 「$」、「YOU」而構成。亦即 ，於高速排列，切換鍵4 1〜4 3亦可以作爲副鍵而起作 用· 此外，功能鍵區域5 0設定了與標準排列相同功能的 6個鍵51〜56·如此之髙速排列，特別是二重母音「 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） ~~ 一 56 - (請先W讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 413779 B7 五、發明説明（54〉 A I j 、「UIj 、「UU」、「EIj 、「OUj 、「 YUUj 、 「YOU」與「Λ/·#· 〈•右.〇·。」可 以經由一次的輕觸而實現高速輸入# 亦即，這些二重母音、拗音「&gt;1·#·&lt; ·右·。· 〇」在日文中特別是在音讀漢字中出現的頻率很高，所以 通常需要輕觸兩三次才能輸入的文字可以用1次的輕觸输 入，輕觸數可以減少而提髙輸入的效率》此輕觸數與從前 的5 0音排列之輸入以及QWERTY排列方式之羅馬拼音輸入 相比較之例顯示於第1表。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再域寫本頁) -uti 第1表筆输入之輕觸數比較 語例 5 0音排列 QWERTY排列 高速排列 経済 5 KEIZAI 6 KE1ZAI 4 流通 6 RYUUTUU 7 RYUUTUU 4 情報 1/濁小上·5 Ιϋ 7 J0UII0U 6 ZY0UII0U 4 出版 L小吵小濁濁九 9 SYUPPANN 8 S YUoPAA, 7 実力 1/濁o D小上&lt; 7 JITURYOKU 9 ZI^RY〇l 7 ^•α Γ 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 注：「5 0音排列」的「濁」爲濁音鍵，「小」顯示小寫 文字的移位。 _此第1表可知，使用第2 8圓的高速排列’因爲可 以用1次的輕觸就输入二重母音或是拗音’所以與平假名 输入或是羅馬拼音输入相比，輕觸數（第1表之各數字） 較小，特別是音讀語多的文章，其效果更加顯著。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐）_ 57 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印裂 五、發明説明（55 ) 此外，前述高速排列，文字的流向是設計成由右向左 依序移動。亦即，右側的子音的下一個接著母音輕觸二重 母音，母音之後進而輕觸左側的第2音節的「人· #· &lt; •芍··^·^」，可以減少手的無效動作，提高操作性。 這是著眼於在2音節的音讀和自在第2音節爲母音以外的 場合，爲「A/·含·&lt; *^·ό·ό」之任一，亦即第1 音節（子音+母音）之後输入「人•爹· &lt; •芍·。·。 」的可能性很髙之日文的特性而來的，在输入曰文是特別 有效果。 含有這些文字的漢字有以下數例。 1 )第2音節爲「彳」的漢字的例子（二重母音的「 AI.UI.EI」之任一之例） •開催（KAI SAI ) •内外（ΝΑ1 GAI ) * 会計（ΚΑΙ ΚΕΙ) .類推（RU1 SUI) •推定（SUI ΤΕΙ) •累計（RUI ΚΕΙ&gt; 2 )第2音節爲「0」的漢字的例子（二重母音的「 UU . 0U」之任一之例）以及含有「YUU . YOU」 的漢字的例子 •方法（HOU H0U) .構造（KOU Z0U) •工場（K0U ΖΥΟϋ) •東京（TOU KY0U) •通風（TUU FUU) •中央（TYUU 0U ) 3 )第2音節爲「&gt;」的漢字的例子 •安全（ΑΑ ΖΕΛ/) •簡単（ΚΑΛν ΤΑΛ·/) .混沌（Κ0九TO九） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再埃寫本炅) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼（CNS &gt; A4規格（210X297公釐） -58 - 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印笨 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（56 ) 4 ) 第 2音節爲 r牛·夕」 ,的漢字 :的例 子 辟 易 (HE # E吞） .的 確 (TE ΚΑ &lt; ) _ 画 策 (KA &lt; SA &lt; ) • g 的 (M0 &lt; ΤΕ含） * 宿 敵 (SYU &lt; TE # ) .即 席 (SO &lt; SE § 5 ) 第 2音節爲 Γ 乎·、）. -'y j 的 f漢字 的 例子 • 1 B (1¾ Nit.) .吉 曰 (ΚΙ % Ζ I ◦) • 質 実 (SIo ZI〇) .切 実 (SE ◦ Ζ I 〇 ) • 1 曰 (1¾ NI ) .活 発 (KA 〇 ΡΑ9 ) • 実 質 (Z I 〇 SI o ) •出 発 (SYUo P A 〇 其 次 * i 說明第2 9圖所示之以選擇 ί選單 1 8切換 QWERTY式英文專用排列之主鍵區域20、切換鍵蓖域40 、功能鍵區域5 0的鍵排列。此QWERTY式英文專用排列 係爲了便利習慣從前的QWERTY式英文排列的鍵盤的人而在 輸入英文時容易使用，與前述第1實施形態各鍵2 1〜 3 5的鍵區域係分爲左右鍵，而本實施例在於上下顯示之 點相異· 於QWERTY式英文專用排列，作爲第1文字碼，主鍵匾 域20的上段由左側開始依序爲將鍵21設定爲「Y」* 鍵22設定爲「U」，鍵23設定爲「I」，鍵24設定 爲「0」，鍵25設定爲「P」，中段由左側開始依序將 鍵26設定爲「H」，鍵27設定爲「J」，鍵28設定 爲「K」，鍵29設定爲「L」，鍵30設定爲分號「； 」|下段由左側開始依序將鍵31設定爲「N」，鍵3 2 設定爲「M」，鍵33設定爲「，」，鍵34設定爲「. 本紙張尺度逍用中囷國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X2?7公釐） ---------^------ir------^ (請先W讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) -59 — 413779 A7 ____B7_ 五、發明説明（57 ) j ，鍵35設定爲記號「/」。 進而*各主鍵在移位狀態（第2文字碼），上段由左 側開始依序爲將鍵21設定爲「Qj ，鍵22設定爲「W 」，鍵23設定爲「E」，鍵24設定爲「R」，鍵25 設定爲「T」，中段由左側開始依序將鍵26設定爲「A 」，鍵27設定爲「S」，鍵28設定爲「D」，鍵29 設定爲「F」，鍵30設定爲「G」，下段由左側開始依 序將鍵3 1設定爲「Z」，鍵32設定爲「X〕」，鍵 33設定爲「C」，鍵34設定爲「V」，鍵35設定爲 「B」。 另一方面，於切換鍵區域4 0，設有鍵排列切換爲如 第27圖之記號排列的SYM (SYMBOL)鍵41 ' 輸入模式於大寫文字與小寫文字之間切換之C A P鍵4 2 、將鍵排列切換爲如第2 6圖之數字排列用之NUM鍵 4 3。 此外，於功能鍵區域50，有4個鍵53〜56被設 定。其中，鍵53係設定爲輸入空格用之「空格」鍵，鍵 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 5 4係設定爲「改行」鍵，鍵5 5係設定爲輸入空格用之 「DEL」（削除）鍵，鍵56係設定爲「BS」（後退 )鍵。 其次，說明第3 0圖所示之以選擇選單1 9切換之 QWERTY式日文專用排列之主鍵區域2 0、切換鍵區域4 0 、功能鍵區域5 0的鍵排列。此QWERTY式日文專用排列係 爲了便利習慣以從前的QWERTY式日文排列的鍵盤的人而在 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） ' -60 - 413779 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央橾準局貝工消費合作社印笨 五、發明説明（58 ) 輸入日文時容易使用而設定的* 此QWERTY式日文用排列，在基於QWERTY排列上與第 29圖所示的英文専用排列幾乎完全相同· 亦即，作爲各主鍵的第1文字碼，主鍵區域2 0的上 段由左側開始依序爲將鍵21設定爲「Y」*鍵22設定 爲「II」，鍵23設定爲「1」，鍵24設定爲「0」· 鍵25設定爲「Pj ·中段由左側開始依序將鍵26設定 爲「H」，鍵27設定爲「J」，鍵28設定爲「K」’ 鍵29設定爲「L」，鍵30設定爲長音「一」*下段由 左側開始依序將鍵31設定爲「N」，鍵32設定爲「Μ 」，鍵33設定爲逗點「、」*鍵34設定爲句點「·」 ，鍵3 5設定爲「 j 。 進而，各主鍵在移位狀態.（第2文字碼），上段由左 側開始依序爲將鍵21設定爲「Q」，鍵22設定爲「W 」，鍵23設定爲「Ε」，鍵24設定爲「R」，鍵25 設定爲「Τ」，中段由左側開始依序將鍵26設定爲「A j ，鍵27設定爲「S」，鍵28設定爲「〇」，鍵29 設定爲「F」，鍵30設定爲「G」，下段由左側開始依 序將鍵31設定爲「Z」*鍵32設定爲「X〕」，鍵 33設定爲「C」，鍵34設定爲「V」，鍵35設定爲 Γ B」。 另一方面，於切換鍵區域40的3個鍵4 1、42、 4 3及功能鍵區域5 0的6個鍵5 1〜5 6與前述標準排 列相同· (請先閲讀背面之注$項再喊寫本頁) •裝 訂 泉 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼（CNS &gt; A4规格（210X297公釐） -61 - vr A7 B7 五、發明說明（59) 其次參照第3 1及第3 2圖說明實現如前述般的鍵盤 排列的本發明相關之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 0 1之內 -------裝 i I (請先閱讀背面之注^^項再 内本頁) 部構成。 第3 1圖係實現畫面顧示式鍵盤輸入裝置1 0 .1之內 部構成之方塊圖，第3 2圄係顯示處理步驟之流程圖· 畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 0 1 ，係具備有：输入控 制部170、移位輸入手段171、處理控制部172、 输出控制部1 7 6 * 輸入控制部1 7 0係於選擇選單11 、主鍵S域2 0. 、切換鍵區域4 0、功能鍵區域5 0等處檢測是否有藉由 筆1 5之輕觸輸入（步驟1 ，以下以S替代「步騄」兩字 在此*若有輕觸输入，則移位输入手段1 7 1判斷該 輕觸輸入是否爲移位輸入（S2)· --線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 在此，如果經判定爲移位輸入的話·移位輸入手段 171進行產生被輕觭的鍵的移位位置之鍵碼之移位處理 (S3)，而將該碼送至處理控制部172*另一方面， 如果判斷並非移位输入的話移位输入手段1 7 1產生該被 觸之鍵之非移位位置的鍵碼而送至處理控制部1 7 2 » 於處理控制部1 7 2設有排列切換手段1 7 3、鍵處 理手段174、功能處理手段175的各處理手段，因應 輸入之鍵而選擇各處理手段進行输入處理（S 4 )。例如 ，輸入的鍵若係選擇選單1 1的各選單鍵1 6〜1 9 ’或 是切換鍵區域4 0的各切換鍵4 1〜4 3的話，藉由該排 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） -62 - Α7 Β7 413779 五、發明說明（60) 列切換手段1 7 3所指定的排列而將該鎗所指示的排列切 換爲主鍵區域20、切換鍵區域40，功能鍵面域50進 &lt;請先閱讀背面之注意事項再 4本頁) 行切換處理。 此外，輸入之鍵如果爲主鍵區域2 0的各鍵的話，藉 由鍵處理手段1 7 4而將該鍵顯示於輸入行6 0 .進行输 出處理（S 4 )»此時標準排列等的羅馬拼音式输入的場 合•鍵處理手段1 7 4將输入的英文字母自動的進行變換 成平假名的處理（S4)。 進而，被输入的鍵如果是功能鍵區域5 0的各鍵的話 .，藉由功能處理手段175而實行該鍵所設定的功能（ S4)·例如輕觸變換鍵51的話，顯示於輸入行60的 文字列變換爲漢字而告確定。此外，如果實行鍵5 4被輕 觸，進行將確定之文字列顯示於顯示區域1 0之處理· 於輸出控制部1 7 6，進行將處理控制部所處理的結 果，顯示於液晶畫面3之處理（S5)。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 藉由如上之動作，結束對於各鍵之輕觸輪入，如果有 下一個輕觸输入的話，反覆進行以上的處理而依序進行輕 觸輸入· 此外作爲移位输入手段171，如第33圖所示*按 鍵式移位輸入手段1 8 1、單按式移位輸入手段1 8 2、 預移位式移位輸入手段1 8 3，區域區分式移位輸入手段 1 8 4等4個移位輸入手段來選擇適當的手段來應用。 以下，個別說明各移位输入手段1 7 1 » 按鍵式移位輸入手段1 8 1係如第2 2圖所示，其構 本紙張尽度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 * 63 - Α7 Β7 41#7# 五、發明說明（61 ) (請先W讀背面之注意事項再&gt;寫本I&gt; 成爲：按鍵4在押下的同時以筆15在鍵上輕觸的場合， 產生該鍵的移位狀態所設定的記號的碼（第2文字碼）· 在按鍵4沒有被應下的狀態輕觸鍵的場合，產生該鍵的非 移位狀態所設定的記號碼（第1文字碼） 單按式移位输入手段1 8 2，其構成爲：在以筆1 5 於指定時間內輕觸2次的場合，產生該鍵在移位狀態所設 定的記號碼（第2文字碼），而在指定時間內僅輕觸一次 的場合，產生該鍵的非移位狀態所設定的記號碼（第1文 字碼）。 亦即，如第3 4圖所示•以筆1 5在畫面上由最初輕 觸到第2次輕觸而離開爲止在所設定的時間範圍內的場合 ((1) 、 （2))，判斷其爲移位狀態，以筆輕觸的動 作如果在指定時間以內只有一次的場合（（3) ' (4) 或是第2次的輕觸操作超過了設定的時間的場合（（5 ))，判斷其爲非移位狀態。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 預移位式移位输入手段1 8 3，在如第2 2圖所示之 移位鍵5被壓下而設定爲移位狀態的場合*產生以筆1 5 輕觸之鍵設定爲移位狀態之記號碼（第2文字碼），而在 再度壓下移位鍵5而設定输入模式在非移位狀態的場合， 產生以筆1 5輕觸之鍵設定爲非移位狀態之記號碼（第1 文字碼）* 區域區分式移位输入手段1 8 4係如第3 5圖所示， 各鍵的上側半部爲移位區域1 8 4 A，下側半部匾分爲非 移位區域1 8 4 B時，具備有判斷以筆1 5輕觸了區域1 冢紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210^ 297公f 一 64 一 413779 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印笨 A7 B7昱、發明説明（62 ) 84A、184B於何處之輕觸區域判斷手段，以輕觸區 域判斷手段1 8 7判斷其爲輕觸移位區域1 8 4 A的場合 ，產生該鍵的移位狀態所設定的記號碼（第2文字碼）* 以輕觸區域判斷手段1 8 7判断其爲輕觸非移位區域 1 8 4 B的場合，產生該鍵非移位狀態所設定的記號碼（ 第1文字碼）· 又，此區域菡分若不將鍵分爲上下兩部，亦可將其分 爲左右兩部亦可，每個場合都以在輕觸該領域時，預先顯 示輸入之記號者爲佳· 此外，作爲移位輸入手段1 7 1 *前述之按鍵式移位 手段181、單按式移位輸入手段182、預移位式移位 輸入手段1 8 3，區域區分式移位輸入手段1 8 4中只要 擇一設定即可，也可以設定複數的移位輸入手段1 7 1而 讓使用者可以選擇之構成亦佳。 此外，按鍵4及移位鍵5作爲移位输入手段1 7 1， 在不使用按鍵式移位输入手段1 8 1、預移位输入手段 1 8 3的場合，不設於本體2亦可。 進而，如第2 8圖所示選擇髙速排列的場合，鍵3 3 、3 4因爲設定爲第1及第2兩個移位狀態（第2及第3 文字碼）的緣故，作爲移位输入手段1 7 1也需要預先設 定，第1及第2兩個相互相異方式的2個移位輸入手段。 例如*作爲第1移位手段而設定按鍵式移位輸入手段 1 8 1，作爲第2移位手段而設定單按式移位輸入手段 1 8 2等即可。在此場合*例如，壓下按鍵同時輕觸鍵 (諳先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） -65 - 413779 經濟部中央橾率局貝工消費合作社印裝 A7 B7五、發明説明（63 ) .3 3、34的場合，第1移位狀態（第2文字碼）之逗點 「、」、句點「》」被输入，以單按式（一定時間內輕觸 2次鍵）輕觸鍵33、34的場合，输入第2移位狀態（ 第3文字碼）之「F」、「V」》 其次，說明如此之本實施形態的效果。 根據本實施形態，主鍵2 1〜3 5即使是僅設有1 5 個鍵，藉由移位輸入手段1 7 1而可以使各鍵2 1〜3 5 至少設定2個鍵（設定於移位狀態之鍵與設定爲非移位狀 態下之鍵），亦即，可以設定爲第1及第2文字碼，全體 至少可以設定3 0個鍵。亦即以羅馬拼音法输入日文時所 用的英文字母，亦即母音「A」、「I」、「υ」、「E 」、「Oj以及與母音鍵組合而可以輸入由「扣」行至「 打」行爲止的清音而輸入之「K」、「S」、「T」' 「 N」、「Η」、「Μ」' 「Y」、「Rj 、 「W」等鍵， 進而與母音組合而輸入日文的濁音、半濁音之「G」、「 Z」，「D」、「P」，「B」之19個文字之外再加上 逗點「、」、句點「。_!等爲止所含之各主鍵21〜35 可以設定，而以少數的鍵數也可以充分對應日文輸入。 同樣的，英文字母26個字母加上逗點「，」、句點 「.」等也包含進去可以設定於主鍵2 1〜3 5，對於英 文輸入也可以充分對應· 亦即，與從前的QWERTY排列或是5 0音排列相比，使 用大幅減少至1 5個的主鍵2 1〜3 5而可以進行羅馬拼 音式日文输入或是英文輸入。因此，各鍵2 1〜3 5以與 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS &gt; A4*t^ (210X297公釐）_邱_ ~ '1^I I I —1τί I I^ (請先閱婧背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) 413779 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明（64 ) 原來QWERTY排列或是5 0音排列的鍵同樣大的鍵顯示於畫 面3的話，按鍵顯示區域之主鍵區域2 0可以減少，可以 提髙操作性· 此外，主鍵區域2 0可以縮小，可以使盡面顯示式鍵 盤輸入裝置1小型化，而且可以擴大資料等的顯示區域· 使用性眼操作性都向上提升•另一方面，如果使主鍵區域 2 0與從前的QWERTY排列或是5 0音排列的鍵盤配置區域 具有相同程度的大小時，各主鍵2 1〜3 5的大小可以較 從前更大，鍵2 i〜3 5可以筆1 5或是指尖簡單的輕觸 *在此場合也可以提升操作性。 此外，於本實施形態，設有切換鍵4 1〜4 3及選擇 選單1 1之各選單鍵1 6〜1 9，即排列切換手段1 7 3 ，所以可以切換主鍵2 1〜3 5的排列達到7種之多。因 此，不僅是英文字母而已•數字或是記號進而從前的 QWERTY排列所類似的排列等可以設定各種鍵昀排列。 亦即，主鍵2 1〜3 5所設定的文字碼之排列，可以 切換日文羅馬拼音输入用（標準排列英文排列、數學 排列、記號排列、髙速排列、QWERTY英文專用排列， QWERTY日文專用排列等7種排列，即使主鍵2 1〜3 5只 有1 5個，也可以與前述移位輸入手段1 7 1與排列切換 手段1 7 3組合而使得可以設定3 0個*排列數目之鍵， 各記號（文字、數字、記號）可以簡單的輸入。 進而，道些各排列的切換’因爲僅靠輕觸切換鍵4 1 〜43或是各選單鍵16〜19即可，所以各主鍵21〜 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐&gt; ~~一 87 - (請先《讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 413779 a7 ______B7 五、發明説明（65 ) 3 5之排列可以簡單切換，不僅是羅馬拼音之輸入，還可 以簡單的進行英文、數字、各種記號的輸入* (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 此外，各排列切換手段1 7 3，不僅切換主鍵2 1〜 3 5而已，還可以切換功能鍵茵域5 0所顯示的各功能鍵 5 1〜5 6而構成，所以也可以配合各排列而設定功能鍵 ，可以更進一步提升操作性*例如，僅於日文輸入時必需 的「漢字變換」等的功能，藉由使其在英文排列不要顯示 而可以僅顯示必要的功能鍵，操作性又向上更進一步。 於第2 3圖或是第2 8圖所示之羅馬拼音用輸入排列 ，母音部份的鍵與子音部份的鍵，因爲係分爲母音區域 2 0A *及子音區域2 Ο B而配置，所以子音與母音交互 出現之日文在以羅馬拼音输入時，特別是使用頻率很高的 母音鍵的位置很容易把握，而可以提高操作性。 此外，子音中使用頻率也相當高的清音用子音因爲係 設於各鍵之非移位狀態（第1文字碼）’所以使用頻率很 高的清音輸入時，不須伴賭著移位操作’此點也可以提高 操作性》 經濟部中央橾準局貝工消費合作社印製 其上，主鍵區域2 0的中心附近的鍵2 7、2 8 ’設 定母音及子音中使用頻率很髙的「A」、「K」鍵，由該 鍵向外側，以上段、下段的麒序’分別設定爲母音「AJ 、「1」、「11」、「£」、「〇」，及子音「1&lt;;」、「 8」、「Τ」、「Ν」、「Η」'ΓΜ」、「γ」、「Κ 」、rWj ，亦即由「私j行至「朽」行爲止的順序排列 好而設定的，容易把握住鍵的排列’更進一步提升操作性 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐）_ 68 _ 經濟部中央椋準局貝工消费合作杜印褽 413779 A7 _B7__五、發明説明（66 ) 〇 進而，於前述子音區域之中「K」、「S」、「Tj 、「N」、「Η」的各移位狀態（第2文字碼）與母音「 Α」、「I」、「U」、「Ε」、「0」組合，而排列輸 入日文濁音、半濁音之「Gj 、 「Z」、「D」、「P」 、「B」，所以「洳j 、「&amp;」、「Λ:」的輪入位置對應 「系」、「y」、「纪」，而「旮」、「ii」的輸入位置 對應「j 、「比」而分別排列，濁音、半濁音的鍵的位 置容易記憶，操作性更上一層* 於羅馬拼音输入用的標準排列（第23圚）、高速排 列（第2 8圖），及QWERTY式日文專用排列（第2 9圖 )係設定爲日文中使用頻率很高的撥音「沁」或是促音「 〇」及逗點「、」、句點「。」、長音鍵「一」等因爲可 以1次的清觸操作而输入，所以可以提高操作性*特別是 撥音「尤j鍵3 1或是鍵3 5因爲是以非移位狀態而設定 的，所以日文输入中特別是音讀漢字等使用頻率很高的撥 音「4」可以簡單地輸入· 另一方面，前述主鍵係設定於英文排列用（第2 5圖 、第2 9圖）的場合•也可以將英文輸入時使用頻率較高 的逗點「、」、句點「》」等各鍵設定於移位狀態或是非 移位狀態，可以直接輕觸输入，所以英文输入時操作性也 可以提升。 進而，第2 5圖的英文排列，與第2 3圖的標準排列 之大多數的鍵的排列一致，而第2 9圖的QWERTY式英文專 本紙張尺度適用中國圉家標準（CNS &gt; A4規格（210X297公釐) ~~ -69 - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項弄填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 41317^ A7 B7五、發明説明（67 ) 用排列與QWERTY式日文專用排列大多數的鍵都是一致的所 以在標準排列與英文排列之間的切換操作在併用的場合’ 也容易記住鍵盤排列•可以提升操作性。 於第2 6圖所示之排列|各數字與從前的鍵盤上的數 字鍵具有相同的排列配置，進而計算所使用到的各種記號 可以輕觸輸入，所以數字之輸入或是計算之操作都可以簡 單的進行· 於第2 7圄所示之記號排列，使用頻率很高但是相較 之下輸入較爲困難的各種記號，顯示於各主鍵2 1〜3 5 而可以藉由輕觸而输入，各種記號可以簡單的輸入》此外 各括弧記號、在基準側的兩列配置了 6個主鍵2 1、2 2 、26、27、31、32的移位狀態及非移位狀態係彙 總而設定的，括弧記號與其他的記號之鍵位置容易判別， 可以提高輸入的操作性* 於第2 8圇所顯示的高速排列，母音區域2 Ο A的各 鍵21、22、26、27、31、32的移位狀態（第 2文字碼）分別設定爲日文中特別是音讀漢字中使用頻率 較高的二重母音或是拗音之「AIj 、 「UI」、rEi 」、「 OUj 、 「YUU」等，這些文字可以藉由一次 的輕觸而输入•所以可以提升日文的输入效率》 其上，在高速排列，通常作爲切換鍵而使用的鍵4 1 '42、43的移位狀態與非移位狀態下設定「，j 、 「 &lt;」、促音「〇」、「与_1 、「李」、「YOU」等輸入 鍵，所以日文特別在音讀的單漢字之後第2音節常出現的 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） ----------裝------訂------象 (請先W讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) -70 - 五、發明説明（68 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 「含· &lt; · 東京（T 0 文字也可以 進而· 觸主鍵區域 換爲「李· 相同的切換 4 1 〜4 3 也以少數的 進而， ，作爲第1 Γ 〇」*及 「V」，特 音「7 Τ ( 使用的「F 語詞的輸入 第2 9 及日文專用 QWERTY排列 排列的使用 用。 此外， 按式移位輸 1 8 4的話 可以一 U K Y ◦u )的二 一次的輕觸而輸入I 活用這些鍵頻頻出現 2 0之任意鍵後，切 &lt; ·芍· Ό ·，」等 鍵41〜43的設定 的狀況而適宜的切換 鍵來完成。 在高速排列時，主鍵 移位狀態（第1文字 第2移位狀態（第2 別是在片假名語詞的 F + A )」、r 下 」、「V」可以簡單 時，可以提升操作性 圖及第3 0圖所示之 排列*可以將從前廣 按鍵順序設定於1 5 者而言，容易記億住 作爲前述移位輸入手 入手段1 8 2，區域 ，藉由筆1 5的輕觸 次的輕觸而輸入，同時如 重母音相伴「YOU」的 輸入效率更加向上提升。 於第2音節的特徵，在輕 換鍵41〜43的設定切 *通常作爲與其他的排列 而使用，所以可以因應鍵 共用，不會損及操作性， 33、34的移位狀態下 碼）之逗點「、j 、句點 文字碼）而設定^ F」、 輸入上使用頻繁的特殊拗 (V+A)」在输入時所 的輸入，特別是在片假名 〇 QWERTY是英文專用排列以 泛利用到而較有親和力的 個主鍵，對於習慣QWERTY 鍵盤的排列，可以立刻使 段171 *特別是使用單 區分式移位輸入手段 只要些許的差異就可以區 锖 先 » 讀 背 面 之 注 装 訂 浪 本紙張尺度適用中困國家標準（CNS &gt;A4規格（210X297公釐） -71 - 413779 經濟部中央標準局員Η消费合作社印製 A7 _B7_五、發明説明（69 ) 分移位输入及非移位輸入，所以操作性可以提升。 使用單按式移位輸入手段1 8 2的場合，指定時間內 輕觸2次的話即進行移位操作，所以對於熟習滑鼠的雙按 相同的操作可以容易習慣其操作· 此時，輕觸的判斷時間如果能夠讓輸入裝置1的使用 者自行調整的話，各使用者2次輕觸的間隔時間不同的場 合，也可以正確的判斷係1次輕觸或是2次輕觸，亦即可 以正確的判斷是否爲移位操作。 使用區域區分式移位輸入手段184的場合，改變以 筆輕觸的區域即可進行移位操作，操作性可以提升。在此 場合，各主鍵2 1〜3 5設定爲移位與非移位的狀態之各 記號顯示於各移位區域8 4 A，與非移位區域8 4 B，該 各區域8 4 A、8 4 B亦即所欲輸入的記號部份可以直接 輕觸而憑直覺操作而可以输入各記號（第1及第2文字碼 )所以操作易懂，操作性亦可提髙。 另一方面，按鍵式移位输入手段1 8 1或預移位式移 位輸入手段1 8 3在押下按鍵的同時，或是在押下移位鍵 5之後以筆輕觸即可，所以不需要注意輕觸的方法，可以 明示的操作，因操作者而異特別在微細的操作上不習慣的 人，改變輕觸的方式而進行移位操作的場合相比也有可以 比較容易操作。 此外，使用預移位式移位输入手段1 8 3的話*複數 的移位狀態的鍵接連著輪入的場合，最初設定爲移位的狀 態*其後在輕觸鍵時，不需要再設定移位狀態，所以输入 (請先《讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) Α4規格（210X297公釐） -72 - 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明（70 ) 效 率 可 以 提 升 « 進 而 » 刖 述 的 實 施形 態 » 鍵输 入 區 域 1 2 的 各 鍵 相 互 分 離配 置 的 關 係 各 鍵的 區 域 明 顯 的 劃 分 ， 藉 由 筆 1 5 而 輕 觸 輸 入 時 跨 過 2 個鍵 而 輸 入 之 類 的 錯 誤 操 作 可 以 防 止 〇 特 別 是 輕 觸 到 各 鍵之 間 的 間 隙 部 份 的 場 合 設 定 爲 由 其 間 隙 顧 [7TJ 始 接 下 來輕 觸輸 入 的 部 份 會 被 白 動 取 消掉 的 話 可 以 確 實 防止 錯 誤 操 作。 此 外 本 發 明 並 不限於 第 2 2 圖 所 示 之 畫 面 顯 示 式 鍵 盤 輸 入 裝 置 1 0 如 第 3 6 圖 所 示 也 可 以 適 用 於 更 爲 小 型 的 畫 面 輕 觸 式 輸 入 裝 置 19 0 9 在 此 場 合 顯 示 區 域 1 0 興 前 述 的 輸 入 裝 置 1 0 1相 比 變 小 了 但 是 其 他 的 選 擇 選 單 1 1 按 鍵 输 入 區 域 12 係 於 刖 述 輸 入 裝 置 1 0 1 相 同 9 而 可 以 同 樣 的操 作 0 進 而 本 體 2 上 裝設 蓋 體 ♦ 此 蓋 體 部 份 設有顯 示 區 域 1 0 本 體 2 上 設 有按鍵输 入 區 域 1 2 亦 可 D 重 要 的 是 » 本發 明 可 以 廣 泛 TTtft 應 用 於個 人 電 腦 電 子 手 冊 攜帶資 訊 終 端 機 ( P D A ) 等 « 此 外 於 前 述 的 實施 形 態 爲 了 使 排 列 切 換 手 段 1 7 3 具 有功 能 而 設 有 切換 鍵 4 1 4 3 以 及 選 擇 選 單 1 1 » 亦 可 僅 設 置 這 些 之 任一 方 0 此 外 » 排列 切 換 手 段 1 8 3 如 前所 述 不 限 於 顯 示 於液 晶 畫 面 3 上 • 亦 可 於 本 體 2 上 設 置 按 鍵 式 〇 進 而 » 主 鍵區域 2 0 所 顯 示 的 各 主 AHi. 鍵 2 1 3 5 的 排 列 並 不 限 於前述 之 標準 排 列 或 是 QWERTY式 的 排列 〇 例如 本紙浪尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4说格（210X297公釐） -73 - 413779 經濟部中央標準局黃工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明（71 ) ’母音區域2 0A配置於下段1列，而子音區域2 0B配 置於上中2段亦可•此外，於標準排列或是高速排列等’ 母音區域2 Ο A與子音區域2 Ο B左右相逆各鍵的配置順 序完全反向而與前述實施例成對稱而設定者亦可。此外切 換鍵區域4 0或是功能鍵區域5 0也可以配置在主鍵區域 2 0的右側或是上側等其他的場所，逭些各鍵區域2 0、 40、50的配置位置等也可以考慮使用者是左撇子或是 右撇子而適當設置即可。 此外，作爲輕觸手段，筆1 5以外也可以使用指尖。 此外，畫面也不限於液晶畫面3，也可以使用CRT畫面 。此處，作爲認識筆1 5等的輕觸的手段，可以因應畫面 種類而使用靜電容量型，光學型，電阻型等各種手段，前 述輕觸手段也可以因應這些認識手段而適當選擇即可。 進而，各鍵輕觸後的場合*被輕觸之各鍵可以顯示反 轉顯示而讓使用者容易掌握住是哪個鍵被輕觸•此時，伴 隨移位操作的場合的輕觸，與通常的輕觸成反轉顯示狀態 而改變的話，例如|在移位操作的場合，僅該鍵的上半部 反轉，而於通常操作的場合僅該鍵的下半部反轉的話，具 有更容易掌握住輕觸輸入操作的優點· 進而，作爲移位輸入手段1 7 1 ，如前述第1實施形 態，藉由區別輸入操作係點觸或是桿觸，而輸入非移位狀 態或是移位狀態亦即第1及第2文字碼而構成亦可。 其次*說明本發明第6實施形態。 本實施形態，係關於資訊記號爲圖示的場合》 &lt;請先閱讀背面之注^^項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準{ CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） -74 -Hyphen "one", key 22 is set to "'" * key 23 is set to "F", key 24 is set to "B", key 25 is set to "L", and at the same time, key 26 is set in order from the left in the middle It is "·", key 27 is set to ",", key 28 is set to "G", key 29 is set to "Z", key 30 is set to "D", and the lower section is sequentially set from the left to key 31. "J", key 32 is set to "Q", key 33 is set to "F", key 34 is set to "V", key 35 is set to "C" "On the other hand, the three keys 41 of the key area 40 are switched, 42, 4 and 3 are the same as the standard arrangement, and are set as the symbol switching key 4 1. English switching key 42, digital switching key 43 »In addition, in the function key area 50, five keys 51, 53 to 56 are set. Keys 54, 55, and 56 are the same as keys 5 4 to 5 6 in the standard arrangement described above. On the other hand, key 5 1 is set to the "cancel" key to return to the standard arrangement, and key 5 3 is set to only the "space" key *. Next, the key arrangement of the main key area 20, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50 in the numerical arrangement shown by the 26th circle will be described. In the main key area 20, the left three columns are set as numeric keys and the right two columns are set as arithmetic notation keys. Specifically, as the first text code, the upper part of the aforementioned main key area 20 is from the left in order to set the key 21 to the number "7", the key 22 to the number "8", and the key 23 to the number "9j. , Key 24 is set to the mark "X", key 25 is set to the mark "+" This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 specification (210X297 mm &gt; _ 52-~ III —i line (Please read the back Note: Please fill in this page again) 413779 Printed by A7 _B7_5, Invention Description (50) by the Central Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, and at the same time, set the key 26 to the number "4 j" from the left in the middle , Key 27 is set to the number "5j, key 28 is set to the number" 6j, key 29 is set to the sign "+", key 30 is set to the sign "一 j · Further • Set the key 31 to the number from the left in the order from the left" 1 ", key 32 is set to the number" 2 ", key 33 is set to the number" 3 ", key 34 is set to the sign". ", And key 35 is set to the sign" = ". Further on keys 24, 25, 29, 30, In the shifted state (second text code) such as 34, 35, etc., they are set to the symbol "%" and the symbol " / ", The symbol": ", the symbol"; ", the symbol", ", the symbol" ~ ", etc. On the other hand, the three keys 41, 42, 4 and 3 of the switch key area 40 are the same as the standard arrangement, and are respectively set It is the mark switch key 4 1. English switch key 4 2. Number_word switch key 4 3. In addition, in the function key area 50, five keys 51, 53 to 56 are set. Among them, keys 55 and 56 are in accordance with the aforementioned standards. The arrangement is the same as in English. On the other hand, the key 5 1 is the same as the English arrangement. It is set to return to the standard arrangement. "Release j key, key 5 3 is set to the number" 0 "in the non-shifted state. • In the shifted state The bottom is set to the "space j" key. In addition, the key 54 is only set to "new line". Secondly, the main key area 2 0, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50 of the number arrangement shown in Fig. 27 are explained. The key columns of the main key area 2 are set to bracket marks on the left and 3 columns on the right are set to various mark keys. * Specifically, as the first text code, the upper part of the aforementioned main key area 2 0 starts from the left in order. Key 2 1 is set in brackets. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 × 297). Mm) _ 53 I nnn I nnnf I nn I ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, A7 B7 V. Invention Description (51) Mark "" " , Key 22 is set to the bracket mark "" j, key 23 is set to the asterisk "*", key 24 is set to the sign "#", key 25 is set to the and sign "&amp;", and the keys are sequentially started from the left in the middle 26 is set to bracket mark "", key 27 is set to bracket mark "", key 28 is set to point ".j", key 29 is set to colon ":", key 30 is set to semicolon ";", and further, the next paragraph From the left, key 31 is set to parentheses "(", key 32 is set to brackets ") j, and key 33 is set to question marks"? " j, key 34 is set to the symbol "! j, key 35 is set to the symbol" / ". On the other hand, the keys of the aforementioned main key area 20 are in a shifted state (second text code). * The upper paragraph is in order from the left. To set the key 21 as a bracket sign "'", the key 22 as a bracket sign ", the key 23 as a modifier sign" @ ", the key 24 as a right arrow sign"-", and the key 25 as a left arrow sign" — j, in addition, from the left, set the key 26 to brackets " &lt; ", key 27 is set to parentheses" &gt; j, key 28 is set to dots "__", key 29 is set to dots "...", key 30 is set to signs "~ j", and the next paragraph starts from the left Set the key 3 1 as the bracket mark "[" * key 3 2 as the bracket mark "]", the key 33 as the dollar sign "$", the key 34 as the yen sign "¥", and the key 35 as Modified symbol "§ j β On the other hand, the three keys 41, 42, 4 and 3 of the switch key area 40 are the same as the standard arrangement, and are respectively set as the symbol switch key 41, the English switch key 42, and the number switch key 43. This Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Ad Specification (210 × 297 mm) 7 &quot; -54---------- # ------ ir ------ β (Please read first Note on the back again ¾ write this page) 413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (52) In addition, in the function key area 50, there are 5 keys 5 1, 53 ~ 56 are set . Among them, the keys 51, 54 to 56 are the same as the aforementioned numbers. On the other hand, when the keys 5 3 are in the shifted state, the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 are appropriate. Immediately displayed menu area displays various "pattern mark" keys for various pattern symbols. Key 5 3 is set to display the "secondary candidate" key of the next candidate of the displayed pattern symbol in the non-shifted state. Next · Description The key arrangement of the main key area 2 0, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50, which are quickly switched by the selection menu 1 7 shown in Fig. 28. This high-speed arrangement is the same as that shown in Fig. 23 The standard arrangement is almost the same, and some keys are set for high-speed input. Specifically, each key 2 1, 22, 26, 27, 3 1, 32 of the vowel blue gamut 20A is the same as the standard arrangement as the first text code. Set to "A", Γ..Ι "," U "," E "," 0 "," A / j "keys, and in the shifted state (second text code) of these keys, set to High-speed input double vowel keys "AI", "UI", "UU", "El", "OU", and "YUUj." That is, the middle keys 27 and 26 among the vowel keys are set in a shifted state. For "AI" and "III", the middle bar keys 22 and 21 are set to "UU" and "EI" in the shifted bark state, and the lower bar keys 32 and 31 are The bit status is set to "OU", "YUU". On the other hand, the consonant area 2 0 B in the right three columns displays the Japanese consonants "K", "S", "T", and "N" in the same manner as the standard arrangement. , "子", "M", "Y", "R", and "W" are arranged as the first character code. More specifically, the middle key 2 8, 2, 9, ^^^ 1. ^ N {Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page), π-Spring paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specifications ( 210X297 mm) -55-413779 Printed by the Consumers 'Cooperative of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _B7_ V. Invention Description (53) 30 Starting from the left, they are "K", "S", "T", and' The upper keys 23, 24, and 25 are sequentially designated as "N", "Η", and "M" from the left, and the lower keys 33, 34, and 35 are sequentially designated as "Yj," and "R" from the left. The corresponding "1 ^", "11", "] \ 4_) keys 23, 24, and 25 of the above-mentioned shift state (second text code) of the consonant keys are arranged as" Pj, "Bj,". ", The corresponding" KJ, "SJ," Tj keys 28, 29, 30 in the middle paragraph are sorted as "G", "Z", "Dj." The corresponding "Yj," R "," comment "in the lower paragraph The keys 33, 34, and 35 are arranged as a comma ",", a period "*", and a long Γ one. Further, when the keys 33 and 34 are shifted, the state of the second shift (third character code.) Is set to "F" and "V", respectively. On the other hand, the three keys 41, 42, 4 3 of the switching key area 40 are generally the same as the standard arrangement, and are respectively set as the symbol switching key 41, the English switching key 4 2 and the number switching key 43. However, when any of the keys in the main key area 20 is touched, as shown in FIG. 28, the keys 41, 42, and 43 are respectively set as "0" and "0" as the first character code. &lt; "," 〇 ", and the shift states (second character codes) of these keys 41, 42, 43 are set to" right "," $ ", and" YOU ", respectively. In other words, in the high-speed arrangement, the switching keys 4 1 to 4 3 can also function as the secondary keys. In addition, the function key area 50 is set to 6 keys 51 to 56 having the same functions as the standard arrangement. , Especially the double vowel "This paper size is common Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ~~ 56-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 413779 B7 V. Invention Description (54 〉 AI j, "UIj," UU "," EIj "," OUj, "" YUj, "" YOU ", and" Λ / · # · 〈• Right.〇 ... "can be inputted at a high speed. That is, these double vowels and cymbals "&gt; 1 · # · &lt; · Right ·. · 〇 "appears very frequently in Japanese, especially in the pronunciation of Chinese characters, so you usually need to touch two or three times to enter the text with one touch. The number of touches can be reduced to improve the efficiency of input." An example of comparing this number of taps with the previous 50-tone input and the Roman phonetic input of the QWERTY arrangement is shown in Table 1. (Please read the precautions on the back before writing this page.) -Uti Comparison of the number of touches entered by the first test pen 5 Example of 0-tone arrangement QWERTY arrangement High-speed arrangement 5 KEIZAI 6 KE1ZAI 4 Circulation 6 RYUUTUU 7 RYUUTUU 4 Information 1 / Zuo Xiao Shang · 5 Ιϋ 7 J0UII0U 6 ZY0UII0U 4 Published L Xiao Lou Xiao Zhuo Nine 9 SYUPPANN 8 S YUoPAA, 7 Song force 1 / Zhuo o D Xiao Shang &lt; 7 JITURYOKU 9 ZI ^ RY〇l 7 ^ • α Γ Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Note: The "voice" of "50-tone arrangement" is the voiced key, and "small" shows the shift of lowercase text Bit. _This table shows that using the high-speed arrangement of the 2nd and 8th circles 'because double vowels or cymbals can be entered with a single touch', compared with hiragana input or Roman pinyin input, The numbers in Table 1) are smaller, especially for articles with a lot of pronunciation, and the effect is more significant. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 57 413779 A7 B7 Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (55) In addition, the aforementioned high-speed arrangement and text flow Designed to move sequentially from right to left. That is, the next consonant on the right touches the double vowel next to the vowel, and then the vowel, and then touches the second syllable on the left, "人 · # · &lt; • 芍 ·· ^ · ^ 」can reduce the invalid movement of the hand and improve the operability. This is the case where the second syllable is read and the second syllable is free of the vowel. It is "A / · including · &lt; * ^ · ό · ό ", that is, after the 1st syllable (consonant + vowel), enter" 人 • 爸爸 · &lt; • 芍 ·. ·. The possibility comes from the characteristics of the Japanese language, and it is especially effective when typing Japanese. The following are examples of Chinese characters containing these characters. 1) An example of a Chinese character whose second syllable is "彳" (an example of "AI.UI.EI" with a double vowel) • Kai (KAI SAI) • Inside and outside (ΝΑ1 GAI) * Accounting (ΚΑΙ ΚΕΙ), etc. (RU1 SUI) • Presumed (SUI TEI) • Cumulative (RUI ΚΕΙ) 2) Examples of Chinese characters whose second syllable is "0" (examples of any of the double vowels "UU. 0U") and "YUU. YOU" Examples of Chinese characters • Method (HOU H0U). Structure (KOU Z0U) • Workshop (K0U ZZΥΟϋ) • Tokyo (TOU KY0U) • Ventilation (TUU FUU) • Central (TYUU 0U) 3) The second syllable is "&gt; Examples of Chinese characters for safety • Safety (ΑΑ ΕΕΛ /) • Jian 単 (ΚΑΛν ΤΑΛ · /). Chaos (Κ0 九 TO 九) (Please read the precautions on the back before writing in Chinese) 本 This paper size applies Chinese national standard 隼 ( CNS &gt; A4 specifications (210X297 mm) -58-Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Yinben 413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (56) 4) The 2nd syllable is r cattle · Xi ", the Chinese character: Examples are easy (HE # E #). Indeed (TE ΚΑ &lt;) _ Strategy (KA &lt; SA &lt;) • of g (M0 &lt; ΤΕ Including) * Rivals (SYU &lt; TE #). Ad hoc (SO &lt; SE § 5) The 2nd syllable is Γ hu ·).-An example of the f character of 'yj • 1 B (1¾ Nit.). Ji Yue (ΚΙ% ZO I ◦) • • (SIo ZI〇). Cut (SE ◦ Z I 〇) • 1 (1¾ NI). Live (KA 〇ΡΑ9) • Quality (ZI 〇SI o) • Out (SYUo PA 〇 followed by * i) The description shown in Figure 2 9 is to choose. Menu 1 8 Switch the key arrangement of the QWERTY-style English-only arrangement of the main key area 20, the switch key 40, and the function key area 50 of 0. This QWERTY-style arrangement is for the convenience of those who are used to the QWERTY-style English arrangement of the keyboard. It is easy to use when inputting English, and the key area of each key 2 1 ~ 35 in the first embodiment is divided into left and right keys, but this embodiment is different from the upper and lower display points. It is a special arrangement of QWERTY English as the first 1 text code, the upper part of the main key plaque field 20 is set from the left to set key 21 to "Y" * key 22 to "U", key 23 to "I", key 24 to "0", key 25 is set to "P", key 26 is set to "H", and key 27 is set to "J" from the left. , Key 28 is set to “K”, key 29 is set to “L”, key 30 is set to a semicolon “;” | in the lower section, key 31 is set to “N” and key 3 2 is set to “M” , The key 33 is set to "," and the key 34 is set to ". This paper size is used in the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X2? 7mm) --------- ^ ---- --ir ------ ^ (please read the note $ on the back before filling this page) -59 — 413779 A7 ____B7_ 5. Description of the invention (57) j, set the key 35 to the symbol "/". Further * The main keys are in the shifted state (second text code). From the left, set the key 21 to "Qj", key 22 to "W", key 23 to "E", and key 24 to " R ", key 25 is set to" T ", the middle section is set to" A "from the left, key 27 is set to" S ", key 28 is set to" D ", key 29 is set to" F ", Set key 30 to "G", and set key 3 1 to "Z", key 32 to "X", key 33 to "C", key 34 to "V", and key from the left. 35 is set to "B". On the other hand, in the switch key area 4 0 SYMOL (SYMBOL) key 41 'is used to switch the key arrangement to the symbol arrangement as shown in Fig. 27. The CAP key 4 2 is used to switch the input mode between uppercase and lowercase characters. Arrange with NUM key 4 3. In the function key area 50, four keys 53 to 56 are set. Among them, the key 53 is set as a "space" key for inputting a space, and is printed by the staff consumer cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). 5 4 is set as a "change line" key. Key 5 is set to the "DEL" key for entering spaces, and key 56 is set to the "BS" (back) key. Next, the key arrangement of the main key area 20, the switch key area 40, and the function key area 50 of the QWERTY Japanese-only arrangement switched by the selection menu 19 shown in FIG. 30 will be described. This QWERTY Japanese-only arrangement is for the convenience of people who are accustomed to the keyboard of the previous QWERTY-style Japanese arrangement, and the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) is applied to this paper scale '-60-413779 413779 A7 B7 Ministry of Economy Central Bureau of Standards, Bureau of Industry, Consumer Cooperatives, Ben Ben 5. Description of the Invention (58) Easy to use when inputting Japanese * This QWERTY arrangement for Japanese is almost completely based on the QWERTY arrangement for the English arrangement shown in Figure 29 Same · That is, as the first character code of each primary key, the upper section of the primary key area 20 starts from the left and sets the key 21 to "Y", the key 22 to "II", and the key 23 to "1". , Key 24 is set to “0”, key 25 is set to “Pj,” key 26 is set to “H” in sequence from the left, key 27 is set to “J”, key 28 is set to “K”, and key 29 is set. It is "L", key 30 is set to long sound "one" * from the left, key 31 is set to "N", key 32 is set to "M", key 33 is set to comma "," * key 34 is set Is a period "·", and the key 3 5 is set to "j." In the shifted state. (2nd text code), from the left, set key 21 to "Q", key 22 to "W", key 23 to "E", and key 24 to "R". ", Key 25 is set to" T ", the middle section is set to" A j ", key 27 is set to" S ", key 28 is set to" 0 ", key 29 is set to" F ", and key from the left. 30 is set to "G", the lower part is set to "Z" from the left, key 32 is set to "X", key 33 is set to "C", key 34 is set to "V", and key 35 is set Is Γ B ". On the other hand, the 3 keys 4 1, 42, 4, 3 in the switch key area 40 and the 6 keys 5 1 to 5 6 in the function key area 50 are the same as the aforementioned standard arrangement. (Please read the note on the back first. Write this page again) • The size of the bound spring paper is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297mm) -61-vr A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (59) Secondly refer to No. 3 1 and No. 3 2 The figure illustrates the keyboard display device related to the present invention which realizes the keyboard arrangement as described above, within the display device 1-1-i-I (please read the note ^^ on the back, and then on this page) Fig. 31 is a block diagram of the internal structure of the on-screen keyboard input device 10.1, and Fig. 32 is a flowchart of the display processing steps. · On-screen keyboard input device 1 0 1 Equipped with: input control section 170, shift input means 171, processing control section 172, output control section 1 7 6 * input control section 1 7 0 is based on selection menu 11, main key S field 2 0., switch key area 4 0 , Function key area 50, etc. to detect whether there is a touch input by pen 15 (step 1, the following is replaced by the word "step" with S Here * if there is a touch input, the shift input means 1 7 1 judges whether the touch input is a shift input (S2) · --line-the consumer cooperation of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy is printed here, if If it is determined to be shift input, the shift input means 171 performs shift processing (S3) of the key code that generates the shift position of the tapped key, and sends the code to the processing control unit 172 * On the other hand, If it is judged that it is not shift input, the shift input means 1 7 1 generates a key code of the non-shift position of the touched key and sends it to the processing control unit 1 7 2 »Arrange switching means is provided in the processing control unit 1 7 2 1 7 3. Each processing means of the key processing means 174 and the functional processing means 175 selects each processing means for input processing according to the input key (S 4). For example, if the input key is a menu key of the selection menu 1 1 1 6 ~ 1 9 'or each of the switch keys 4 1 ~ 4 3 in the switch key area 40, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) is used for this paper size -62- Α7 Β7 413779 V. Description of the invention (60) The arrangement specified by the column switching means 1 7 3 Gun arrangement as indicated by the primary key switch region 20, the shift key area 40, function keys 50 into the surface domain &lt; Please read the precautions on the back before moving to page 4). In addition, if the input key is each key in the main key area 20, the key is displayed on the input line 6 0 by the key processing means 1 74. The output processing (S 4) is performed. In the case of pinyin input • Key processing means 1 7 4 The process of automatically converting the input English letters into hiragana (S4). Furthermore, if the inputted keys are the keys of the function key area 50, the function set by the key is executed by the function processing means 175 (S4). For example, if the shift key 51 is touched, it is displayed on the input line 60 The character string converted to Chinese characters is determined. In addition, if the execution key 5 4 is touched, the process of displaying the determined character string in the display area 10 is performed. At the output control unit 176, the result processed by the process control unit is displayed on the LCD screen 3. Processing (S5). The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed the above action to end the touch rotation of each key. If there is the next touch input, the above process is repeated and the touch input is performed sequentially. In addition, as Shift input means 171, as shown in Fig. 33 * Button-type shift input means 1 8 1. Single-click shift input means 1 8 2, Pre-shift type shift input means 1 8 3, Area-specific shift Bit shift means 1 8 4 and other four shift input means are used to select appropriate means to apply. In the following, each shift input means 1 7 1 »Push-button shift input means 1 8 1 is shown in Fig. 2 and its structure paper conforms to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) as much as possible. Mm> * 63-Α7 Β7 41 # 7 # 5. Description of the invention (61) (Please read the precautions on the back first &gt; Script I &gt; Become: Press button 4 while holding down and touch with pen 15 on the key If the key is set to the shifted state of the key (second character code) · When the key is touched when the key 4 is not pressed, a key set to the non-shifted state of the key is generated Number (1st character code) One-touch shift input means 1 8 2 is composed of: when the pen 15 is tapped twice within a specified time, the number set in the shift state of the key is generated (The second character code), and when you touch it only once within a specified time, the key number (the first character code) set in the non-shifted state of the key is generated. That is, as shown in Figures 3 and 4 • Occasionally within the set time range with the pen 1 5 on the screen from the first touch to the second touch and leave ((1) (2)), it is judged that it is in a shifted state. If you touch the pen with the pen only once within the specified time ((3) '(4) or the second tap operation exceeds the set time, Occasion ((5)), it is judged as a non-shifting state. The pre-shifting shift input means 1 8 3 is printed by the consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, and the shift key 5 shown in FIG. 2 2 When pressed to set the shifted state * Generate a note number (second text code) that is set to the shifted state by touching the key with the pen 1 5 and press the shift key 5 again to set the input mode at In the non-shifting state, a note number (first text code) set to the non-shifting state by touching the key with the pen 15 is generated. * The area-shifting input means 1 8 4 is shown in Figure 3 5 When the upper half of each key is a shifted area 1 8 4 A, and the lower half of the plaque is divided into a non-shifted area 1 8 4 B, there is a judgement that the area is touched with a pen 1 5 National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 ^ 297 male f 64 1 413 779 Consumer Work Cooperative of Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printing Ben A7 B7 Yu, Fa Explain (62) Where the touch area judgment means of 84A and 184B is, and when the touch area judgment means 1 8 7 determines that it is a touch shift area 1 8 4 A, the shift state of the key is generated. The set number (second character code) * When it is judged that the non-shifted region 1 8 4 B is touched by the touch area judgment means 1 8 7, the key number set in the non-shifted state of the key ( (1 text code) · Also, if the key is not divided into two parts, it can also be divided into left and right parts. In each case, the input mark is displayed in advance when the field is touched. It is better. In addition, as the shift input means 1 7 1 * The aforementioned key shift means 181, one-touch shift input means 182, pre-shift shift input means 1 8 3, area-specific shift It is only necessary to select one of the input means 1 8 4, and it is also possible to set a plurality of shift input means 1 7 1 so that the user can select a configuration. In addition, the key 4 and the shift key 5 are used as the shift input means 1 71. When the key shift input means 1 81 and the pre-shift input means 1 8 3 are not used, they may not be provided in the main body 2. Further, when the fast-speed arrangement is selected as shown in Fig. 28, the keys 3 3 and 3 4 are set as the first and second shift states (second and third character codes) for shifting. The input means 171 also need to be set in advance, and the first and second two shift input means are different from each other. For example, * the key shift input means 1 8 1 may be set as the first shift means, and the one-touch shift input means 1 8 2 may be set as the second shift means. In this case * For example, press the key and touch the key at the same time (please read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page) The paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) -65-413779 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by A7 B7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Government Bureau. 5. Description of the Invention (63). 3, 3 and 34. The comma "," and period "" in the first shift state (second text code) are displayed. Input, single-touch (tap the key twice within a certain period of time) When keys 33 and 34 are touched, enter "F" and "V" in the second shift state (third character code). The effect of this embodiment. According to this embodiment, even if the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 are provided with only 15 keys, each key 2 1 to 3 5 can be set with at least two keys by shift input means 1 7 1 (set to shift The keys in the state and the keys in the non-shifting state), that is, the first and second text codes can be set, and at least 30 keys can be set in the whole. That is, the English alphabet used when inputting Japanese in Roman pinyin, that is, the vowels "A", "I", "υ", "E", "Oj", and the combination with the vowel key can be entered from "button" to " Hit "K", "S", "T", "N", "Η", "M" ', "Y", "Rj," W "and other keys to input the unvoiced sound, and then combine it with the vowel. And input the Japanese voiced and semi-voiced "G", "Z", "D", "P", "B" in addition to the 19 characters, and add a comma "," and a period "._! Etc. Each of the included primary keys 21 to 35 can be set, and a small number of keys can fully correspond to Japanese input. Similarly, 26 English letters plus a comma "," and a period "." Are also included and can be set The main keys 2 1 to 3 5 can also fully correspond to English input. That is, compared with the previous QWERTY arrangement or 50-tone arrangement, it can be performed by using 15 primary keys 2 1 to 3 5 which is greatly reduced. Roman Pinyin input in Japanese or English. Therefore, each key 2 1 ~ 3 5 applies the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 * t ^ (210X297 mm) _____ '1 ^ III —1τί II ^ in accordance with the paper size) (please read the back of Jing first) Note for refilling this page) 413779 A7 B7 printed by Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (64) If the keys with the same size as QWERTY or 50-tone keys are displayed on screen 3, The main key area 20 of the key display area can be reduced to improve operability. In addition, the main key area 20 can be reduced to reduce the size of the full-screen keyboard input device 1 and the display area of data and the like can be enlarged. Usability Eye operability has been improved upwards. On the other hand, if the main key area 20 is the same size as the previous QWERTY arrangement or 50-tone arrangement of the keyboard arrangement area, the size of each main key 2 1 to 3 5 can be compared. In the past, the keys 2 i ~ 3 5 can be easily touched with a pen 15 or a fingertip. * In this case, operability can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, there are switching keys 4 1 to 4 3 and options. Each menu key of menu 1 1 16 ~ 19, ie The arrangement switching means 1 7 3, so there can be as many as 7 kinds of arrangement of the main keys 2 1 to 3 5. Therefore, it is not only English letters, numbers, or symbols, and the similar arrangement of the previous QWERTY arrangement can also set various keys.昀 Arrangement. That is, the arrangement of the character codes set by the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 can be used to switch between Japanese and Roman alphabet input (standard arrangement English arrangement, mathematical arrangement, symbol arrangement, rapid arrangement, QWERTY English exclusive arrangement, QWERTY Japanese 7 kinds of special arrangements such as special arrangement. Even if there are only 15 primary keys 2 1 to 35, they can be combined with the aforementioned shift input means 1 71 and arrangement switching means 1 7 3 to make it possible to set 30 keys with the number of permutations * Each symbol (character, number, symbol) can be easily input. Furthermore, it is necessary to switch the various arrangements' because it only needs to touch the switch keys 4 1 to 43 or the menu keys 16 to 19, so each main key 21 ~ This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297mm &gt; ~~ 87)-(Please read "Notes on the back before filling this page") 413779 a7 ______B7 V. Description of the invention 65) The arrangement of 3 5 can be easily switched, not only for the input of Roman pinyin, but also for the input of English, numbers, and various symbols * (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) In addition, each arrangement switching means 1 7 3. It is not only to switch the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 but also to switch the function keys 5 1 to 5 6 displayed in the function key field 50. Therefore, you can also set the function keys in accordance with each arrangement. Further improve the operability * For example, only the necessary function keys can be displayed by not only displaying functions such as "kanji conversion" required when inputting in Japanese, but also improving operability. In the input arrangement of Roman Pinyin shown in Figure 23 or Figure 28, the keys of the vowel part and the keys of the consonant part are arranged because they are divided into the vowel area 2 0A * and the consonant area 2 0 B. Therefore, when the consonant and vowel interact with each other in Japanese, the position of the vowel key, which is frequently used, is easy to grasp, and the operability can be improved. In addition, the unvoiced consonant, which has a relatively high frequency of use, is set to the non-shifting state (first text code) of each key. Therefore, when using unvoiced input with high frequency, you do not need to bet on the shift operation This point can also improve the operability. ”Printed on it by the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, the keys 2 7, 2 8 near the center of the main key area 20 are used to set vowels and consonants with a high frequency of" A "," K "key, from this key to the outside, the upper and lower paragraphs of the sequence" "are set to the vowel" AJ "," 1 "," 11 "," £ "," 〇 ", and the consonant" 1 " &lt;; "," 8 "," Τ "," Ν "," Η "'ΓΜ", "γ", "Κ", rWj, that is, the order from "private line to" dead " Well set, easy to grasp the arrangement of the keys' to further improve the operability This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 68 _ Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperation Du Yin 褽413779 A7 _B7__V. Description of the invention (66) 〇 Furthermore, in the aforementioned consonant regions, the shift states (second text code) of "K", "S", "Tj," N "," Η "and The vowels "Α", "I", "U", "E", and "0" are combined to input Japanese voiced and semi-voiced "Gj", "Z", "D", "P", "B", So the round positions of "洳 j", "&amp;", and "Λ:" correspond to "system", "y", and "ji", and the input positions of "旮" and "ii" correspond to "j" and "ratio". They are arranged separately, and the positions of the voiced and semi-voiced keys are easy to memorize, and the operability is a higher level. * Standard arrangement for Roman pinyin input (23rd), high-speed arrangement The columns (fig. 28) and QWERTY Japanese-specific arrangement (fig. 29) are set to the dial "Qin" or the accent "0" and the comma "," and the period ", which are frequently used in Japanese. ", Long key" one ", etc. can be inputted by one touch operation, so it can improve the operability * Especially the dial tone" you j key 3 1 or key 3 5 is set in a non-shifting state, Therefore, in the Japanese input, especially the dial “4”, which is frequently used, such as phonetic reading of Chinese characters, can be easily input. On the other hand, when the aforementioned primary key system is set for English arrangement (Figure 25, Figure 29) The keys such as comma "," and period "", which are used frequently in English input, can be set to the shifted state or non-shifted state. You can directly touch the input, so the operability can also be improved when typing in English. Furthermore, the English arrangement of Fig. 25 is consistent with the arrangement of most of the keys of the standard arrangement of Fig. 23, and the QWERTY English version of the paper sheet of Fig. 29 applies the Chinese standard (CNS &gt; A4) Specifications (210X297 mm) ~~ -69-(Please read the notes on the back to fill out this page) Printed by the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, 41317 ^ A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (67) Use permutation and QWERTY Most of the keys in the Japanese-style arrangement are the same, so the switching operation between the standard arrangement and the English arrangement is used in combination. It is also easy to remember the keyboard arrangement. It can improve the operability. The arrangement shown in Figure 2-6 | Each number has the same arrangement with the number keys on the previous keyboard, and the various symbols used for calculation can be input by touching, so the input of numbers or calculation can be easily performed. The displayed symbols are arranged in a variety of symbols, which are used frequently but are relatively difficult to input. They are displayed on the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 and can be entered by touching them. Various symbols can be easily entered. 》 In addition, the parentheses and the six shift keys 2 1, 2 2, 26, 27, 31, and 32 are arranged in the two columns on the reference side. The parentheses and other symbols are set together. The position of the key of the mark is easy to judge, which can improve the operability of input. * The high-speed arrangement shown in the second and eighth, the shift state of each key 21, 22, 26, 27, 31, 32 in the vowel area 2 〇 A (No. 2 text codes) are set to double vowels or syllabary "AIj," UI ", rEi", "OUj," YUU ", etc., which are frequently used in Japanese, especially in the pronunciation of Chinese characters. These characters can be used once. Tap and enter • So you can improve Japanese input efficiency. ”On the high-speed line, keys 4 1 '42, 43 are usually used as switch keys. Set the", j, " &lt; ”, accent“ 0 ”,“ and_1 ”,“ Lee ”,“ YOU ”and other input keys, so the Japanese paper standard that appears frequently in the second syllable after a single Chinese character is applied to the Chinese standard (CNS) ) A4 size (210X297mm) ---------- installation ------ order ------ like (please read the note on the back before filling this page) -70 -5. Description of the invention (68 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs &lt; · Tokyo (T 0 characters can be further changed. · Touch the primary key area and change to "Lee · Same switch 4 1 ~ 4 3" also with a few further, as the first Γ 〇 "* and" V ", special sound" 7 Τ (Use the "F-word input number 2 9 and Japanese-only QWERTY arrangement for use. In addition, if you press the shift input 1 8 4 you can use one UKY ◦u" to input I twice. After making use of any of these keys frequently appearing 20, cut &lt; · 芍 · Ό ·, 」, etc. The setting of the keys 41 to 43 can be changed by the appropriate key. In high-speed arrangement, the shift state of the primary key (the first letter and the second shift state (the second one is F + A in katakana terms), r under ", and" V "can be simple, which can improve the operability map. And the arrangement shown in Figure 30 * can be set from the front wide key sequence to 15, which is easy to remember as the aforementioned shift input hand-in means 1 8 2 and area, with the touch of the pen 15 Input with double taps, and the input efficiency such as "YOU" is enhanced along with the accented vowel sound. Due to the characteristics of the second syllable, the setting of the light switch keys 41 to 43 * is usually used as an arrangement with other, so it can be used Set to comma ", j, period text code" in the shifted state of 33, 34 in accordance with the key sharing, which will not impair the operability. ^ F ", a special 拗 (V + A) that is frequently used in input "The input you make, especially in katakana, QWERTY is an English-only arrangement that is widely used and has more affinity for the primary key. For the arrangement of the QWERTY keyboard, you can immediately make the segment 171 * especially using a single discriminator Shift input means only a little The difference can be distinguished »Read the binding size of the paper on the back side to apply the national standard (CNS &gt; A4 size (210X297 mm) -71-413779 printed by the member of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ΗB7_ V. Description of the invention (69) The shift input and non-shift input can be improved, so the operability can be improved. When using the one-touch shift input means 1 8 2, the shift operation will be performed if you tap it twice within a specified time. , So it ’s easy to get accustomed to the operation of double-clicking the familiar mouse. At this time, if the judgment time of the touch can be adjusted by the user of the input device 1, the interval between the two touches of each user is different. In the case, it can be correctly judged whether it is one touch or two touches, that is, it can be correctly judged whether it is a shift operation. When using the area-differential shift input means 184, change the pen touch The area can be shifted and the operability can be improved. In this case, the symbols of each of the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 set to the shifted and non-shifted state are displayed in each shifted region 8 4 A, and Shift area 8 4 B, each area 8 4 A, 8 4 B, that is, the part of the mark to be input can be touched directly, and each mark (the first and second text codes) can be input by intuitive operation. It is easy to understand, and the operability can be improved. On the other hand, the push-button shift input means 1 8 1 or the pre-shift shift input means 1 8 3 is at the same time as pressing the key, or after pressing the shift key 5 You can touch it with a pen, so you do n’t need to pay attention to the method of touch. It can be operated explicitly. Depending on the operator, people who are not accustomed to small operations, change the way of touch to perform shift operations. Than there are also easier to operate. In addition, if the pre-shift type shift input means 1 8 3 is used, * when the plural shift state keys are successively turned in, the shift state is initially set. * After that, when the key is touched, no further setting is required. Shifted state, so enter (please read the “$” on the back side before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -72-413779 A7 B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Pui Gong Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (70) Efficiency can be improved «Further» Description of the implementation form »Key input area 1 2 The keys are separated from each other and the relationship between the key areas is clearly divided. By pen 1 5 And the wrong operation such as inputting across 2 keys when inputting by touching can prevent 〇 Especially when touching the part of the gap between the keys, set the gap to [7TJ from the next touch input If the part is canceled by the white motion, it can prevent the wrong operation. Make. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the on-screen keyboard input device 1 shown in FIG. 22, as shown in FIG. 36, and can also be applied to a smaller screen touch input device. 19 0 9 Display area in this case 1 0 The aforementioned input device 1 0 1 is smaller compared to other selection menus 1 1 The key input area 12 is connected to the above-mentioned input device 1 0 1 is the same as 9 and can be operated in the same way 0 and a cover is attached to the main body 2 Body ♦ The cover part is provided with a display area 1 0. The body 2 is provided with a key input area 1 2 or D. It is important »The present invention can be widely applied to personal computers, electronic manuals, portable information terminals (PDAs), etc.« In addition, in the foregoing embodiment, in order to make the arrangement switching means 1 7 3 function, a switching key 4 1 4 3 and a selection menu 1 1 are provided. »Only one of these can be set. 0 In addition »The arrangement switching means 1 8 3 is not limited to the display on the LCD screen 3 as described above. • The key type can also be set on the main body 2 〇 Further» each main AHi. Key 2 1 3 5 displayed in the main key area 2 0 The arrangement is not limited to the aforementioned standard arrangement or QWERTY arrangement. For example, the paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 grid (210X297 mm) -73-413779 Printed by Huanggong Consumer Cooperative, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Explanation of the invention (71) 'The vowel area 2 0A is arranged in the lower row 1 column, and the consonant area 2 0B can be arranged in the upper middle 2 section. • In addition, in standard arrangement or high-speed arrangement, etc.' The vowel area 2 0 A and the consonant area The arrangement order of the keys in the opposite directions of 2 〇 B is completely reversed, and it may be set symmetrically with the foregoing embodiment. In addition, the switch key area 40 or the function key area 50 can also be arranged on the right or upper side of the main key area 20, and some of the key areas 20, 40, and 50 can also be used. It is left-handed or right-handed and can be set appropriately. In addition, as a touch means, a fingertip may be used in addition to the pen 15. In addition, the screen is not limited to LCD screen 3, and CRT screens can also be used. Here, as the means for tapping the recognition pen 15 or the like, various methods such as a capacitance type, an optical type, and a resistance type may be used depending on the type of screen, and the aforementioned tapping means may be appropriately selected in accordance with these recognition methods. In addition, when each key is touched * Each touched key can be displayed in reverse so that the user can easily grasp which key was touched. At this time, the touch with the shift operation is not the same as normal. If you touch it to change the display state, for example, in the case of shift operation, only the upper half of the key is reversed, and in normal operation, only the lower half of the key is reversed. It is easy to grasp the advantages of the touch input operation. Further, as the shift input means 1 7 1, as in the first embodiment described above, by distinguishing the input operation from a touch or a lever touch, the input is a non-shift state or a shift. The bit state may be constituted by the first and second character codes. Next, the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is for the case where the information symbol is shown in the diagram " &lt; Please read the note ^^ on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard {CNS) A4 (210X297mm) -74-

A7B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（72) 亦即，如第3 7圖所示，本實施形態之畫面顯示式鍵 盤输入裝置19 5的本體1 0 2的液晶畫面1 0 3上，顯 示有啓動各種軟體的圖示1 1 1〜1 16 *又，圖示的數 目及以圖示啓動軟體的種類只要適當設定即可，於本實施 形態，設定有啓動表計算、資料庫、通訊、日程表、逋訊 錄、文書處理等各種應用軟體的6個豳示111〜116 〇 而各圖示111〜116藉由啓動操作，而各軟體開 始啓動。例如，將文書處理用的圖示1 1 6啓動的話，如 第3 8圖所示畫面1 0 3上顯示文字输入畫面1 20 ·此 時，輕觸畫面1 0 3的指定部份的話，如前述第1實施形 態，按鍵輸入區域1 2成立刻顯示式顯示文字等，以可以 輕觸輸入者爲佳。 此畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置1 9 5，係如第3 9圖顯 示的內部構成的方塊圖和第4 0圖顯示處理步驟的流程圖 ，具備有畫面輕觸输入手段7 1與資訊選擇處理手段7 2 ，資訊選擇處理手段7 2係由判定手段7 3、圖示選擇處 理手段7 7及應用軟體啓動手段7 8所構成。 畫面輕觸輸入手段7 1，係檢査於畫面1 〇 3是否藉 由筆15輕觸输入（步驟11 ，以下用S取代步驟）。 在此，若有輕觸输入的話，藉由判定手段7 3判斷該 輕觸輸入是否係桿觸输入亦即筆15在圖示111〜 1 1 6內是否保持輕觸而移動了指定長度以上（s 1 2 ) »判定手段7 3於前述第1實施形態同樣，藉由前述第7 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） —---— — — — — — — — — -----111 ^ — I------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項專.:%本頁) -75 - 413779 經濟部十央標準局負工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明（73 ) 圖所示之畫索數或是第8圖所示的輕觸输入的起點與終點 之間的長度而判定筆1 5是否在圖示1 1 1〜1 1 6的區 域內保持輕觸且移動指定距離以上。 在此如果被判定爲桿觸輸入的話，進行各應用軟體的 啓動處理》 (S13)另一方面，判定結果若非桿觸亦即 筆1 5的移動距離在指定長度以內的話，進行固示1 1 1 〜116的選擇處理（S 14)。被選擇到的圖示111 〜1 1 6，成爲處理對象*藉由指定的實行鍵而進行啓動 處理，或是以削除鍵消除· 根據如此知本實施形態，從前藉由滑鼠的雙按及單按 而區分使用之圊示的啓動處理與選擇處理可以藉由筆15 而於輕觸輸入也可以實現。因此，於畫面顯示式鍵盤输入 裝置1 9 5，也有與從前使用滑鼠的系統相同的操作體系 ，選單體系，在提高操作性的同時*也提高了各種軟體的 移植性。 其上，從前滑鼠之雙按操作對於初學者而言，不一定 是容易操作的，而於本實施形態，以筆1 5輕觸游標，只 要移動指定長即可，所以即使是初學者也可以非常容易的 操作，可以更加提升操作性。 又，於前述第6實施形態，圖示的啓動處理藉由筆 1 5而輕觸输入之移動距離而實行的，但是如第5實施形 態，以筆1 5持續壓著的輕觸時間來進行亦可。 此外，於第6實施形態，通常输入的場合，進行圖示 1 1 1〜1 1 6的選擇處理，亦可進行其他處理，例如藉 (讀先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) Α4規格（2丨0X297公釐） 4137 猢Γ A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明.(75) 左側，設有如後述在押下選單鍵時以立刻顯現的方式顯示 選擇選單的選單區域211· 此外，選單區域2 1 1及按鍵输入區域2 1 2可以是 保持顯示的，通常前述顯示區域2 1 0係佔掉幾乎整個液 晶畫面2 0 3，而輕觸顯示於畫面的選擇選單顯示鍵或是 按鍵輸入開始鍵等之後*顯示區域2 1 0上的一部分以立 即顯示式應需要而顯示，顯示區域2 1 0可以擴大，資訊 量可以更多之優點· 此畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置2 0 1，係具有如第4 4 圖所示之內部構成。亦即，盡面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置 2 0 1係具備：備有鍵盤2 1 4A的鍵盤輸入手段2 1 4 ’及備有筆2 1 5A的輕觸輸入手段2 1 5，及處理控制 部2 1 6，及控制畫面2 0 3的顯示输出之输出控制部 2 1 7，以及記億著按鍵排列資料的排列表2 1 8。 鍵盤2 1 4A，係如第4 3圈所示，係薄型小型的卡 片尺寸之物，未使用時可以收容於本體2 0 2內，而且使 用時可以與本體2 0 2分離而利用· 而，鍵盤輸入手段214，在鍵盤214A的各鍵被 输入的場合，藉由電波或是紅外線等無線手段2 1 9而將 按鍵輸入的資訊送至本體2 0 2的處理控制部2 1 6 · 此外，於本體202，設有保持筆215A的保持器 *以能夠防止筆215A的遺失者爲佳* 而，以畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置2 0 1使用筆2 1 5 A的場合，以左手手持本體2 0 2，或者是放在桌上•而 本紙張疋度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） — llllL]llllll — &gt; - I - t I I I »11 — — — — — — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再γ·.^本頁) 4哪r ：.A7 B7 五、發明說明（76) 能以右手拿筆2 1 5 A操作即可· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再丨&quot;本頁) 以筆2 15 A輕觸液晶奎面2 0 3的按鍵输入面域 2 1 2的各鍵時，輕觸输入手段2 1 5將輕觸的鍵的輸入 資訊送至處理控制部。 於處理控制部2 1 6，設有鍵盤21 4A或是按鍵输 入區域212將所顯示的各鍵的移位位置資料输入之移位 輸入手段2 6 0，及切換於按鍵输入區域2 1 2所顯示的 各鍵排列的排列切換手段2 6 3，及將輸入的各鍵資料進 行處理的資料處理手段2 6 4，及各鍵的通常位置或是移 位位置的2個資料在設定時選擇输入其一方資料的選擇输 入手段2 6 2，及顯示供切換前述鍵排列用的選擇選單之 選擇選單顯示手段2 6 1。 於鍵盤214A，如第45圖所示，與盡面203的 按鍵输入區域2 1 2成同樣排列狀，設有主鍵區域2 2 0 ，及切換鍵面域2 4 0，及功能鍵區域2 5 0 0 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 亦即，於主鍵區域2 2 0，配置著上下3段左右5列 的1 5個主鍵221〜2 35。此外，於切換鍵區域 240，配置有3個切替鍵241〜243。進而，於功 能鍵區域250，配置有5個功能鍵251〜255 *亦 即，鍵盤2 1 4A，含有切替鍵24 1〜243及功能鍵 2 5 1〜2 5 5共4段計2 3個鍵被配置。 而這些鍵的表面，如第2 3圖顯示前述實施形態之標 準排列所對應之各鍵》 如此構成之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置2 0 1之處理程 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） -79 - A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 __；__B7 ____ 五、發明說明（77) 序使用第4 6圈之流程圓來說明* 首先，關於按鍵输入手段2 1 4或輕觸输入手段 2 1 5，檢測是否有利用鍵盤2 1 4A或是筆2 1 5A之 輸入（步驟1，以下以S代替步驟）。 在此，若有輸入*則判定該輸入是否係移位輸入（第 2文字碼輸入）。（S2)此判定可以由各鍵輸入手段 2 1 4或是輕觸輸入手段2 1 5來進行亦可，也可已於處 理控制部2 1 6側進行》 此外，按鍵输入的場合·移位鍵2 51於其他的鍵同 時壓著的狀態下，判定爲移位輸入β此外，於輕觸輸入的 場合，如前述各實施形態，以筆1 5的移動量或是接觸的 時間長短而判斷其爲移位输入。 而，若是判斷爲移位輸入時，移位输入手段2 6 0進 行將輸入的鍵的移位位置的鍵作爲輸入之資料而進行移位 處理（S 3 )。 其次，判斷輸入鍵是否爲選單鍵（鍵盤2 1 4Α的場 合爲鍵241，液晶畫面203的場合爲對應鍵241的 移位位置）（S4)，如果選單鍵被输入的話’藉由選擇 選單顯示手段2 6 1而進行於選單區域2 1 1顯示各選擇 選單271〜276的選單顯示處理（S5) ° 另一方面•若非選單鍵，則判斷是否爲排列切換输入 ，亦即切換鍵區域2 4 0的各鍵2 4 1〜2 4 3被輸入’ 選擇選單271〜276是否被輕觸（S6)。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----llllilill 1 t i 1 I l I - — — — —111 — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項戽 两本I) -80 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（78) 在此*若爲排列切換输入，則排列切換手段2 6 3進 行切換將指定排列表218之排列用而切換之排列切換處 理（S 7 ) · 此外，若非排列切換输入，則判斷是否爲選擇輸入（ S 8 )。在此，如果被判斷爲選擇输入的話，進行選擇被 設定的鍵的一方之選擇處理（S 9 )。 而，輸入的鍵經過確認之後|藉由資料處理手段 2 6 4產生該鍵所設定的文字，進行實行各機能的資料處 理（S10)。此時，資料處理手段264,參照排列表 218而設定之鍵排列而基於输入之鍵所對應的文字或是 機能而處理資料。另外，鍵排列的初期值爲標準排列· 而，資料處理的結果，藉由輸出控制部2 1 7而對液 晶畫面203輸出處理（S11)。 藉由以上過程•結束各輸入所相對的處理，如果有下 一個輸入則反覆進行以上的處理而依序進行。 於如此之本實施形態，可以得到與前述各實施形態同 樣的效果，而且在使用筆2 1 5 A輸入輕觸輸入手段 2 1 5之外，因爲還設有鍵盤2 1 4A，所以使用者可以 選用適合的輸入方式•可以提升操作性。 前述鍵盤2 1 4A，係設置成可以由本體2 0 2分離 ，而且每個鍵所输入的鍵資訊經由無線而可以送訊至前述 處理控制部2 1 6，可以將鍵盤2 1 4帶離本體2 0 2而 操作，特別是複數人同時看同樣的畫面2 0 3的場合，操 作者可以不被打擾而輕鬆觀看畫面2 0 3。 {靖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I -i-r&lt;&gt;4I I I I. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（2】0 X 297公釐） 81 413779 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印裝 A7 B7五、發明説明（79 ) 進而•鍵盤2 1 4A係設計成可以收容於本體2 0 2 內之構成，畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置2 0 1在攜帶時鍵盤 2 1 4A收容於本體，而僅在使用時將鍵盤2 1 4A取出 操作，所以可以作爲操作性和擁帶性都很優異之畫面顯示 式鍵盤輸入裝置2 0 1 · 另外，併用選用配備的鍵盤2 1 4A，並不限於播帶 資訊終端機（PDA)用之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置 201，如第47圖所示*使用備有本體362及顯示幕 3 6 3的桌上型電腦的畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置3 6 1亦 可。如第4 8圖所示，亦適用於備有壁掛式電視等顯示裝 置373的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置371 *然而，在此 場合，顯示裝置3 7 3所顯示的鍵排列方式之一，若能將 各電視頻道設定爲對應各鍵，則電視頻道的切換操作也可 以用前述的鍵盤214A來賁現。 此外，併用鍵盤2 1 4A的場合，壓下各鍵2 1〜 3 5時，因爲所输入的文字顯示於畫面2 0 3的按鍵输入 區域2 1 2，所以鍵盤2 1 4A上沒有顯示文字亦可。 又，主鍵2 1〜3 5所設定的文字碼的配置並不限定 於前述實施形態所記載的內容•賁施時只要適當設定即可 例如，作爲輕觸輸入用而顯示於畫面的日文、英文、 數字、記號等各鍵排列如第4 9園〜第5 3圖亦可。 具體而言，第49圖的日文排列的主鍵21〜35， 基本上係配合第2 3圖所顯示的檫準排列而設定的’在母 I------裝-I ί I--訂 (請先閲讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) 本紙浪尺度適用中國国家標準（CNS ) Μ規格（210Χ297公釐） -82 - 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（80 ) (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 音區域20A的各鍵21、22、26、27、28、 31的移位位置（第2文字碼）設定爲「e ，u，i ，a ，〇，〇」，鍵25的移位位置設定爲點「.」，鍵33 ，34的第2移位位置（第3文字碼）設定爲「F」、「 V」之處與第23圖之排列不同· 此外，支援鍵（功能鍵）區域5 0係由具有「Enter (Return)」一機能、平假名漢字變換機能及空格輸入機 能的鍵5 1，及具有平假名不變爲漢字之無變換及切換至 「Num (數字）」排列之切換功能的鍵5 2，及具有在 平假名變換爲漢字時顯示變換候補的前後部的選擇功能及 切換爲「Ma rk (記號）」排列之功能鍵53，及具有 退後功能及切換爲英文排列的切換功能的鍵5 4，及具有 削除（D E L )功能及切換爲半角模式的切換機能的鍵 5 5所構成· 經濟部中央標率局貝工消費合作社印製 此外，第50圚的日文髙速排列的主鍵21〜35， 基本上係配合第2 8圖所顯示的高速排列而設定的，在母 音區域20A的各鍵21、22、26、27、28、 31的移位位置（第2文字碼）設定爲「you，yu， yuu，ya，。，yo」，鍵31的非移位位置作爲第 3文字碼而設定爲「 UU」，鍵25的移位位置設定爲 點「·」，鍵33，34的第2移位位置（第3文字碼） 設定爲「F」、「V」之處與第28圖之排列不同· 此外，第51圖的英文排列的主鍵21〜35，基本 上係配合第2 5圖所示之英文排列而設定的，母音區域 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X297公釐） 413779 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明（SI ) 20A的各鍵21、22、26、27、31的移位位置 (第2文字碼）設定爲逗點「， j 、句點「.」、「J」 、「Q」，鍵31設定爲「〇八？8」鍵、鍵25、35 分別於移位位置設定爲「C」、「L」之處與第25圖之 排列不同· 此外，支援鍵51〜55，於鍵51設定爲「Space 」鍵，於鍵5 2設定爲回到日文標準排列之「扣邙」鍵， 於鍵5 3設定爲切換至片假名輸入的「力于」鍵，與第 4 9圖的日文標準排列相異，但除此之外其他均相同· 於第5 2圊的數字排列，主鍵2 0的中央設定爲3列 的數字鍵，左右2列設定爲算術符號。具體而言，主鍵® 域20的上段由左端開始於鍵21設定爲「―」，於鍵 22設定爲「7」，於鍵23設定爲「8」，於鍵24設 定爲「9」，於鍵25設定爲「/j ，另外中段由左側開 始依序於鍵26設定爲「+」，於鍵27設定爲「4」， 於鍵28設定爲「5」，於鍵29設定爲「6」，於鍵 30設定爲「*」，進而於下段由左側開始依序於鍵31 設定爲「0」，於鍵32設定爲「1」，於鍵33設定爲 「2」，於鍵34設定爲「3」，於鍵35設定爲「.j 〇 此外，支援鍵5 1〜5 5與第5 1_的英文排列相同 〇 於第5 3圖的記號排列，主鍵2 0的左側2列設定爲 括弧記號，右側3列設定爲各種記號•具體而言，主鍵區 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS } A4规格（2丨0X297公釐） (請先《讀背面之注項再填寫本買) -84 - 經濟部中央樣準局貝工消费合作社印製 413779 A7 B7 五、發明説明（82 ) 域20的上段由左端開始於鍵21設定爲「&lt;」，於鍵 22設定爲「&gt;」，於鍵23設定爲「；」，於鍵24設 定爲「：」，於鍵25設定爲「/」，另外中段由左側開 始依序於鍵26設定爲「（」，於鍵27設定爲「）j ， 於鍵28設定爲「@」，於鍵29設定爲「#」，於鍵3 0設定爲「*」，進而於下段由左側開始依序於鍵31設 定爲「〔」，於鍵32設定爲「〕」，於鍵33設定爲_「 !」，於鍵34設定爲「？」，於鍵35設定爲「=」。 此外，支援鍵5 1〜5 5與第5 1圚的英文排列相同 〇 這些第4 9圖〜第5 3圓所示之鍵排列也於前述各實 施形態相同，可以進行2種輕觸输入操作，而分別输入第 1及第2文字碼.· 進而，畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置在追加電話功能的場 合，如第5 4圓所示，適於電話功能的各種鍵所設定的鍵 排列顯示於畫面，而實現電話功能亦可》 此外於前述各實施形態，例如，各鍵2 1〜3 5的鍵 區域內的左右設定爲文字的場合，左側部作爲第1文字碼 ，右側部作爲第2文字碼，而將此次序顛倒，以右側部爲 第.1文字碼，以左側部爲第2文字碼的設定亦可。同樣的 ，各_2 1〜3 5的非移位位置（下側）作爲第1文字碼 ，移位位置（上側）作爲第2文字碼，但是要將次序顛倒 ，以非移位位置爲第2文字碼，以移位位置爲第1文字碼 的設定亦可。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4规格（210X 297公釐） (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本I) 表· 訂 -85 - 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 413^9 A7 __B7_五、發明説明（83 ) 產業上利用之可能性 如以上所述，本發明相關的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置 ，作爲各種資訊處理裝置的输入裝置相當有用，特別是適 &lt; 用於各種攜帶個人電腦，電子手冊，攜帶資訊終端機（ P D A )等小型的資訊處理裝置所組裝進去的輸入裝置。 圖面之簡單說明 第1圖係本發明第1實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤输入 裝置的斜視圖。 第2圖係畫面顯示式输入裝置之日語用的鍵排列之平 面圖。 第3圖係畫商顯示式输入裝置之英語用的鍵排列之平 面圖β 第4圖係畫面顯示式輸入裝置之內部構成方塊圖。 第5圖係畫面顯示式输入裝置之顯示輸入處理步驟之 流程圖。 第6圖係畫面顯示式输入裝置之判定手段之說明圖· 第7圓係輕觸输入的判定方法說明圖》 .第8圖係輕觸輸入的其他判定方法說明圖》 第9圖係本發明第2賁施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤输入 裝置之日文按鍵排列之平面圖。 第10圖係本發明第2實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置之英文按鍵排列之平面圖。 本纸張尺度適用中國國家榇準（CNS ) Α4規格（2Ι〇Χ2ί&gt;7公釐） 一 86 _ n i^i ^^1 n· ^^1 ^^1 ^^1 n« I . J 1^1 I ^^1 ^^1 Hi (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 413779 經濟部中央樣準局員工消費合作社印裝 A7 B7五、發明説明（84 ) 第11圜係本發明第3實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置之日文按鍵排列之平面圖· 第12圖係本發明第3實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤输 入裝置之英文按鍵排列之平面圖。 第13圖係本發明第3實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤输 入裝置的判定手段之作用之說明圖* 第14圖係第3實施形態的之輕觸输入之判定方法之 說明圖。 第15圖係本發明第4實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置的斜視圖。 第1 6圖係本發明第4實施形態的畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置的判定手段之作用之說明圖· 第17圓係本發明第3實施形態及第4實施形態的各 畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置的輸入操作之示意圖。 第18圚係本發明之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置的輕觸 輸入操作之變形例說明圓。 第1 9圖係本發明之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置的輕觸 輸入操作之其他變形例說明圓· 第2 0圖係本發明之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置以外的 變形例斜視圖。 第21圖係本發明之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置以外的 其他變形例斜視圖· 第2 2圖係本發明第5實施形態的畫面輕觸式輸入裝 置的斜視圖。 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準（CNS ) A4说格（210X297公釐） 一 -87 - (請先S讀背面之注意事項再瑣寫本頁) 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作杜印裂 五、發明説明（85 ) 第2 3圓係畫面輕觸式輸入裝置的鍵排列之標準排列 之平面圖β 第2 4圖係畫面輕觸式輸入裝置的鍵排列之構成之示 意方塊圖》 第2 5圖係畫面輕觸式输入裝置的鍵排列之英文排列 之平面圖· 第2 6圖係畫面輕觸式输入裝置的鍵排列之數字排列 之平面圖》 第2 7圖係畫面輕觸式輸入裝置的鍵排列之記號排列 之平面圖。 第2 8圖係畫面輕觸式输入裝置的鍵排列之髙速排列 之平面圖。 第2 9圖係畫面輕觸式輸入裝置的鍵排列之QWERTY式 英文專用排列之平面圖。 第3 0圖係畫面輕觸式输入裝置的鍵排列之QWERTY式 曰文專用排列之平面圖， 第31圖係畫面輕觸式輸入裝置的內部構成示意方塊 第3 2圖係蜜面輕觸式輸入裝置的输入處理步驟之流 程圖^ 第3 3圖係畫面輕觸式輸入裝置的移位輸入手段的構 成示意方塊圖。 第3 4圖係說明單按式移位输入手段的機能之說明圓 (請先聞讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) 裝. ,π 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼（CNS ) A4規格（210X297公釐） -88 _ 413779 A7 B7 經濟部中央揲準局貞工消费合作社印裝 五、 發明説明（86 ) 1 1 第3 5 圖 係 說 明 領域 區 分 式 移 位 輸 入 手 段 的 機 能 之 說 1 I 明 圖 〇 1 1 第3 6 圖 係 本 發 明 其 他 實 施形 態 的 畫 面 輕觸 式输 入 裝 1 I 請 1 1 置 的 斜視 圖 先 聞 1 | 讀 1 I 第3 7 圖 係 本 發 明 第 6 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 輕 觸 式输 入 裝 背 St 1 | 之 1 置 的 斜視 圖 0 注 | 1 I 第3 8 圖 係 第 6 實 施 形 態 的 啓動 jliS 用 軟 體 的 狀 態 的 -斜 項 再 1 1 1 填 f 視 圚 〇 寫 本 裝 頁 1 第3 9 圊 係 第 6 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面輕觸式输 入 裝 置 的 內 1 部 構 成示 意 方 塊 圖 0 1 1 第4 0 圖 係 本 發 明 第 6 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 輕觸 式 输 入 裝 1 1 置 的 輸入 處 理 步 驟 之 流 程 圖 0 訂 | 第4 1 圖 係 本 發 明 第 6 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 輕 觸 式 輸 入 裝 t I 置 的 鍵排 列 之 變 形 例 之 平 面 圖 〇 1 1 I 第4 2 圖 係 本發 明 第 6 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 輕 觸 式 輸 入 裝 J 1 t 1 置 的 鍵排列 之其 他 變 形 例 之 平 面 圖 0 第4 3 圏 係 第 7 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 顯 示 式 鍵 盤輸 入 裝 置 1 1 的 斜 視圖 〇 I l 第4 4 圖 係 第 7 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 顯 示 式 鍵 盤 输 入 裝 置 1 I 的 內 部構 成 示 意 方 塊 圖 〇 1 1 I 第4 5 圖 係 第 7 實 施形 態 的 畫 面 顯 示 式 /KfL 鍵 盤 輸 入 裝 置 1 1 的 鍵 盤之 AtiL 鍵 排 列 之 平 面 圖 9 1 1 第4 6 圖 係 第 7 實 施 形 態 的 畫 面 顯 示 式 鍵盤 输 入 裝 置 1 1 的 輸 入處 理 步 驟 之 示 意 流 程 圓 0 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家榇準（CNS ) A4規格（2丨OX297公釐） 一 89 - 4 m λ： A7 B7 圖 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（87) 第4 7圚係畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置以外的實施形態 之斜視圖。 第4 8圖係畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置以外的其他實施 形態之斜視圖。 第4 9圖係供輕觭输入用之顯示日文输入排列之平面 第5 0圖係供輕觸输入用之顯示日文高速排列之平面 圓* 第51圖係供輕觸输入用之顯示英文输入排列之平面 圖。 第5 2圖係供輕觸輸入用之顯示數字輸入排列之平面 圖· 第5 3圖係供輕觸輸入用之顯示記號輸入排列之平面 圖 第5 4圖係供輕觸輸入用之顯示電話功能排列之平面 第5 5園係供說明從前的QWERTY排列之平面圖· 第5 6圖係供說明從前的日文5 0音排列之平面圈· 主要元件對照表 1 畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝置 2 本體 3 液晶畫面 10 資料顯示區域 {請先閱讀背面之注意事項4Ϊ爲本頁) 泰紙張尺度適用_國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -90 - 1/ 'Λ： A7. B7 五、發明說明（8δ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 2 按 鍵 输 入 區 域 1 5 筆 2 0 主 鍵 區 域 2 1 ^ -35 主 鍵 4 1、 4 2 、 4 3 模 式鍵 5 0 功 能 &gt;rft- 鍵 區 域 7 1 按 鍵 輸 入 手 段 7 2 選 擇 處 理 手 段 7 3 判 定 手 段 7 4 文 字 產 生 手 段 7 6 畫 素 &lt;請先閱讀背面之注意事項4· _ 4本頁) 本紙張尺度適用尹國圉家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -91 -A7B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (72) That is, as shown in FIG. 37, the screen display keyboard input device 19 of this embodiment 1 5 is the LCD screen 1 of the body 2 On 0 3, icons for starting various software are displayed. 1 1 1 to 1 16 * Also, the number of icons and the type of software to be started with the icons need only be appropriately set. In this embodiment, a startup table calculation, 6 indications 111 ~ 116 of various application software such as database, communication, schedule, message list, word processing, etc. Each icon 111 ~ 116 is started by operating, and each software is started. For example, if the word processing icon 1 1 6 is activated, the text input screen 1 20 is displayed on the screen 1 0 3 as shown in Fig. 38. At this time, if a designated part of the screen 1 0 3 is touched, such as In the aforementioned first embodiment, it is preferable that the key input area 12 is a display-type display text, etc., and it is preferable that the user can tap the input. This on-screen keyboard input device 195 is a block diagram of the internal structure as shown in FIG. 39 and a flowchart showing the processing steps in FIG. 40. It has a screen touch input means 71 and an information selection processing means. 7 2, the information selection processing means 7 2 is composed of the determination means 7 3, the icon selection processing means 7 7 and the application software activation means 7 8. The screen touch input means 71 is to check whether the screen 103 is input by touch with the pen 15 (step 11; the step is replaced by S in the following). Here, if there is a touch input, it is determined by the determination means 7 3 whether the touch input is a lever touch input, that is, whether the pen 15 keeps tapping within the icons 111 to 1 1 6 and moves more than a specified length ( s 1 2) »Judging means 7 3 is the same as the first embodiment described above. With the aforementioned seventh paper size, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied. — — — — ----- 111 ^ — I ------ (Please read the special note on the back.:% page) -75-413779 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Shiyang Standard Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (73) The number of strokes shown in the picture or the length between the start and end points of the touch input shown in Fig. 8 to determine whether the pen 1 5 is in the picture 1 1 1 ~ 1 1 Keep touching and moving more than the specified distance within the area of 6. If it is judged that it is a lever touch input, start the application software "(S13) On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is not a lever touch, that is, the pen 15 moves within a specified length, it is fixed 1 1 Selection processing from 1 to 116 (S 14). The selected icons 111 to 1 1 6 become the processing targets. * Start processing is performed by the designated execution key, or it is deleted by the delete key. According to the present embodiment, the double-click and The start-up process and selection process of the single-click to distinguish the use of the indication can be realized by the pen 15 and the touch input. Therefore, the screen display keyboard input device 195 also has the same operating system and menu system as the previous system using a mouse, which improves the operability and improves the portability of various software. On the other hand, the previous double-press operation of the mouse is not necessarily easy for beginners. In this embodiment, the cursor is touched with the pen 15 as long as the designated length is moved. It is very easy to operate and can improve the operability even more. In the sixth embodiment described above, the activation process shown in the figure is performed by touching the input moving distance with the pen 15, but as in the fifth embodiment, it is performed with the touch time that the pen 15 is continuously pressed. Yes. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the case of normal input, the selection process of 1 1 1 to 1 16 shown in the figure is performed, and other processes can also be performed, such as borrowing (read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) Paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) 4137 猢 Γ A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of invention. (75) On the left side, there is a menu button for holding down as described later. The menu area 211 of the selection menu is displayed in an immediate manner at the same time. In addition, the menu area 2 1 1 and the key input area 2 1 2 can be kept displayed. Generally, the aforementioned display area 2 1 0 occupies almost the entire LCD screen 2 0 3, and touch the selection menu display key or the key input start key displayed on the screen. * A part of the display area 2 1 0 is displayed as required immediately. The display area 2 1 0 can be expanded and the amount of information can be displayed. More advantages · This on-screen keyboard input device 2 01 has an internal structure as shown in Figure 4-4. That is, the full-face type keyboard input device 2 01 is provided with a keyboard input means 2 1 4 ′ provided with a keyboard 2 1 4A and a touch input means 2 1 5 provided with a pen 2 1 5A, and a processing control unit. 2 1 6 and the output control section 2 1 7 of the display output of the control screen 2 0 3, and a row list 2 1 8 in which the key arrangement data is recorded. The keyboard 2 1 4A is a thin and small card-sized object, as shown in circle 43. It can be stored in the body 202 when not in use, and can be used separately from the body 202 when in use. The keyboard input means 214, when each key of the keyboard 214A is input, transmits the information input by the keys to the processing control unit 2 1 2 of the body 2 2 by wireless means 2 1 9 such as radio waves or infrared rays. The body 202 is provided with a holder for holding the pen 215A * so as to prevent the loss of the pen 215A *. On the screen display keyboard input device 2 0 1 When using the pen 2 1 5 A, hold the body 2 with the left hand 0 2, or placed on a table • And this paper is compliant with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) — llllL] llllll — &gt;-I-t III »11 — — — — — — (Please read the precautions on the back before γ ·. ^ This page) 4 Which r: .A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (76) Can be operated by holding the pen in the right hand 2 1 5 A. (Please read the back first Note again &quot; this page) Touch the key of the LCD surface 2 0 3 with the pen 2 15 A to enter each of the area 2 1 2 When the key is touched, the input means 2 1 5 sends the input information of the touched key to the processing control section. In the processing control section 2 1 6, a keyboard 21 4A or a key input area 212 is provided for a shift input means 2 6 0 for inputting shift position data of each displayed key, and a switch is made in the key input area 2 1 2 The arrangement switching means 2 6 3 of the displayed key arrangement, and the data processing means 2 6 4 which processes the input key data, and the two data of the normal position or shift position of each key are selected for input when setting. One of them is a selection input means 2 6 2 and a selection menu display means 2 6 1 that displays a selection menu for switching the key arrangement described above. On the keyboard 214A, as shown in FIG. 45, it is arranged in the same arrangement as the key input area 2 1 2 of the bottom surface 203, and is provided with a main key area 2 2 0, a switch key area 2 4 0, and a function key area 2 5 0 0 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. That is, in the main key area 2 2 0, 15 primary keys 221 to 235 are arranged in 3 columns of 5 columns. In addition, in the switching key area 240, three switching keys 241 to 243 are arranged. Further, in the function key area 250, five function keys 251 to 255 are arranged. That is, the keyboard 2 1 4A includes a switch key 24 1 to 243 and function keys 2 5 1 to 2 5 5 in total. The keys are configured. The surface of these keys, as shown in Fig. 23, shows the keys corresponding to the standard arrangement of the aforementioned embodiment. "The process of the screen display keyboard input device 2 0 1 structured in this way. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4. Specifications (210 x 297 mm) -79-A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs __; __B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (77) The process circle of the 4th and 6th circle is used to explain * First, about Press the key input means 2 1 4 or touch the input means 2 1 5 to detect whether there is an input using the keyboard 2 1 4A or the pen 2 1 5A (step 1, the following steps are replaced by S). Here, if there is an input *, it is determined whether the input is a shift input (second character code input). (S2) This determination may be made by each of the key input means 2 1 4 or by tapping the input means 2 1 5 or may be performed on the processing control unit 2 1 6 side. In addition, in the case of key input, shift The key 2 51 is judged as a shift input β when other keys are simultaneously pressed. In addition, in the case of a touch input, as in the foregoing embodiments, it is judged by the amount of movement of the pen 15 or the length of contact. It is a shift input. When it is determined that the input is shift input, the shift input means 260 performs shift processing using the key at the shift position of the input key as input data (S 3). Next, it is judged whether the input key is a menu key (key 241 in the case of the keyboard 2 1 4A, or the shift position of the corresponding key 241 in the case of the LCD screen 203) (S4). If the menu key is inputted, 'is displayed by the selection menu Means 2 6 1 and is performed in the menu area 2 1 1 The menu display processing for displaying each of the selection menus 271 to 276 (S5) ° On the other hand • If it is not a menu key, it is judged whether it is an arrangement switching input, that is, the switching key area 2 4 Each key of 0 2 4 1 to 2 4 3 is entered 'Select whether or not the menus 271 to 276 are tapped (S6). This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---- llllilill 1 ti 1 I l I-— — — — 111 — (Please read the precautions on the back first (two I)) -80-Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (78) Here * If it is an input for the arrangement switching, the arrangement switching means 2 6 3 is used to switch the arrangement of the specified arrangement list 218 and the arrangement for switching Switching processing (S 7) • If the switching input is not arranged, it is determined whether it is a selection input (S 8). Here, if it is judged that the input is selected, a selection process of selecting one of the set keys is performed (S 9). After the input key is confirmed, the data set by the key is generated by the data processing means 2 6 4 to perform data processing of each function (S10). At this time, the data processing means 264 processes the data based on the character or function corresponding to the input key set by referring to the key list set by the rank list 218. The initial value of the key arrangement is a standard arrangement. As a result of the data processing, the output control unit 2 1 7 outputs the processing to the liquid crystal screen 203 (S11). Through the above process, the processing of each input is ended, and if there is the next input, the above processing is repeated and performed sequentially. In this embodiment, the same effects as those of the previous embodiments can be obtained. In addition to using the pen 2 1 5 A to input the touch input means 2 1 5, since a keyboard 2 1 4A is also provided, the user can Selecting a suitable input method can improve operability. The aforementioned keyboard 2 1 4A is provided so that it can be separated from the main body 202, and the key information input by each key can be sent to the aforementioned processing control unit 2 1 through wireless, and the keypad 2 1 4 can be taken away from the main body. 2 0 2 operation, especially when multiple people watch the same screen 2 3 at the same time, the operator can easily watch the screen 2 3 without being disturbed. {Jing first read the precautions on the back before filling this page) I -i-r &lt; &4; 4I II I. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (2) 0 X 297 mm 81 413779 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Central Standards Bureau Shellfish Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (79) Further • The keyboard 2 1 4A is designed to be housed in the body 2 0 2, and the on-screen keyboard input device 2 0 1 is carried The keyboard 2 1 4A is housed in the main body, and the keyboard 2 1 4A can be taken out and operated only during use, so it can be used as a screen display keyboard input device 2 0 1 with excellent operability and crowdability. The keyboard 2 1 4A is not limited to the on-screen keyboard input device 201 for a broadcast information terminal (PDA), as shown in FIG. 47. * A desktop computer equipped with a main body 362 and a display screen 3 6 3 is used. The on-screen keyboard input device 3 6 1 is also available. As shown in FIG. 48, it is also applicable to a screen display keyboard input device 371 provided with a display device 373 such as a wall-mounted TV. However, in this case, one of the key arrangement methods displayed by the display device 3 7 3, if Each TV channel can be set to correspond to each key, and the switching operation of the TV channel can also be realized by using the aforementioned keyboard 214A. In addition, when the keyboard 2 1 4A is used in combination, when the keys 2 1 to 3 5 are depressed, the inputted characters are displayed in the key input area 2 1 2 of the screen 2 03, so no characters are displayed on the keyboard 2 1 4A. can. In addition, the arrangement of the character codes set by the main keys 2 1 to 3 5 is not limited to the content described in the foregoing embodiment. As long as it is set appropriately, it can be displayed in Japanese and English on the screen for tap input, for example. The keys, numbers, symbols, etc. can be arranged as shown in Figures 4-9 to 53-3. Specifically, the primary keys 21 to 35 arranged in Japanese in FIG. 49 are basically set in the mother I -------- 装 -I ί I-- Order (please read the note $ on the back before filling this page) The standard of this paper is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) M specification (210 × 297 mm) -82-413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (80) (Please read first Note on the back, fill in this page again.) The shift position (second text code) of each key 21, 22, 26, 27, 28, 31 in the sound area 20A is set to "e, u, i, a, 0, 0. ", The shift position of key 25 is set to the point". ", And the second shift position (third character code) of keys 33 and 34 is set to" F "and" V ". In addition, the support key (function key) area 50 0 is a key 51 having a function of "Enter (Return)", a function of converting hiragana characters, and a space input function, and no conversion and switching of a character that does not change hiragana to kanji Key 5 2 to the "Num (numerical)" switching function, and a selection function to display the front and back parts of conversion candidates when converting hiragana to Kanji Function key 53 for switching to "Mark (mark)" arrangement, key 5 4 for back function and switching function for switching to English arrangement, and key for switching function of DEL function and switching to half-angle mode Composition of 5 · Printed by the Shell Standard Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In addition, the 50th Japanese speed-ranked primary keys 21 ~ 35 are basically set in accordance with the high-speed array shown in Figure 28. In the vowel area 20A, the shift positions (second character codes) of the keys 21, 22, 26, 27, 28, and 31 are set to "you, yu, yuu, ya,., Yo", and the non-shift of the key 31 The position is set to "UU" as the third character code, the shift position of key 25 is set to the point "·", and the second shift position (third character code) of keys 33, 34 is set to "F", "V ”Is different from the arrangement in Figure 28. In addition, the main keys 21 to 35 of the English arrangement in Figure 51 are basically set in accordance with the English arrangement shown in Figures 25. The vowel area is the same as the Chinese standard for this paper. Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 413779 Printed by Fei Cooperative A7 B7 Fifth, the description of the invention (SI) 20A The shift position (second text code) of each key 21, 22, 26, 27, 31 is set to comma ", j, period". "," J ”,“ Q ”, key 31 is set to“ 〇 八? 8 ”, keys 25 and 35 are set to“ C ”and“ L ”respectively at the shift position, and the arrangement is different from that in Figure 25. In addition, support The keys 51 to 55 are set to the "Space" key at key 51, the "button" key to return to the Japanese standard arrangement at key 5 2 and the "force at" key to switch to katakana input at key 5 3 It is different from the standard Japanese arrangement shown in Figures 4 and 9, but is otherwise the same. For the arrangement of numbers in the 5th and 2nd, the center of the main key 20 is set to the three-row number key, and the left and right columns are set to arithmetic. symbol. Specifically, the upper section of the main key ® field 20 starts from the left end and is set to "―" on key 21, "7" on key 22, "8" on key 23, and "9" on key 24, and The key 25 is set to "/ j", and the middle section is set to "+" from key 26 in order, set to "4" at key 27, "5" at key 28, and "6" at key 29. , Set to "*" at key 30, and then set to "0" at key 31 in sequence from the left, set to "1" at key 32, "2" at key 33, and set to 34 at key 34 "3" is set to ".j" in key 35. In addition, the English arrangement of support keys 5 1 to 5 5 is the same as the English arrangement of 5 1_ 0. The arrangement of the symbols in Fig. 53 is 2 and the left two columns of main key 20 are set to Bracket marks, 3 columns on the right are set for various marks. • Specifically, the paper size of the primary keypad is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS} A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) (please read the notes on the back before filling in this purchase) -84-Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards and Quarantine of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative 413779 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (82) The upper section of the field 20 starts from the left end and is set to key 21 as "&Lt;" is set to "&gt;" on key 22, ";" to key 23, ":" to key 24, and "/" to key 25, and the middle section starts from the left in order. Key 26 is set to "(", key 27 is set to ") j, key 28 is set to" @ ", key 29 is set to" # ", key 30 is set to" * ", and then from the left in the next paragraph. Start by setting "[" on key 31, "]" on key 32, "_" on key 33, "?" On key 34, and "=" on key 35. The key arrangement of the support keys 5 1 to 5 5 is the same as the English arrangement of the 51st 圚. These key arrangements shown in the 4th to 9th circles are also the same as in the previous embodiments, and two types of touch input operations can be performed. Enter the first and second character codes separately. · Furthermore, when the screen display keyboard input device adds a telephone function, as shown in the fifth and fourth circles, the key arrangement set by various keys suitable for the telephone function is displayed on the screen. It is also possible to realize the telephone function. In addition to the foregoing embodiments, for example, the left and right in the key area of each key 2 1 to 35 are set to In the case of characters, the left part is used as the first character code, and the right part is used as the second character code, and the order is reversed, and the right part is used as the .1 character code and the left part is used as the second character code. , The non-shifted position (lower side) of each _2 1 to 3 5 is used as the first text code, and the shifted position (upper side) is used as the second text code, but the order is reversed, and the non-shifted position is second The text code can also be set with the shift position as the first text code. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this I) Form · RE-85-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413 ^ 9 A7 __B7_ V. Description of the Invention (83) Possibility of Industrial Utilization As mentioned above, the screen display keyboard input device related to the present invention is used as Input devices of various information processing devices are quite useful, and are particularly suitable for input devices incorporated in various small information processing devices such as portable personal computers, electronic manuals, and portable information terminals (PDAs). Brief Description of the Drawings Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a screen display keyboard input device according to a first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of a Japanese key arrangement for a screen display input device. Fig. 3 is a plan view of an English key arrangement of a display-type input device for a dealer. Fig. 4 is a block diagram of the internal structure of the screen-type input device. Fig. 5 is a flowchart of the display input processing steps of the screen display input device. Fig. 6 is an explanatory diagram of the judging means of the screen display input device. Fig. 7 is an explanatory diagram of the judging method of the touch input. Fig. 8 is an explanatory diagram of the judging method of the touch input. Fig. 9 is the present invention. A plan view of the Japanese key arrangement of the on-screen keyboard input device in the second embodiment. Fig. 10 is a plan view of an English key arrangement of an on-screen keyboard input device according to a second embodiment of the present invention. This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 (2Ι〇Χ2ί &gt; 7 mm)-86 _ ni ^ i ^^ 1 n · ^^ 1 ^^ 1 ^^ 1 n «I. J 1 ^ 1 I ^^ 1 ^^ 1 Hi (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 413779 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Procurement Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (84) The 11th line is the first Plan view of Japanese key arrangement of the screen display keyboard input device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a plan view of the English key arrangement of the screen display keyboard input device according to the third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the function of the judging means of the on-screen keyboard input device according to the third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 14 is an explanatory diagram of the judging method of touch input according to the third embodiment. Fig. 15 is a perspective view of an on-screen keyboard input device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining the function of a judging means of a screen display keyboard input device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 17 is a diagram of each screen display keyboard input device according to the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. Schematic diagram of the input operation. The eighteenth aspect is a modified example of the touch input operation of the on-screen keyboard input device of the present invention. Fig. 19 is a perspective view illustrating another modification of the touch input operation of the screen display keyboard input device of the present invention. Fig. 20 is a perspective view of a modification example other than the screen display keyboard input device of the present invention. Fig. 21 is a perspective view of a modification other than the screen display keyboard input device of the present invention. Fig. 22 is a perspective view of the screen touch input device of the fifth embodiment of the present invention. This paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 format (210X297 mm) I-87-(Please read the precautions on the back and write this page first) 413779 A7 B7 Offical and Consumer Cooperation of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du Yinye V. Description of the invention (85) The plan view of the standard arrangement of the key arrangement of the touch input device of the circular screen 2 on the 3rd part of the screen. "Figure 2 5 is a plan view of the English arrangement of the key arrangement of the screen touch input device. Figure 2 6 is a plan view of the numerical arrangement of the key arrangement of the screen touch input device." Figure 2 7 is a screen touch type A plan view of the key arrangement of the input device. Fig. 28 is a plan view of the key arrangement of the touch input device in a rapid arrangement. Fig. 29 is a plan view of the QWERTY English-only arrangement of the key arrangement of the touch input device on the screen. Figure 30 is a plan view of the QWERTY-style Japanese-style special arrangement of the key arrangement of the touch input device on the screen. Figure 31 is a schematic block diagram of the internal structure of the touch input device on the screen. Flow chart of the input processing steps of the device ^ Figures 3 and 3 are block diagrams showing the structure of the shift input means of the screen touch input device. Figures 3 and 4 are explanatory circles explaining the function of the one-touch shift input method (please read the note f on the back before filling in this page). Π This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) -88 _ 413779 A7 B7 Printed by Zhengong Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (86) 1 1 No. 3 5 The function of the discriminating shift input means in the field 1 I 明 图 〇1 1 The third 6 is a screen touch input device 1 of the other embodiment of the present invention 1 I Please view the oblique view of the first 1 1 | Read 1 I The third 7 is a sixth embodiment of the present invention Screen of the touch input device St 1 | The perspective view of the first position 0 Note | 1 I Figure 3 8 Figure 6 shows the status of the jliS software in the sixth embodiment. 〇 Copybook 1 Page 3 9 This is a schematic block diagram of the internal structure of the screen touch input device of the sixth embodiment. 0 1 1 4 0 Figure is the screen touch input device of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 1 Flow chart of the input processing steps for 1 set 0 Order | 4 1 Figure is a plan view of a modification example of the key arrangement of the screen touch input device t I device of the sixth embodiment of the present invention 〇 1 1 I 4 2 A plan view of another modification of the key arrangement of the screen touch input device J 1 t 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention is a perspective view of the screen display keyboard input device 1 1 according to the seventh embodiment. I l Figure 4 4 is a block diagram showing the internal structure of the on-screen keyboard input device 1 I of the seventh embodiment. 0 1 1 I Figure 4 5 Screen display type / KfL keyboard input device 1 1 of the seventh embodiment is a plan view of the arrangement of the AtiL keys of the keyboard 9 1 1 4 4 is a schematic diagram of the input processing steps of the screen display keyboard input device 1 1 of the seventh embodiment Flow circle 0 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (2 丨 OX297 mm)-89-4 m λ: A7 B7 Figure printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 87) Section 4 is a perspective view of an embodiment other than an on-screen keyboard input device. Figures 4 and 8 are perspective views of embodiments other than the on-screen keyboard input device. Figure 4 9 is a plane for displaying Japanese input arrangement for tap input Figure 50 is a plane circle for displaying Japanese high-speed arrangement for tap input * Picture 51 is for displaying English input arrangement for tap input Floor plan. Figure 5 2 is a plan view showing the arrangement of digital input for touch input. Figure 5 3 is a plan view showing the arrangement of display mark input for touch input. Figure 5 4 is a display arrangement of display phone functions for touch input. The 5th and 5th plane of the plane are used to explain the previous QWERTY arrangement. The 5th and 6th diagrams are used to explain the previous Japanese 50-tone arrangement. · The main component comparison table 1 On-screen keyboard input device 2 Body 3 LCD screen 10 Data display area {Please read the notes on the back 4ΪThis page) Thai paper size applicable _ National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -90-1 / 'Λ: A7. B7 V. Description of the invention (8δ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 2 Key input area 1 5 Pen 2 0 Primary key area 2 1 ^ -35 Primary key 4 1, 4 2, 4 3 Mode key 5 0 Function &gt; rft- Key area 7 1 Key input means 7 2 Selection processing means 7 3 Judgment means 7 4 Text generation means 7 6 Pixels &lt; Please read the precautions on the back 4 · _ 4 P) This paper applies the scale prince Yu Yin home country standards (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) -91--

Claims (1)

修jl補充&gt; A8 B8 C8 D8 申請專利範圍 第86101883號專利申請案 中文申請專利範圍修正本 民國89年4月修正 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 1 一種畫面 面上之鍵而輸入之 顯示於畫面上之鍵 之第1及第2的兩 示領域內之使用筆 畫面上的游標之游 手段的鍵選擇操作 第2文字碼之一而 式鍵盤輸出裝置， 係基於：鍵區域內 鍵區域內接觸壓力 各鍵區域之中進而 的接觸次數等各種 2 .如申請專 置，其中，前述鍵 領域而输入之輕觸 ，係具有：判斷前 持輕觸的狀態所移 段，及藉由此判定 按鍵的狀態下移動 顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，係選擇顯示於畫 畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，其中，前述 •至少設定爲表示文字 '數字、記號等 個文字碼，同時具備有指示前述鍵的顯 或是手指之接觸式，或者是使用顯示於 標式鍵盤輸入手段，及判斷此鍵盤輸入 之不同而分別選擇設定於各鍵之第1及 爲輸出處理之選擇處理手段之畫面顯示 其特徵爲爲：前述鍵選擇操作的區別， 的移動長度、鍵區域接觸的時間長短* 的大小、是否按下畫面外按鍵的操作、 被區分的區域中的被接觸區域、以及鍵 方式之任一方式而進行區別的。 利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝 盤输入手段係以輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵 式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段 述輕觸式輸入手段在前述按鍵領域內保 動的距離是否較指定距離爲長之判定手 手段在判定前述輕觸式輸入手段在輕觸 的距離較指定的距離爲短的場合*選擇 t 閱 讀 .背 Φ 之 注 意 事 項 再 填 寫裝 頁I I I 訂 線 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -1 - 修jl補充&gt; A8 B8 C8 D8 申請專利範圍 第86101883號專利申請案 中文申請專利範圍修正本 民國89年4月修正 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 1 一種畫面 面上之鍵而輸入之 顯示於畫面上之鍵 之第1及第2的兩 示領域內之使用筆 畫面上的游標之游 手段的鍵選擇操作 第2文字碼之一而 式鍵盤輸出裝置， 係基於：鍵區域內 鍵區域內接觸壓力 各鍵區域之中進而 的接觸次數等各種 2 .如申請專 置，其中，前述鍵 領域而输入之輕觸 ，係具有：判斷前 持輕觸的狀態所移 段，及藉由此判定 按鍵的狀態下移動 顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，係選擇顯示於畫 畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，其中，前述 •至少設定爲表示文字 '數字、記號等 個文字碼，同時具備有指示前述鍵的顯 或是手指之接觸式，或者是使用顯示於 標式鍵盤輸入手段，及判斷此鍵盤輸入 之不同而分別選擇設定於各鍵之第1及 爲輸出處理之選擇處理手段之畫面顯示 其特徵爲爲：前述鍵選擇操作的區別， 的移動長度、鍵區域接觸的時間長短* 的大小、是否按下畫面外按鍵的操作、 被區分的區域中的被接觸區域、以及鍵 方式之任一方式而進行區別的。 利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝 盤输入手段係以輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵 式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段 述輕觸式輸入手段在前述按鍵領域內保 動的距離是否較指定距離爲長之判定手 手段在判定前述輕觸式輸入手段在輕觸 的距離較指定的距離爲短的場合*選擇 t 閱 讀 .背 Φ 之 注 意 事 項 再 填 寫裝 頁I I I 訂 線 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -1 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 413779 I D8 六、申請專利範圍 輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，輕觸式輸入手段的移動 距離被判定爲在指定長度以上的場合，選擇輸出該按鍵所 被設定的第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 3. 如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝 置，其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵 領域而輸入之輕觸式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段 *係具有：判斷前述輕觸式輸入手段在前述按鍵領域內保 持輕觸的狀態之持續時間是否較指定時間爲長之判定手段 ，及藉由此判定手段在判定前述輕觸式輸入手段在輕觸按 鍵的狀態下之持續時間較指定的時間爲短的場合，選擇輸 出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，輕觸式輸入手段的持續時 間被判定爲在指定時間以上的場合，選擇輸出該按鍵所被 設定的第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 4. 如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝 置，其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵 領域而輸入之輕觸式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段 ，係具有：判斷前述輕觸式輸入手段在前述按鍵領域內輕 觸的壓力是否在指定壓力以上之判定手段，及藉由此判定 手段在判定前述輕觸式輸入手段在輕觸壓力大於指定壓力 的場合，選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，輕觸式输 入手段的輕觸壓力較指定壓力爲小的場合，選擇输出該按 鍵所被設定的第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 5. 如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝 置，其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------ ------— —訂---------I {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -2 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 413779 擇 D8 、申請專利範圍 領域而輸入之輕觸式輸入手段及設於畫面外之按鍵所構成 ，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：在沒有按下按鍵的狀態下 藉由前述輕觸式輸入手段在前述按鍵領域內輕觸的場合， 選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，在按下按鍵的同時 藉由前述輕觸式輸入手段在前述按鍵領域內輕觸的場合， 選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 6.如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤输入裝 置，其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以輕觸顯示於畫面之各鍵 領域而輸入之輕觸式輸入手段所構成，前述選擇處理手段 ，在各鍵領域內被區分之第1及第2的各領域之中判定何 者被輕觸之判定手段，及藉此判定手段在判斷係第1領域 被輕觸時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段 在判斷係第2領域被輕觸時選擇输出該鍵所被設定之第2 文字碼之文字產生手段。 7 .如申請專利範圍第2、3 ' 4、5或6項之畫面 顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，其中前述輕觸式輸入手段，係使用 輕觸筆的筆式输入手段。 8 ·如申請專利範圍第2、3、4、5或6項之畫面 顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，其中前述輕觸式輸入手段，係使用 手指輕觸畫面的輕觸螢幕式輸入手段。 9.如申請専利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝 置’其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以顯示於畫面之游標輕觸 顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而输入之游標式輸入手段所構成， 前述選擇處理手段’係具有：在前述游標位於各鍵領域內 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） &lt;請先閲讀嘴面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · —------^ · I -----I I I -3 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 413779 i D8 六、申請專利範圍 的狀態判定游標式輸入手段所設之第1及第2按鍵之中之 何按鍵被壓下之判定手段，及藉此判定手段在判斷係第1 按鍵被壓下時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定 手段在判斷係第2按鍵被壓下時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之 第2文字碼之文字產生手段。 10. 如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入 裝置，其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以顯示於畫面之游標輕 觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之游標式輸入手段所構成 ，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：在前述游標位於各鍵領域 內的狀態判定游標式輸入手段所設之按鍵是否在曾被壓下 或者是正被壓下的狀態下進行移動游標式輸入手段之拖動 操作（DRAG)之判定手段，及藉此判定手段在判斷游 標式輸入手段之按鍵被壓下過的場合，選擇輸出該鍵所被 設定之第1文字碼，判定手段在判斷輸入手段曾被拖動的 場合，選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字碼之文字產生手 段。 11. 如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入 裝置，其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以顯示於畫面之游檫輕 觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之游標式輸入手段所構成 ，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判定使用前述游標式输入 手段在指定時間內鍵被輕觸多少次之判定手段，及藉此判 定手段在判斷該鍵在指定時間內被輕觸1次時選擇輸出該 鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段在判斷該鍵在指定時 間內被輕觸2次時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字碼之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS&gt;A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------^--------訂！--線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一 4 一 is 413779 六、申請專利範圍 文字產生手段。 請 先 閲 讀 .背 面 之 Ίί 意 事 項 再 填 本 頁 1 2 .如申請專利範圍第1項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入 裝置’其中，前述鍵盤輸入手段係以顯示於畫面之游檩輕 觸顯示於畫面之各鍵領域而輸入之游標式輸入手段所構成 ，前述選擇處理手段，係具有：判斷在各鍵領域內所被區 分的第1及第2的各領域之中是何領域被輕觸之判定手段 ，及藉此判定手段在判斷係第1領域被輕觸時選擇輸出該 鍵所被設定之第1文字碼，判定手段在判斷係第2領域被 輕觸時選擇輸出該鍵所被設定之第2文字碼之文字產生手 段。 1 3 .如申請專利範圍第1、2、3、4、5、6、 9、1 0、1 1或1 2項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸入裝置，其 中，於前述畫面上，顯示上下3段左右5列之1 5個主鍵 ’各主鍵至少顯示對應第1及第2文字碼之記號。 1 4 .如申請專利範圍第1 3項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置，其中，前述1 5個主鍵之中，上段的5個鍵之各 鍵領域內的左部由左側開始依序顯示「Qj 、 「E」、「 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印f T」、「U」、「0」，中段的5個鍵之各鍵領域內的左 部由左側開始依序顯示「A」、「D」、「Gj 、 、「L」，下段的4個鍵之各鍵領域內的左部由左側開始 依序顯示「Z」，「C」、「Β」、「M」，前述顯示「 Q」、「E」、「T」、「U」、「〇」、「A」、「D 」' 「G」、「J」、「Z」、「c」、「B」之各鍵的 領域內右側，分別顯示「W」、「R , 、「γ」、「I」 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公f ) 413779 8888 ABCD 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 、「Pj、「S」、rF」、「η」、「K」、ΓΧ」' 「V j 、「N」。 15·如申請專利範圍第14項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置，其中，前述顯示「L」、「Μ」之各鍵的領域內 右側分別顯示長音符號「一」，及逗點「、」：下段右端 之鍵的領域內左部顯示句點「。」，右邊顯示記號「.」 〇 16. 如申請專利範圍第14項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置，其中，於前述顯示「L」、「Μ」之各鍵之領域 內右側分別顯示分號「； j 、逗點「，」；下段右端的鍵 領域內的左部顯示英文句點「·」·右邊顯示冒號「： j 〇 17. 如申請專利範圍第13項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置，其中，前述1 5個主鍵所構成之主鍵區域之中， 左右任一方之基準側配置爲2列之6個主鍵分別設定爲輸 入代表日語之母音的英文字母「A」、「I」、「U」、 「E」、「0」等母音鍵以及輸入撥音「人」之撥音鍵， 前述主鍵區域剩下來的三列配置之9個主鍵設定爲輸入之 「K」、「S」、「T」、「N」、「Η」、「Μ」、「 Υ」、「R」、「评」子音鍵，同時其中「1(」、「Sj 、「T」、「N」、「Η」等各鍵的位移狀態下設定爲輸 入「G」、「Z」、「D」、「Pj 、 「B」等之鍵。 1 8 .如申請專利範圍第1 3項之畫面顯示式鍵盤输 入裝置，其中，前述1 5個主鍵所構成之主鍵區域之中， ------------发 ------ - 訂--I--1---線 1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 一 6 _ 413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 左 右任 •~· 方 之基 準側之配 置 爲 2列 的 6 個 主 鍵 之 中 的5 個 鍵 設 定 爲 輸 入「 A j ' Γ I j ,Γ u j 厂 E j 「0 j 之 鍵 &gt; 前述 主鍵 區域剩下 來 的 配置 爲 3 列 之 9 個 主 鍵分 別 請 設 定 爲 輸 入 「K J 、 r S J 「Τ J 厂 N J 、 广 Η」 、 先 間 讀 Γ Μ J 、 厂 Y J 「R j &quot;W J 之鍵 同時前述「A 背 面 之 J 、 厂 I J 、Γ u J 、Γ E j 1 r 0 J 之 鍵 之 各 位 移狀 態 注 意 事 下 設 定 爲 厂 Q j &gt; r J J 逗 點「 9 J ·* 句 點 厂 〇 j 、 厂 項 爯 「K 填 X j 前 述 J 、 r S j 「Τ J Γ N J Γ H j 寫 本 厂 Μ J 厂 Y」 -R」 、 Γ w」 各 鍵 的 移 位 狀 態 下設 定 頁 Nw&gt;- 爲 输 入 厂 G J \ 厂 Z J 厂 D J X 厂 P J 厂 B j 厂 C J 、 Γ F j % 厂 V J 厂 L j 之 鍵 〇 1 9 • 如 丰 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 3 項 之 畫 面 顯 示 式 鍵 盤输 入 裝 置 ， 其 中 9 前 述 1 5 個 主 鍵 設 定 數字 厂 0 j 數字 Γ 1 J 、 數 字 厂 2 j 、 數 字 厂 3 j 數 字 厂 4 j 數 字 厂 5 J % 數 字 厂 6 j 數 字 Γ 7 j 數 字 厂 8 j 、 數 字 厂 9 j 、 記 號 厂 j 記 號 厂 — j 、 記 號 Γ X J 或 者 厂 * J ·· 記 號 厂 + j 或 者 厂 / J 、 記 號 厂 * j 等 輸 入 鍵 〇 2 0 • 如 串 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 3 項 之 畫 面 顯 示 式 鍵 盤 輸 入 裝 置 其 中 前 述 1 5 個 主 鍵其第 1 及 第 2 文 字 碼 分 別 設定 爲 輸 入 括 弧 厂 厂 J 、 Γ J J Γ ( J 、 厂 ) j 厂 &lt; J 厂 &gt; j 厂 ( J % Γ ] J % Γ { j &gt; 厂 } j ' 厂 t J 厂 * j 厂 j &gt; 厂 » J % 冒 號 Γ ： J 、 分 號 Γ t j 、 星 號 厂 * J 、 井 字 號 Γ # J a η d 鍵 厂 &amp; j % 問 號 厂 ? 」、修飾記號「丨」、記號「/」、記號「〜」、修飾記 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -7 - 413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 號「@」、美元 _」、記號「= 2 1 ·如申 入裝置，其中， 左右任一方之基 入代表日語之母 「E」、「0」 前述主鍵區域剩 記號「$」、日圓記號「¥」、連字號「 」等輸入鍵。 請專利範圍第13項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 前述15個主鍵所構成之主鍵區域之中， 準側配置爲2列之6個主鍵分別設定爲输 音的英文字母「A」、「I」、「U」、 等母音鍵以及輸入撥音「人」之撥音鍵， 下來的三列配置之9個主鍵設定爲輸入之 「K」 、厂S」 ,Γ T 」、「N」、「Η」 、「Μ Y」、 「R」、 「W J 子音鍵，同時「A」 、Γ I U」、 「E」、 「0 J 等母音鍵以及撥音鍵 「人」 的狀態設定爲輸 E I j 、「0 U 、「T」、「N 「W」等各鍵的 「D」、「P」 點「。」、長音 2 2 .如申 入裝置，其中， 左右任一方之基 入代表日語之母 「E」、「0」 前述主鍵區域2 入之「K」、Γ 入「ΑΙ」、「UI」、「UU 」、「丫1：1；」之鍵，而「1^」 丨、「Η^'ΓΜι'Γγ,、 S 請 先 閱 讀 .背 面 之 注 意 事 項 再 填I裝 本 -頁 I I 訂 R 「Ζ」 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 位移狀態下設定爲輸入「G」、 、「：Β」、促音「。」、逗點「 「一」等等之鍵。 請專利範圍第13項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 前述15個主鍵所構成之主鍵區域之中， 準側配置爲2列之6個主鍵分別設定爲輸 音的英文字母「Α」、「I」、「U」、 等母音鍵以及輸入撥音「人」之撥音鍵， 0剩下來的三列配置之9個主鍵設定爲輸 S」' 「T」、「N」、「Η」、「M」 句 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 一 8 - 413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 、「Y」' 「R」、「W」子音鍵，同時「A」、「lj 、「Uj ' 「E」' 「Ο」等母音鍵以及撥音鍵「人」在 移位的狀態設定爲輸入「ya」、「yuu」，「yu」 、「you」、「yo」 '促音「。」之鍵，而「Kj 、 「S」、「Τ」、「N」、「Η」、「Μ」'「Y」、「 R」、「W」等各鍵的位移狀態下設定爲輸入「G」、「 Z D P B 點 逗點 句點 長音 等等之鍵 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2 3 *如申請專利範圍第1 3項之畫面顯示式盤输 入裝置，其中*前述1 5個主鍵之中至少有1個鍵在前述 2個文字碼之外設定了第3個文字碼，而前述選擇處理手 段係具有：判斷藉由前述按鍵輸入手段所輸入之選擇第1 〜第3文字碼之按鍵選擇操作之判定手段，及基於此判定 手段所判定的按鍵選擇操作而選擇設定於各鍵之第1〜第 3文字碼之一而進行輸出處理之文字產生手段。 2 4 .如申請專利範圍第1 3項之畫面顯示式鍵盤輸 入裝置，其中，前述1 5個主鍵所構成之主鍵之中至少有 1個健在前述2個文字碼之外了設定第3個文字碼及第4 文字碼，而前述選擇處理手段判斷係具有：判定前述按鍵 輸入手段之4種類按鍵選擇操作之判定手段，及基於此判 定手段所判定的按鍵選擇操作而選擇設定於各鍵之第1〜 第4文字碼之一而進行输出處理之文字產生手段》 2 5 .如專利範圍第 2、3 4、5、6 1 〇、1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（Cl^^規格（210 X 297公釐） 請 先 閱 讀 背 面 之 注 意 事 項 再 填5裝 冬 頁 I 訂 線 9 - 413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍Repair jl supplement> A8 B8 C8 D8 Patent application scope No. 86101883 Patent application Chinese application patent scope amendment April of the Republic of China amended the consumer cooperation of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du printed 1 A key input on the screen One of the second text codes of the key selection operation using the cursor on the pen screen in the first and second fields of the keys displayed on the screen is based on: within the key area The contact pressure in the key area and the number of further contacts in each key area, etc. 2. If you apply for special placement, the touch input entered in the key area mentioned above has the following steps: judging the state of the previous touched state, and borrowing. From this, it is determined that the mobile display keyboard input device is selected to be displayed on the screen display keyboard input device under the state of the keys. Among them, at least the aforementioned • is set to a character code indicating a character such as a number, a symbol, and the like, and is provided with an instruction for the key. The display is either a touch of a finger, or is displayed using a standard keyboard input method, and judges whether the keyboard input is different. The screen display set at the first of each key and the selection processing means for output processing is characterized by the differences between the aforementioned key selection operations, the length of movement, the length of the key area contact time *, and whether or not to press a key outside the screen It can be distinguished by any one of the operation of the touched area, the touched area in the distinguished area, and the key mode. The screen display keyboard input and disk loading input method of the first item of the benefit range is constituted by tapping each key input method displayed on the screen. The aforementioned selection processing means refers to the distance that the touch input means keeps moving within the aforementioned key field. The judgment hand means whether it is longer than the specified distance. When judging by the aforementioned touch input means when the touched distance is shorter than the specified distance, select t to read. Note on the back Φ then fill in the binding page III. Zhang scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -1-repair jl supplement> A8 B8 C8 D8 Patent Application No. 86101883 Patent Application Chinese Application Patent Scope Amendment April 1989 Correction for the consumption cooperation of employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 1 A key entered on the screen and displayed on the first and second fields of the key displayed on the screen. The key selection operation is one of the second character codes, and the keyboard output device is based on the following: the contact pressure in the key area of the key area and the connection between the key areas. Various types such as the number of times 2. In the case of applying for special placement, the touch input input in the aforementioned key field includes: determining the segment moved in the state of holding the touch before, and moving the display-type keyboard input device based on the determination of the state of the key Is a keyboard input device selected for display on a picture screen display. Among them, the aforementioned • is set at least to indicate a character code such as a number, a symbol, and the like, and is provided with a display indicating the aforementioned keys or a finger contact type, or using a display. In the standard keyboard input means and judging the difference of this keyboard input, the screen display of the first selection of each key and the selection processing means for output processing are displayed as follows: the difference between the aforementioned key selection operations and the moving length , The size of the contact time of the key area *, whether to press the key outside the screen, the touched area in the distinguished area, and the key method. The screen display keyboard input and disk loading input method of the first item of the benefit range is constituted by tapping each key input method displayed on the screen. The aforementioned selection processing means refers to the distance that the touch input means keeps moving within the aforementioned key field. The judgment hand means whether it is longer than the specified distance. When judging by the aforementioned touch input means when the touched distance is shorter than the specified distance, select t to read. Note on the back Φ then fill in the binding page III. Zhang scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -1-Printed by Employee Consumption Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 413779 I D8 VI. Patent application scope Output the first text code set by this key When the moving distance of the touch input means is determined to be greater than a specified length, a character generating means for the second character code set by the key is selected and output. 3. For the screen display keyboard input device in the first scope of the application for a patent, wherein the keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means which is input by touching each key area displayed on the screen, and the aforementioned selection processing means * It is provided with a judgment means for judging whether the duration of the state that the touch input means keeps touching in the key area is longer than a specified time, and the judgment means determines whether the touch input means is If the duration of the key state is shorter than the specified time, the first text code set by the key is selected and output. If the duration of the touch input means is judged to be longer than the specified time, the output is selected. Character generation means of the second character code set by the key. 4. As the screen display keyboard input device of the first scope of the application for a patent, wherein the keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means that is input by touching each key area displayed on the screen, the aforementioned selection processing means, The determination means includes: a determination means for determining whether the pressure of the touch input means in the key area is greater than a specified pressure, and using the determination means to determine whether the touch input means is more than the specified pressure In the case, the first character code set by the key is selected and output, and when the touch pressure of the touch input means is smaller than the specified pressure, the character generation means of the second character code set by the key is selected and output. 5. For example, the screen display keyboard input device of the scope of patent application, wherein the aforementioned keyboard input means is to touch each key displayed on the screen. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male). (Li) ------------ -------- --Order --------- I {Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -2-Economy Printed by the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives 413779 Touch input method for selecting D8 and inputting patent application fields and keys located outside the screen. The aforementioned selection processing means has: when the button is not pressed When the touch input means is used to touch in the key area, the first text code set by the key is selected and output. When the key is pressed, the touch input means is used in the key area. In the case of internal tapping, select a character generation method for outputting the second character code set by the key. 6. The on-screen keyboard input device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the aforementioned keyboard input means is constituted by a touch input means which is input by touching each key area displayed on the screen, and the aforementioned selection processing means, Judgment means for judging which one is touched among the first and second areas that are distinguished in each key area, and by this judgment means, when the judgment is that the first area is touched, the output of the key set is selected. For the first character code, the judgment means selects the character generation means for outputting the second character code set by the key when the judgment is touched in the second area. 7. The screen display keyboard input device according to item 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 of the scope of patent application, wherein the aforementioned touch input means is a pen input means using a touch pen. 8 · For the screen display keyboard input device of the second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth patent application, the aforementioned touch input means is a touch screen input means using a finger to touch the screen. 9. If the on-screen keyboard input device of item 1 of the application scope is applied, wherein the aforementioned keyboard input means is formed by a cursor-type input means that is entered by touching a cursor displayed on the screen and touching each key area displayed on the screen, the aforementioned The choice of processing means is: in the above-mentioned cursor is located in each key area, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) &lt; Please read the precautions before filling in this page) —------ ^ · I ----- III -3-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A8 413779 i D8 Sixth, the status of the scope of the patent application is set by the cursor input method Among the second keys, the judgment means of which key is depressed, and the judgment means selects and outputs the first text code set by the key when the judgment is that the first key is depressed. The judgment means is in the judgment system. 2 When the key is pressed, it selects the character generating means for outputting the second character code set by the key. 10. For example, the screen display keyboard input device of the scope of application for patent, wherein the keyboard input means is formed by a cursor type input means that is input by touching a cursor displayed on the screen and touching each key area displayed on the screen. The selection processing means includes: judging whether the keys set by the cursor-type input means perform a drag operation of the mobile cursor-type input means in a state where the cursor is located in each key area before being pressed or being depressed. (DRAG) judging means, and when judging that the key of the cursor-type input means has been pressed, the judging means selects and outputs the first text code set by the key, and the judging means judges that the input means has been dragged In the case of selecting, the character generating means for outputting the second character code set by the key is selected. 11. For example, the screen display keyboard input device of the scope of application for a patent, wherein the keyboard input means is formed by a cursor type input means that is touched by a touchpad displayed on the screen and touched on each key area of the screen, The selection processing means includes: a determination means for determining how many times a key is touched within a specified time using the cursor input means, and a selection means for selecting and outputting when determining that the key is touched once within a specified time. The first text code of the key is set. The judging means selects and outputs the second paper code set by the key when the key is judged to be touched twice within a specified time. The Chinese paper standard (CNS &gt; A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ^ -------- Order!-Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A 4一 is 413779 VI. Means for generating text in the patent application range. Please read it first. Please fill in the contents on the back and fill in this page 1 2. For example, the on-screen keyboard input device in the scope of patent application No. 1 Among them, the aforementioned keyboard input means is The cursor displayed on the screen is composed of a cursor-type input means that is input by touching each key area displayed on the screen. The selection processing means includes: the first and the second each of which are distinguished in each key area. In the field, the determination method of which field is touched, and when the determination method is touched in the first field of the determination system, the first text code set by the key is selected to be output. The determination method is used in the second field of the determination system. When you touch it, you can choose to output the character generation method of the second text code set by the key. 1 3. If the scope of patent application is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 1 1 or 1 2 The screen display type keyboard input device of the item, wherein on the foregoing screen, 15 primary keys of 3 columns of 5 columns above and below are displayed. Each primary key displays at least signs corresponding to the first and second text codes. 1 4. If a patent is applied for The on-screen keyboard input device in the range of item 13 is that among the above 15 primary keys, the left part of each of the 5 keys in the upper section displays the "Qj," E "," Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs "U", "0", the left part of each of the 5 keys in the middle section displays "A", "D", "Gj," and "L" in order from the left, and each of the 4 keys in the lower section The left part of the field displays "Z", "C", "B", "M" in order from the left, and the aforementioned display "Q", "E", "T", "U", "〇", " "A", "D", "G", "J", "Z", "c", and "B" are displayed on the right side of the keys, and "W", "R," "γ", "I" "This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 male f) 413779 8888 ABCD Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Scope of patent application," Pj, "S", rF "," η "," K ", Γχ" '"V j," N ". 15. If the on-screen keyboard input device according to item 14 of the scope of patent application, in the above-mentioned areas where each key of "L" and "M" is displayed, the long-symbol "one" and the comma "," are displayed on the right side: In the area of the key at the right end of the lower paragraph, the period "." Is displayed on the left and the symbol "." Is displayed on the right. 〇16. For example, the on-screen keyboard input device in the scope of patent application No. 14 displays "L", "M" The semicolon "; j, comma", "is displayed on the right side of each key field of" "; the period" · "is displayed on the left side of the key field at the right end of the lower paragraph.": "Is displayed on the right side: j 〇17. The on-screen keyboard input device of item 13 of the range, among the above-mentioned primary key areas composed of 15 primary keys, the left and right reference sides are arranged in two rows, and the six primary keys are respectively set to input the vowels representing Japanese. The English alphabets "A", "I", "U", "E", "0" and other vowel keys and the dial key for inputting the "person", the 9 main keys in the three columns arranged in the aforementioned main key area are set as input Of K "," S "," T "," N "," Η "," M "," Υ "," R "," Comment "consonant keys, and among them" 1 ("," Sj, "T" , "N", "Η" and other keys are set to input the keys "G", "Z", "D", "Pj," B ", etc. in the state of displacement. The on-screen display keyboard input device of the item, among the above-mentioned primary key areas constituted by the 15 primary keys, ------------ send ---------order --I-- 1 --- Line 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1 6 _ 413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent Application The left and right sides of the range are set to 5 of the 6 primary keys with 2 columns on the reference side. Enter "A j 'Γ I j, Γ uj factory E j" 0 j key &gt; The remaining configuration of the area is 3 columns of 9 primary keys. Please set them to enter "KJ, r SJ," T J factory NJ, Hiroshima ", and read Γ Μ J first. The key of the factory YJ "R j &quot; WJ is also the aforementioned" the displacement state of the key of the back J, factory IJ, Γ u J, Γ E j 1 r 0 J. Note that the factory Q j &gt; r JJ Comma "9 J · * period factory 0j, factory item" K fill X j aforementioned J, r S j "T J Γ NJ Γ H j write factory M J factory Y" -R ", Γ w" keys The setting page Nw in the shifted state is-for the input factory GJ \ factory ZJ factory DJX factory PJ factory B j factory CJ, Γ F j% factory VJ factory L j key 0 1 9 • Rufeng patent scope 1 The screen display type keyboard input device of the item, among which the foregoing 15 main keys set the number factory 0 j number Γ 1 J, number factory 2 j, number factory 3 j number factory 4 j number factory 5 J% number factory 6 j number Γ 7 j Digital Factory 8 j, Digital Factory 9 j, Mark Factory j Mark Factory — j, Mark Γ XJ or Factory * J ·· Mark Factory + j Or factory / J, mark factory * j and other input keys 0 2 0 • If the screen display keyboard input device of the 13th item of the patent scope is stringed, among the aforementioned 15 primary keys, the first and second text codes are set as input respectively Bracket factory J, Γ JJ Γ (J, factory) j factory &lt; J factory &gt; j factory (J% Γ) J% Γ {j &gt; factory} j 'factory t J factory * j factory j &gt; factory »J% colon Γ: J, semicolon Γ tj, asterisk factory * J, tick mark Γ # J a η d key factory & j% question mark factory?", Modified symbol "丨", symbol "/", symbol " ~ ", The paper size of the modified notebook applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) -7-413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent application scope number" @ ", USD_", symbol "= 2 1. If the registration device is used, the left and right sides of the input key represent the mother of Japanese "E", "0", and the input keys such as "$", Japanese yen "¥", and hyphen "" are left in the main key area. Please use the on-screen keyboard of item 13 of the patent scope to input the primary key area composed of the aforementioned 15 primary keys. The 6 primary keys arranged on the quasi-side are set as the alphabets "A", "I", "U", the vowel key, and the dial key for inputting "Person". The 9 main keys in the lower three columns are set to input "K", factory S ", Γ T", "N", "Η", "M Y", "R", "WJ consonant keys, and the states of vowel keys such as" A ", Γ IU", "E", "0 J, and the dial key" People "are set to input EI j," 0 U , "T", "N", "W", "D", "P", ".", Long sound 2 2. If you apply to the device, the left and right sides of the key represent the mother of Japanese "E", "0" The keys of "K", Γ into "ΑΙ", "UI", "UU", "Ya1: 1", and "1 ^" 丨, "Η ^ 'ΓΜι" Γγ, S Please read first. Note on the back then fill in I-book II Order R "Z" Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In the state of displacement, it is set to input keys such as "G",, ": B", accent ".", Comma "" 1 ", etc. Please use the on-screen keyboard of item 13 of the patent scope to input the primary key area composed of the aforementioned 15 primary keys. The 6 primary keys arranged on the quasi-side are set to the English alphabets "Α", "I", "U", the vowel key, and the dial key for inputting "Person". The 9 primary keys in the remaining three rows are set to lose S "," T "," N "," Η ", and" M "sentences. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 8-413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent application scope, "Y", "R", "W" consonant keys, and "A" "," "Lj", "Uj '" "E"', "Ο" and the vowel key "People" are set to enter "ya", "yuu", "yu", "you", "yo" in the shifted state. "" Pronounced ".", And "Kj," S "," T "," N "," Η "," Μ "," Y "," R "," W " The following settings are keys for inputting "G", "ZDPB, dots, dots, long dots, etc., etc. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 3 * such as Please use the screen input device of item 13 of the patent scope. Among them, at least one of the 15 primary keys mentioned above sets a third character code in addition to the foregoing two character codes, and the aforementioned selection processing means The judgment means for judging the key selection operation of selecting the first to third character codes inputted by the key input means described above, and the first to the first selection to be set on each key based on the key selection operation determined by the judgment means. A text generation means for outputting one of the third character codes. 2 4. As the screen display keyboard input device of item 13 in the scope of patent application, at least one of the above 15 primary keys is composed of the primary keys. Ge Jian sets the third character code and the fourth character code in addition to the two character codes, and the selection processing means judgment includes: determination means for determining the four types of key selection operations of the key input means, and based on the determination A character generation means that selects one of the first to fourth character codes of each key and performs output processing based on the key selection operation determined by the means "2 5. Such as patent scopes 2 and 3 4, 5, 6 1 〇, 1 This paper is in accordance with the Chinese national standard (Cl ^^ size (210 X 297 mm) Please read the precautions on the back before filling the 5-pack winter page I Thread 9-413779 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Scope of Patent Application 項之畫面顯示式 鍵盤輸入襄·^其中，係具備有：切換^在前述畫面上顯示 之記號及該鍵被輕觸時所產生的文字碼的排列之排列切換 手段。 2 6 ·如底請專利範圍第1、2、3、4、5、6、 _紙':'— p、.'- 10、1 11，....4 5-.㈣ a： &gt; 鍵盤輸入吳&quot;置，其中，於前述畫面，函上下3段左右5列 的1 5個鍵所構成之主鍵區域之外，設有與主鍵區域相鄰 而設定各種功能之複數的支援鍵所構成之支援鍵區域。 ------------ 裝-------—訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格mo X 297公釐） -10 -The screen display type of the item. The keyboard input method includes: switching means for switching the symbol displayed on the screen and the arrangement of the character code generated when the key is touched. 2 6 · Please refer to the patent scopes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and _Paper ':' — p, .'- 10, 1 11, .... 4 5-.㈣ a: &gt; The keyboard input Wu is set. Among the above screens, in addition to the main key area composed of 15 keys of 3 columns of 5 columns above and below, there are plural support keys for setting various functions adjacent to the main key area. Composition of the supported key area. ------------ Install --------- Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The paper size printed by the employee consumer cooperative is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification mo X 297 mm) -10-
TW86101883A 1995-11-07 1997-02-18 Touch screen type keyboard input device TW413779B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP28862495A JP3738066B2 (en) 1995-11-07 1995-11-07 Screen touch input device
JP28861495A JP4316687B2 (en) 1995-11-07 1995-11-07 Screen touch input device
JP03093096A JP3727399B2 (en) 1996-02-19 1996-02-19 Screen display type key input device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW413779B true TW413779B (en) 2000-12-01

Family

ID=27287143

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW86101883A TW413779B (en) 1995-11-07 1997-02-18 Touch screen type keyboard input device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW413779B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6524187B2 (en) 2000-01-14 2003-02-25 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. Computer, method and recording medium for executing games using a pressure-sensitive controller

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6524187B2 (en) 2000-01-14 2003-02-25 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. Computer, method and recording medium for executing games using a pressure-sensitive controller

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR100478020B1 (en) On-screen key input device
JP4084582B2 (en) Touch type key input device
AU780674B2 (en) Integrated keypad system
JP5199459B2 (en) Man-machine interface that predicts user input in real time
JP4316687B2 (en) Screen touch input device
US6741235B1 (en) Rapid entry of data and information on a reduced size input area
EP0898222A1 (en) Keypad
JP4501018B2 (en) Portable terminal device and input device
WO2009027817A2 (en) Improved data entry system
JP3738066B2 (en) Screen touch input device
TW413779B (en) Touch screen type keyboard input device
JP2022094941A (en) Character input method, character input program, and character input device
KR101637163B1 (en) Apparatus for character input
JP2013219638A (en) Character input method and apparatus
JP3766695B2 (en) Screen display type key input device
JP3766695B6 (en) Screen display type key input device
KR20100025628A (en) The method of providing more bigger effect of button
KR100609020B1 (en) Device and method for inputting characters
JP2004046517A (en) Electronic equipment
JP4027964B2 (en) Keyboard sheet setting method
JP2013219637A (en) Character input method and apparatus
JP2003323248A (en) One-handed keying keyboard
KR20140122826A (en) command and text input method for a remote controller of smart TV
JP2009032172A (en) Character input device and communication terminal device using the same
KR20140122408A (en) command and text input method for a remote controller of smart TV

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MK4A Expiration of patent term of an invention patent